ISOGENConfigurationUsersGuide PDF

ISOGEN Configuration
User's Guide
Version 2014 (1.0)

December 2013
DISO-PE-200021A
Copyright
Copyright 2013 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Intergraph is part of Hexagon.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains
confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and
international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.
Portions of the user interface copyright 2012-2013 Telerik AD.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the
United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
300 Intergraph Way
Huntsville, AL 35813
Documentation
Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides,
Administrator's Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered with a
particular software product.
Other Documentation
Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on eCustomer, SharePoint, or
box.net, any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph as guidance for
using a software product.
Terms of Use
a.
Use of a software product and Documentation is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with the
software product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the
Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take
precedence and govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the
applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the
Documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal,
non-commercial use. The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.
b.
For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where end user does not receive a EULA or does not have a valid license
agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other
Documentation for Licensees internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a
reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation for Licensees internal, non-commercial. The Other Documentation may
not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time and for any
reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.
Disclaimer of Warranties
Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the EULA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergraph
Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed
a modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its
publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
ISOGEN Configuration User's Guide
Limitation of Damages
IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF
REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL INTERGRAPH CORPORATIONS LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT THAT
INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS
MADE. EXCEPT WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2)
YEARS AFTER THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED.
IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF THIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS
LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.
Export Controls
Intergraph Corporations software products and any third-party Software Products obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its
subsidiaries, or distributors (including any Documentation, Other Documentation or technical data related to these products) are
subject to the export control laws and regulations of the United States. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. These Software
Products, and the direct product thereof, must not be exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access)
under the following circumstances:
a.
To Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, or Syria, or any national of these countries.
b.
To any person or entity listed on any U.S. government denial list, including but not limited to, the U.S. Department of Commerce
Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, http://www.bis.doc.gov/complianceandenforcement/liststocheck.htm, the U.S.
Department of Treasury Specially Designated Nationals List, http://www.treas.gov/offices/enforcement/ofac/, and the U.S.
Department of State Debarred List, http://www.pmddtc.state.gov/compliance/debar.html.
c.
To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, the end use of the Software Product is related to the design,
development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or sensitive
nuclear uses.
d.
To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.
Any questions regarding export or re-export of these Software Products should be addressed to Intergraph Corporations Export
Compliance Department, Huntsville, Alabama 35894, USA.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, Intergraph Smart, PDS, SmartPlant, I-Sketch, I-Configure, SmartSketch, ISOGEN, and SPOOLGEN
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. DotNegMagic is a trademark of Crownwood Software.
All rights reserved. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc. Other brands and product names are trademarks
of their respective owners.
Contents
Preface .......................................................................................................................................................... 9
Documentation Comments ..................................................................................................................... 9
What's New in ISOGEN Configuration .................................................................................................... 9
ISOGEN Configuration .............................................................................................................................. 11
AText Reference Data .......................................................................................................................... 12
Using Alternative Text .................................................................................................................... 12
Examples ........................................................................................................................................ 14
Get online Help information .................................................................................................................. 15
Review the Interface .................................................................................................................................. 17
ISOGEN Configuration Menu ................................................................................................................ 21
Status and Error Messaging ................................................................................................................. 22
Configuration View .................................................................................................................................... 23
Options Panel........................................................................................................................................ 25
Drawing Preview Panel ......................................................................................................................... 26
Fit all drawing objects ..................................................................................................................... 28
Pan the view ................................................................................................................................... 28
Zoom in on an area or zoom out from a point ................................................................................ 28
Magnify an area of the preview drawing......................................................................................... 29
Report Definition Panel ......................................................................................................................... 30
Navigation Techniques ............................................................................................................................. 33
Return to the Home screen ................................................................................................................... 35
Switch to a different style category ....................................................................................................... 36
Switch to a different style group in the active category......................................................................... 37
Navigate the Options panel ................................................................................................................... 38
Search Filters ............................................................................................................................................. 39
Search by keyword ............................................................................................................................... 41
Search by option switch ........................................................................................................................ 42
Search by I-Configure property ............................................................................................................. 44
Search by AText number ...................................................................................................................... 46
View the Search history ........................................................................................................................ 48
Configure Drawing and Report Settings ................................................................................................. 49
Customize isometric style options......................................................................................................... 50
Set drawing units................................................................................................................................... 50
Edit the North arrow on isometric drawings .......................................................................................... 50
Set drawing dimension options ............................................................................................................. 51
Set drawing control options ................................................................................................................... 52
Enable revision clouds .......................................................................................................................... 52
Assign unique part numbers ................................................................................................................. 53
Contents
Specify the report output location ......................................................................................................... 54
Set flow arrow options ........................................................................................................................... 57
Set up a material list ............................................................................................................................. 57
Set up a cut list...................................................................................................................................... 58
Define the report layout ......................................................................................................................... 59
Print welds ............................................................................................................................................. 62
Configure a detail sketch ...................................................................................................................... 63
Drawing Configuration Tools ................................................................................................................... 65
Detail Sketch Manager .......................................................................................................................... 66
Drawing Setup Tool .............................................................................................................................. 71
Open the Drawing Setup Tool ........................................................................................................ 74
Move and resize windows .............................................................................................................. 74
Specify the backing sheet .............................................................................................................. 76
Define drawing margins and report layout...................................................................................... 76
Customize report settings ............................................................................................................... 78
Define drawing frame attributes ..................................................................................................... 83
Update the style .............................................................................................................................. 85
Basic Setup Page ........................................................................................................................... 85
Drawing Areas Page ....................................................................................................................... 87
Material List Page ........................................................................................................................... 90
Weld List Page ............................................................................................................................... 95
Cut List Page .................................................................................................................................. 97
Attributes Page ............................................................................................................................. 100
Add/Remove Attributes Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 102
Appendix: Isometric Drawing Properties .............................................................................................. 103
Drawing Manager ................................................................................................................................ 104
Drawing Generation...................................................................................................................... 105
Drawing File .................................................................................................................................. 122
Pre and Post Processor................................................................................................................ 129
Input Files ..................................................................................................................................... 131
Style Properties ............................................................................................................................ 135
Reports ......................................................................................................................................... 137
Drawing Area ...................................................................................................................................... 166
Piping Components ...................................................................................................................... 168
Piping Features ............................................................................................................................ 196
Enclosures .................................................................................................................................... 216
Graphics ....................................................................................................................................... 240
Content ......................................................................................................................................... 247
Detail Sketches ............................................................................................................................. 267
Revision Clouds ............................................................................................................................ 277
Text ............................................................................................................................................... 280
Dimensions ......................................................................................................................................... 292
Dimension Style ............................................................................................................................ 294
Piping Components and Features ................................................................................................ 307
Coordinates .................................................................................................................................. 324
Display Format ............................................................................................................................. 331
Skews and Falls ........................................................................................................................... 338
Reference Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 350
Reference Planes ......................................................................................................................... 355
Drawing Border ................................................................................................................................... 361
Contents
Attribute Display ........................................................................................................................... 362
Table Display ................................................................................................................................ 364
Title Texts for Fixed Material List ................................................................................................. 371
Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 372
Drawing Material List .................................................................................................................... 373
Part Numbers ............................................................................................................................... 422
Accumulation ................................................................................................................................ 429
Joints and Assemblies .................................................................................................................. 432
Text ............................................................................................................................................... 438
Reports ......................................................................................................................................... 448
Welds .................................................................................................................................................. 449
Implied Weld Rules ....................................................................................................................... 450
Appearance .................................................................................................................................. 452
Drawing Weld List......................................................................................................................... 466
Reports ......................................................................................................................................... 485
Spools ................................................................................................................................................. 486
Settings ......................................................................................................................................... 487
Flat Spools .................................................................................................................................... 493
Attributes ...................................................................................................................................... 497
Reports ......................................................................................................................................... 498
Cut Pieces ........................................................................................................................................... 499
Cut Length Calculations ............................................................................................................... 500
Drawing Cut List ........................................................................................................................... 503
Reports ......................................................................................................................................... 517
Appendix: ISOGEN Files ......................................................................................................................... 519
ASCII-SYMBOLS ................................................................................................................................ 519
BINARY-SYMBOLS ............................................................................................................................ 519
BOLT-INFORMATION-FILE ............................................................................................................... 520
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE ................................................................................................. 520
FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE ........................................................................................................... 522
BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT Section ............................................................................................... 523
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE Section .............................................................................. 526
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION Section ................................................................. 529
IDF-REVISIONS Section .............................................................................................................. 530
INSULTATION-WEIGHT-FILE Section ........................................................................................ 530
MISC-DEFINITIONS Section ....................................................................................................... 531
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE Section .............................................................................................. 532
SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT ......................................................................................................... 533
SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE ........................................................................................................... 535
UNITS-DEFINITION Section ........................................................................................................ 535
WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARY-FILE Section .................................................................................. 536
HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE ........................................................................................................... 540
INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE .............................................................................................................. 541
OPTION-SWITCH-OVERRIDE ........................................................................................................... 542
PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE .............................................................................................................. 543
PROJECT-MATERIAL-DATA ............................................................................................................. 544
PROJECT-MATERIAL-MANAGER..................................................................................................... 545
PROJECT-PIPELINE .......................................................................................................................... 546
REFERENCE-PLANE-DEFINITION ................................................................................................... 547
REMARKS .......................................................................................................................................... 548
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY .......................................................................................................................... 548
Contents
Appendix: Record Identification Numbers ........................................................................................... 551
Appendix: Weld Logic ............................................................................................................................. 555
Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 557
Preface
This document is a user's guide for ISOGEN Configuration and provides conceptual
information and procedural instructions for configuring the drawing style properties that control
ISOGEN isometric drawing and report output. The content is identical to the online Help that is
delivered ISOGEN Configuration.
Intergraph gives you permission to print as many copies of this document as you need for
non-commercial use at your company. You cannot reprint this document for resale or
redistribution outside your company.
Documentation Comments
We welcome comments or suggestions about this documentation. You can send us an email at:
[email protected].
Documentation updates for supported software versions are available from eCustomer
(https://www.crmweb.intergraph.com).
What's New in ISOGEN Configuration

The following changes have been made to ISOGEN Configuration.
Version 2014 (1.0)
ISOGEN Configuration documentation is new for this release. This documentation provides
instructions for using ISOGEN Configuration to set up and configure isometric drawing and
report output.
Preface
10
SECTION 1
ISOGEN Configuration simplifies the customization of the piping isometric drawings and reports
produced by ISOGEN. The software delivers a single, streamlined interface for setting isometric
drawing style properties. In ISOGEN, the isometric drawing style controls all of the options
related to the drawing and report appearance and information content produced during isometric
drawing generation. The ISOGEN Configuration environment provides easy access to
ISOGEN's substantial array of controls and files and enables you to configure projects quickly
and efficiently. Any modifications that you make can then be saved to the drawing style file for
future use.
Each isometric drawing style contains a group of object properties that control some aspect of
the drawings and reports that are produced by 2D piping solutions and 3D plant design software
products. These properties are stored in style file. During isometric drawing generation, the
contents of the style file are converted into the set of text control files that are read by ISOGEN.
As such, the way that you configure a style determines what the isometric drawing looks like
when the drawing is generated, as well as what information is included in a report. Multiple
drawing styles can exist side by side to produce different outputs from the same design file.
ISOGEN Configuration also includes the tools listed below. When used, these tools can further
streamline the process for configuring drawing output.
Drawing Setup Tool - Includes a limited set of drawing options that can assist you in
configuring the drawing template. The drawing template is usually a company standard
backing sheet on which ISOGEN plots the drawing and related data, such as the material
take-off, welding report, and project-related data. The Drawing Setup Tool has a graphical
interface, overlaying the location of key items onto the backing sheet. For more information,
see Drawing Setup Tool (on page 70).
Detail Sketch Manager - Helps you configure detail sketches for isometric drawing output.
The Detail Sketch Manager allows you to place parameters on the selected detail sketch so
that the correct relevant values, such as weld numbers, part numbers, and angles, are
plotted on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Detail Sketch Manager (on page
66).
Key features of ISOGEN Configuration are listed below:
Access all of the ISOGEN controls using a streamlined user interface.
Configure the drawing template and detail sketches for isometric drawing output using
convenient wizards.
Save style changes to an XML file.
Review the impact spontaneous style modifications have on drawing output using the built-in
drawing previewer.
Locate a specific property based on user-specified criteria using the Search feature.
11
AText Reference Data

Alternative Text, or AText as it is often called, is a powerful ISOGEN feature that enables you to
easily change or remove any text on the isometric drawing. The feature operates by assigning a
unique identification number to each standard text string. The system then refers to this ID
number whenever a change is required to the text string that the number represents.
By definition, a standard text string can be a single character, a single word, or a group of
words. However, some ATexts are, by default, set to an all-blank word. The total number of
separate standard text strings held by the software in this way is in excess of 300.
Identification Number Format

Because identification numbers are always negative, the numbers must be preceded by a minus
sign. For example, AText -249 represents the default word WEST, which is used in the main
isometric drawing area.
Using Alternative Text

Using Alternative Text
AText allows you to substitute your own text terminology or language in place of the standard
ISOGEN words on the isometric. To make a word change, you do not have to replace the entire
standard AText. You can change as little as a single one word, if that is all that is required.
Although the AText feature has a considerable degree of built-in flexibility, you must exercise a
certain amount of care when defining your own words, particularly in terms of word lengths. As a
general rule, newly defined words or word strings should be about equal in length or shorter
than the text you are replacing. Obvious exceptions to this are the cases of the single line
headings in the material list region. In this respect, you must take full responsibility for word
definition. ISOGEN does not warn you in cases which words are too long and cannot be
accommodated in the standard space provided on the isometric. Badly designed AText can lead
to undesirable results, such as over-writing or incorrectly positioned text.
Special Characters
The following special characters further extend the functionality of ATexts:
The Dollar ( $ ) Sign - The $ character, which is used in ISOGEN to force a new line in
regular isometric message text, can also be used with ATexts. However, when using the $
character, we recommend that you carefully check the output results of each occurrence.
The Question Mark ( ? ) - The ? character has the following two uses:
12
In ATexts -210 (Flange Part Number), -211 (Gasket Part Number) and -212 (Bolt Part
Number) to suppress the plotting of the single characters normally associated with
these ATexts, without switching off their associated facility, as would normally happen
when an AText is set to blank. For example, setting AText -210 ? suppresses the F
character that is usually plotted. This AText does not completely suppress the plotting of
the flange material list part number as would normally happen when an AText item is set
to blank. Using the ? character is particularly useful on spool isometrics.
In some special ATexts at points where the software dynamically inserts information. By
default, AText -456 is set to DETAIL ?. As a result, the software inserts a letter or a
number, depending upon the system that you have specified at the position of the ?
character.
The "At" ( @ ) Sign - You can use the @ character to pad out an AText string with trailing
blanks. As a result, the text that follows the AText is separated from the AText by a series of
blanks.
Foreign Language Use

AText is particularly beneficial to foreign language users who want to produce isometrics
containing text in their native language. However, there are restrictions governing which
characters are permissible. Those restrictions are outlined in The Usable Character Set.
The Usable Character Set

You can only use the following standard English and special purpose characters in AText
definitions:
Upper- or lower-case letters in the range A to Z.
Numeric characters in the range 0 to 9 inclusive.
A blank space character.
The following special purpose symbols: * + - . , : [ ] ( ) # ' < > = | & %
Other foreign language characters, such as those used in the Cyrillic, Greek, or
Chinese alphabets, are excluded, as are specially accentuated characters, such as , , , and
so on.
AText and the Drawing Frame Symbols

The AText feature goes further than just controlling text characters. The standard symbols
appearing in the line summary area across the bottom of the standard ISOGEN drawing frame,
for shop weld, field weld, and so on through traced pipe, can all be suppressed when they are
not required by setting their associated ATexts to blank.
Composite Text Messages

Composite text messages are made up of more than one text item. The composition is done by
ISOGEN automatically. Such messages can be composed in either of the following two ways:
By combining two or more related ATexts
By combining AText and an associated design database attribute value
Generally, in cases in which AText operates together with design database attribute information
to form a composite message, setting the AText part to blank to suppress plotting the message
causes suppression of the attribute text as well. For example, if the composite message BATCH
REF: 12/100A/C in the title block area needs to be completely suppressed, then setting AText
-252 (Title Block Batch) , which contains the words BATCH REF, to blank causes both this and
the attribute part, 12/100A/C, not to be plotted.
See Also
Examples (on page 14)
13
Examples
The following are some examples of standard ATexts:
The material list heading ERECTION MATERIALS.
The isometric connection messages CONN. TO and CONT. ON in the main drawing area.
The BATCH REF and PIPING SPEC headings in the title block area.
Each of these are default AText words that are programmed in by ISOGEN. However, you can
re-program them, if required, as explained in the following examples.
Example 1: ERECTION MATERIALS

You can find ERECTION MATERIALS as AText -310 (Erection Material Handling). To change
the default heading (ERECTION MATERIALS) to CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, the entry
-310 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS must appear in the appropriate data input file.
Example 2: CONN.TO
CONN TO. is an example of a composite message that is used at locations at which pipelines
are connected to equipment nozzles. You can find it as AText -208 (Equipment Connection).
To change the message CONN. TO to JOIN TO, the entry -208 JOIN TO must appear in the
appropriate data input file. Information regarding the joined to component, that is, the nozzle
name as extracted from the design database, is automatically appended to the AText by
ISOGEN to form a composite message, such as JOIN TO D45-NZ12.
Example 3: BATCH REF

BATCH REF is another composite message example (AText -252 (Title Block Batch)). The
message is used to convey plant zone or area information in the title block area of the isometric
where the contents of the BATCH (AREA) type record in the pipeline input data file is
automatically appended by ISOGEN. An example of this kind of message is BATCH REF :
AR-A/TF/N12.
To remove the batch reference entry from the isometric, set the AText entry in the input data file
(IDF) to blank, thus: -252.
Doing so removes the entire composite message from the isometric, both the AText BATCH
REF : part and the following design database attribute that holds the batch reference
information.
You can quickly locate a specific AText using the Search feature. For more information,
see Search Filters (on page 39).
14
Get online Help information

As you work, you can use the resources listed below for assistance using ISOGEN
Configuration:
Online Help - Opens the standard online Help system that comes with the software. To
access online Help, click
, and then select ISOGEN Configuration Help on the Help
sub-menu. Alternatively, click Help
on the far right-side of the ISOGEN Configuration title
bar.
Tool Information - Displays details about each property, including the corresponding
I-Configure property name (1) and the option switch that the property defines (2). In many
instances, details about the property settings are available. Mouse over Tool Information
to display property details.
In instances where I-Configure or Option switch information is not applicable, the
software displays N/A.
Printable Guide - Opens the online Help in a printable guide format. Click
, and then
select Help > Printable Guides to access the ISOGEN Configuration User's Guide provided
in PDF format. You need Adobe Acrobat version 9.x or later to open the PDF files.
15
16
Context-sensitive Help - Provides immediate information about isometric drawing style

property settings. When a property is in focus in the Options panel, press F1 to display the
Help topic for the "parent" options group to which the property belongs. For example,
pressing F1 when Dimensions > Skews and Falls > Hatching > Gap for Text is in focus
(1) opens the online Help and displays information about the properties in the Hatching
options group (2).
Review the Interface
SECTION 2

Each time that you open ISOGEN Configuration, the Home screen displays. The Home screen
provides the work area for selecting the isometric drawing style category that contains the
properties that you want to configure, accessing the Drawing Setup Tool, and searching for
specific isometric drawing options and properties to view or edit.
From the Home screen you can open the Configuration view, which provides direct
access to all of the isometric drawing style properties as well as properties that control and
define report output. For more information, see Configuration View (on page 23).
The key features of the Home screen are noted in the example below and described in the
section that follows:
17
1.
Menu - Provides access to setting drawing units, viewing user documentation, and
updating the style file with any changes. For more information, see ISOGEN Configuration
Menu (on page 20).
2. Navigation Bar - Displays the ISOGEN Configuration breadcrumb trail, which indicates the
active isometric drawing style, and, when applicable, the drawing style category and style
group that are currently selected. In the example below, the active drawing style is Check
(1). The currently selected category is Dimensions (2) and the selected style group is
Coordinates (3), respectively.
It is the convention throughout the ISOGEN Configuration Help documentation to refer

to the style category and style group collectively. For example, Dimensions >
Coordinates refers to the Dimensions style category and Coordinates style group.
The style category name is synonymous with the name of the pane that appears on the
Home screen.
For more information about navigating the software, see Navigation Techniques (on
page 33).
3. Search Box - Allows you to locate isometric drawing style properties based on a keyword,
option switch, property name, or AText number search. For more information, see Search
Filters (on page 39).
18

4. Category Pane - Represents a related grouping of ISOGEN isometric drawing controls.
Drawing Manager - Organizes a collection of properties that set options for system
controls, including pre- and post-processors and the names of the input files used by
ISOGEN. The Drawing Manager category also supports the definition of all of the
ISOGEN reports. For more information, see Drawing Manager (on page 104).
Drawing Area - Organizes a collection of properties that control the content that
displays on the isometric drawing. The Drawing Area category also includes properties
the define pipeline component representation on the drawing. For more information, see
Drawing Area (on page 166).
Dimensions - Organizes a collection of properties that control the display and format of
dimensions and coordinate data on the isometric drawing. For more information, see
Dimensions (on page 292).
Drawing Border - Organizes a collection of properties that specify the attributes plotted
on the drawing frame, as well as their placement within the drawing frame. The
Drawing Border category also includes properties that define symbol shape
positioning. For more information, see Drawing Border (on page 360).
Materials - Organizes a collection of properties that control the position, format, and
contents of the parts list. For more information, see Materials (on page 371).
Welds - Organizes a collection of properties that control the display of welds on the
isometric drawing. The Welds category also includes properties that set options for
weld-specific reports. The weld list is the report that appears in the drawing, while the
weld list summary contains the weld data formatted in a text file. For more information,
see Welds (on page 449).
Spools - Organizes a collection of properties that define spool attribute data output on
the isometric drawing. The Spools category also includes properties that define spool
attribute data to summary report files, such as the spool information file. For more
information, see Spools (on page 486).
Cut Pieces - Organizes a collection of properties for the cut list, which provides a list of
pipes that are cut into smaller lengths during construction. For more information, see
Cut Pieces (on page 498).
19
A category appears in its on pane on the Home screen.
Each category is further broken down into a collection of related style groups. For
example, Cut Pieces includes three style groups: Drawing Cut List, Reports, and Cut
Length Calculations, whereas the Materials category includes six style groups:
Drawing Material List, Part Numbers, Accumulation, Joints and Assemblies,
Reports, and Text.
When you click a style group in one of the category panes, the software opens the
Configuration view, which displays an additional subset of options. For more
information, see Configuration View (on page 23).
5. Drawing Setup Tool - Opens the Drawing Setup Tool, which you can use to quickly
configure the drawing template. The drawing template is usually a company standard
backing sheet on which ISOGEN plots the drawing and related data, such as the material
take-off, welding report, and project-related data. The setup tool has a graphical interface,
overlaying the location of key items onto the backing sheet. For more information, see
Drawing Setup Tool (on page 70).
20
ISOGEN Configuration Menu

Displays commands for setting drawing units, accessing user documentation, and
updating the style file with any changes. The commands listed below are available on the menu:
Home - Returns you to the ISOGEN Configuration Home screen.
Options - Opens the Options dialog box so you can specify the drawing units at the application
level. For more information, see Set drawing units (on page 50).
Save - Writes the current property settings and parameters to the active style file. You can also
save property settings by clicking
at the bottom of the Home screen.
Help - Allows you to access product information. For more information, see Get online Help
information (on page 15).
ISOGEN Configuration Help - Opens the ISOGEN Configuration online Help. You can
also access the online Help by clicking Help
on the Home screen title bar.
Printable Guides - Opens the delivered PDF manual. You need Adobe Acrobat version
9.x or later to open PDF files
Technical User Forum - Opens the Intergraph Technical User Forum website. This site
contains user discussions on using Intergraph products.
About ISOGEN Configuration - Provides ISOGEN Configuration version information.
Exit - Closes ISOGEN Configuration. You can also close ISOGEN Configuration by clicking
at the bottom of the Home screen.
21
Status and Error Messaging

As you work, ISOGEN Configuration can display status and warning messages at the top of the
Preview window in the Configuration view. In addition to the text description, each message
type has an associated color code.
Error - Represents an error message for which an operation had to be stopped, as shown in the
example below:
Warning - Represents a warning message for which an operation could not be completed, as
shown in the example below:
Status - Represents a general status message.
Click X on the right side of the message box to close the message. Otherwise, the
message continues to display. As further warning or status messages display, they accumulate
in the messaging section with the most recent message displaying at the top.
22
Configuration View
SECTION 3
Configuration View
The Configuration view is used to control all the properties related to the appearance and
information content of the active isometric drawing style. This view is also used to define the
output location, content, and layout of the ISOGEN reports. The software automatically displays
the Configuration view whenever you select a style group on the Home screen.
The Configuration view window is divided into left and right panels. The Options panel
appears on the left side of the window (1). The panel that appears on the right side depends on
the type of ISOGEN controls that you are configuring. For example, if you are configuring
drawing output, the Configuration view shows the Drawing Preview panel (2).
The Drawing Preview panel also includes a View toolbar (3).
As shown in the example above, the Drawing Preview panel displays a sample isometric
drawing. As you configure the active style, the drawing dynamically updates so that you can
view the effect of your drawing property settings.
23
Configuration View
When you are configuring report output, the Configuration view shows the Report Definition
panel (1). Use the Report Definition panel to simplify the process for configuring ISOGEN
reports. The example below shows the report definition for the material control report as it
appears in the Report Definition panel.
Options Panel (on page 25)

Drawing Preview Panel (on page 26)
Report Definition Panel (on page 30)
What do you want to do?
24
Fit all drawing objects (on page 28)
Pan the view (on page 28)
Zoom in on an area or zoom out from a point (on page 28)
Magnify an area of the preview drawing (on page 29)
Configuration View
Options Panel
Organizes the options groups that belong to the active style group. The example below shows
the four options groups that belong to Dimensions > Coordinates, which are Display, Bends
and Branches, Supports, and Heat Tracing.
The name of the active style group displays as the title of the Options panel. In the
example above, the panel is called the Coordinates panel.
Clicking
expands the options group and displays all of its related isometric drawing style
properties. You can modify any of these properties as needed. Some properties have a
selection list from which you can select a value. Other properties require you to type a value or
text string. Changing the value of each property ultimately determines the appearance of the
isometric drawing and report file content produced during drawing generation. In the example
below, changing the True/False settings control whether coordinates for reference items and
break-in points are shown on the generated drawing.
Click
to collapse the options group and hide its properties.
25
Configuration View
Drawing Preview Panel

Displays a sample isometric drawing that is representative of the current isometric drawing
property settings.
The preview drawing is based on a sample piping component file (PCF) delivered with the
software.
As you configure drawing properties, the drawing view updates so you can see the impact a
property setting has on the drawing output. The examples below show the effects of changing
the Above Line setting from True (1), where dimensions are placed above the dimension line,
to False (2), where dimensions are inserted into the dimension line.
By default, the drawing view in the Drawing Preview panel updates automatically
whenever a drawing property is modified. If Automatically Refresh
is turned off, you must
manually update the drawing view by clicking Refresh
on the View toolbar.
26
Configuration View
Control the display of data
The View toolbar provides commands for manipulating the view of the example drawing in the
Drawing Preview panel. For example, you can adjust the view to display the entire drawing, or
you can focus on specific parts of the drawing. You can also increase or decrease the viewing
area. Decreasing causes everything within the Drawing Preview panel to appear larger, while
increasing causes everything within the window to appear smaller. The following commands are
available on the View toolbar:
Select - Selects a specific object in the isometric drawing. When you select an object in the
preview drawing, it highlights in red.
Fit View - Displays the entire contents of the isometric drawing in the Drawing Preview
panel. For more information, see Fit all drawing objects (on page 28).
Pan - Repositions the drawing in the Drawing Preview panel so that you can view another
section of the drawing without changing the view magnification. For more information, see
Pan the view (on page 28).
Zoom - Increases or decreases the display size of the drawing in the Drawing Preview
panel. You can zoom in to get a closer view of an object or zoom out to view more of the
drawing at a reduced size. Click the left mouse button and drag the pointer upward in the
window to increase the view of an object as though you were moving closer to it. Drag the
pointer downward in the window to reduce the view as though you were moving further
away from the object. For more information, see Zoom in on an area or zoom out from a
point (on page 28).
Zoom Area - Increases the view magnification of an area in the isometric drawing that you
define with by drawing a fence around the part of the drawing to enlarge. For more
information, see Magnify an area of the preview drawing (on page 29).
Automatic Refresh - Controls whether the software automatically updates the view of the
drawing in the Drawing Preview panel after a setting is changed. By default, this
command is active. When the command is turned off, you must use Refresh to manually
update the isometric drawing preview.
Refresh - Updates the view of the drawing in the Drawing Preview panel to display any
changes to the drawing settings that you have defined since the last refresh action.
To cancel the active View command, do one of the following: select a different command,
click Select
, or right-click anywhere in the Drawing Preview panel.
Fit all drawing objects (on page 28)
Pan the view (on page 28)
Zoom in on an area or zoom out from a point (on page 28)
Magnify an area of the preview drawing (on page 29)
27
Configuration View
Fit all drawing objects
Click Fit View
The display in the Drawing Preview panel updates so that the entire drawing is visible.
Pan the view

1. Click Pan
The cursor changes to

2. Click a point in the Drawing Preview panel, and then drag the cursor up, down, left, or right
to view other areas of the drawing.
Zoom in on an area or zoom out from a point

1. Click Zoom
2. Perform the following actions to zoom in and out:
28
To zoom in, click a starting point in the Drawing Preview panel, and then drag the
cursor upward in the panel to increase the view size of the drawing area.
To zoom out, click a starting point in the Drawing Preview panel, and then drag the
cursor downward to reduce the view of the drawing area.
Click Fit View
When you roll the IntelliMouse wheel backward when the Zoom command is active, the
drawing view zooms out at the current cursor location. When you roll the wheel of the
IntelliMouse forward, the drawing view zooms in.
to fit the entire drawing in the Drawing Preview panel.
Configuration View
Magnify an area of the preview drawing

1. Click Zoom Area

2. Click a start point in the Preview window and drag to an end point in the active view to
fence the area to enlarge. The fence appears as a red dotted line.
3. Release the mouse.

The Preview window display updates to show the selected area.
Click Fit View
to display the entire drawing in the Preview window again.
29
Configuration View
Report Definition Panel

Drawing Manager > Reports organizes all of the reports that ISOGEN can output during
isometric drawing generation. In addition to this global Reports panel, the Materials, Welds,
Spools, and Cut Pieces categories each contain a content-specific subset of report types. For
example, you can use Welds > Reports to define the weld summary and site weld information
reports, while Spools > Reports enables you to define the spool information report. For more
information about the global Reports panel, see Reports (on page 136).
Whenever the Reports style group is active (1), the Configuration view displays the Report
Definition panel. The report options that are shown in this panel depend on the report type that
you are defining. All report types require that you specify an output location for the report file,
and many report types display a preview of the report contents. However, some reports also
provide options for defining the report layout, including which attributes are output (2) and
whether the title block (3) and column headers (4) display. As you define the layout for these
report types, a preview of the report displays at the bottom of the window. As you modify the
layout, the preview updates dynamically (5).
30
Configuration View
Report Definition Panel Options
The options listed below are not available for all report types. For example, some
reports allow you to only define the output location. Other reports allow you to specify attribute
data and define the layout.
Report Location - Specifies the output location of the report. Type the full path and filename of
the report. Alternatively, click Browse
option is mandatory.
, and navigate to the output location. Setting this
Include Title Block - Controls the output of a report title. To include a title, select the checkbox.
Title Block - Specifies the report title output by ISOGEN. Type the title of the report in the text
box. Use the SPACEBAR and ENTER keys to insert spaces and blank lines. This option
displays only if Include Title Block is selected.
Include Column Headers - Controls the output of column headers. To include headers, select
the checkbox.
Column Headers - Specifies the display name for each column of attribute data that is output in
the report. This option displays only if Include Column Headers is selected.
In the text box, type the display name for each column that you have selected for output. Use
the SPACEBAR to insert empty spaces between each display name. To insert a blank row so
that you can type another line of text, press ENTER. The display in the Preview pane updates
as you enter text. The example below shows the relationship between the content of the
Column Headers box (1) and the content in the Preview pane (2).
Report Layout - Displays the attributes selected for the active report. Each attribute translates
to a column of data in the report. For each attribute, you can define the data listed below:
Comments - Opens a text box so that you can type a text comment for any
definition contained in the previous column. If any text is entered in this field, the text is
output as a comment--preceded by a !--to the relevant data or summary report file.
Start - Specifies the starting point for the column.
Maximum Characters - Defines the maximum number of characters allowed in the

column.
31
Configuration View
Justification - Defines the justification of the text within the column. Select Left, Right,
or Numeric.
Enabled - Controls the display of data in the report file for the component group defined
by the Group setting. Select the checkbox to display component data for the specified
group. This option displays only for the neutral report.
Group - Specifies the component group output in the current report file record. Select a
component group in the list. This option displays only for the neutral report.
To add an attribute to the report layout, open an options group and double-click the
attribute name. For more information, see Define the report layout (on page 59).
Preview - Displays a preview of the report content based on the current report definition
parameters. When you first begin defining a report, a Preview (file not found) ! error message
displays until you specify the output location in the Report Location box.
Automatic Refresh - Controls whether the software automatically updates the report
Preview. By default, this command is active. When the command is turned off, you must use
Refresh to manually update the isometric drawing preview.
Refresh - Updates the view of the report to display any changes to the layout that you have
made since the last refresh action.
32
Navigation Techniques
SECTION 4
ISOGEN Configuration organizes the hundreds of ISOGEN drawing controls using a hierarchical
structure that consists of three levels of content: style category, style group, and option group.
Each option group is further broken down into collections of related drawing properties.
For more information, see Options Panel in Configuration View (on page 23).
This hierarchical structure breaks down the wide array of ISOGEN controls into manageable
chunks of information. To help you keep track and know where you are within the hierarchy,
ISOGEN Configuration uses a location-based breadcrumb navigation style. By providing a
breadcrumb trail that illustrates how the hierarchy of ISOGEN drawing controls is structured, you
can use one-click access to freely move through the hierarchy to configure drawing properties.
The ISOGEN Configuration breadcrumb trail indicates in which collection of drawing properties
you are, and more importantly allows you to navigate your way through the product to find other
collections of drawing properties. The breadcrumb trail starts with the name of the active style.
After this, the active style category is listed, followed by the active style group.
In the example below, the Check breadcrumb represents the active style and provides links to
the style categories.
Each style category is synonymous to a category pane on the Home screen. For more
information, see Review the Interface (on page 17).
In the next example, the Spools breadcrumb represents the active style category and provides
links to its collection of style groups.
33
The Settings breadcrumb, shown in the example below, represents the active style group (1).
Each style group contains a collection of related option groups. When a style group is active,
each options group that it contains is listed in the Options panel (2).
Each options group contains a collection of related drawing properties (3), which are used
to configure isometric drawing and report output. For more information, see Options Panel in
Configuration View (on page 23).
34
Return to the Home screen (on page 35)
Switch to a different style category (on page 35)
Switch to a different style group in the active category (on page 37)
Navigate the Options panel (on page 38)
Return to the Home screen
In the Navigation bar, click the active style breadcrumb to return to the Home screen. In the
example below, clicking Check returns you to the ISOGEN Configuration Home screen.
Alternatively, click
, and then select Home in the list of menu options.
35
Switch to a different style category

1. In the Navigation bar, click
on the active style breadcrumb.
A list of the style categories displays.
2. Select the style category. For example, to access those properties specific to the material
list, click Materials.
The software switches to the Materials category (1). By default, the name of the first style
group in the Materials hierarchy is shown on the style group breadcrumb and appears as the
title of the Options panel (2). A list of the respective options groups is also displayed in the
panel.
Alternatively, you can return to the Home screen (on page 35), and then navigate to the
appropriate style category and style group.
36
Switch to a different style group in the active

category
1. In the Navigation bar, click
on the active style category breadcrumb.
A list of the style groups that belong to the active style category displays.
2. Select a style group. For example, to access properties related to detail sketches, click
Detail Sketches.
As shown in the example below, Detail Sketches is now the active style group, as indicated
on the breadcrumb and in the Options panel title bar.
Use Forward
and Back
on the Options panel title bar to move sequentially
through the style groups that belong to the active style category. Alternatively, you can return to
the Home screen (on page 35), and then select the style group in the style category pane.
37
Navigate the Options panel
Use Expand
and Collapse
to display and hide the properties within an options
group. In the example below, clicking Expand
on the Enclosures label (1) displays the
collection of properties in Spools > Settings > Enclosures (2).
To hide the properties, click Collapse
38
Search Filters
SECTION 5
Search Filters
Because of the hundreds of isometric drawing properties that are available, locating a specific
one can be a daunting task. The Search feature lets you search for a specific options group or
individual drawing property based on the following user-specified criteria: a keyword, an option
switch, an I-Configure property name, or an AText number. As searches are completed, the
software maintains a search history, which allows you to locate and re-use search criteria
quickly and easily.
Keyword Search
In a keyword search, the software locates all of the options groups or drawing properties that
contain the keyword, or text string, that you specify in the Search box. Search results are
displayed in the Options panel. The example below shows the search results based on the
keyword coordinates:
39
Search Filters
Option Switch Search
In an option switch search, the software locates those properties that define the specified option
switch. You can direct the software to search only for the option switch number or, for option
switches that have multiple settings, search for the option switch and the switch position. As with
the keyword search, the results are displayed in the Options panel. For example, if you perform
a search based on Option Switch 31, Position 5, the Options panel displays the drawing
property that meets the specified criteria.
Property Name Search

To perform a property name search, the software requires that you type a text string that
contains any part of the original I-Configure property name in the Search box. For example, if
you search for weight, the software locates all of the property names that include the text string
weight, and then displays the results in the Options panel.
40
Search Filters
AText Number
You can use the Search box to locate in which Alternative Texts collection a specific AText
number belongs. For example, if you search for -256, the software locates it and displays the
respective category and style group in the Options panel.
Search by keyword (on page 41)
Search by option switch (on page 42)
Search by I-Configure property (on page 43)
Search by AText number (on page 46)
View the Search history (on page 48)
Search by keyword
1. Type the required text string in the Search box. For example, if you are looking for the
options group that contains the properties for controlling the variable layout material list
format, you can type variable.
2. Click Search
The software searches all of the options group headings and displays the results in the
Options panel.
41
Search Filters
Click
to expand the style category, group, and options group headings so that you can
view the individual properties. The example below shows the properties that are included in the
Variable options group for the drawing material list:
Search by option switch

1. Click in the Search box.
The Search box displays options for adding a search filter.
2. Select Option Switch.

Options display for specifying the option switch and position.
3. In the Option Switch box, type the option switch number.
42
Search Filters
4. Under Positions, select the option switch position, if needed.
The defined search criteria displays in the Search box. In the example below, a search
definition is created to locate the drawing property that defines Option Switch 31, Position 2.
Select as many switch positions as needed.

5. Click Search
When the search is complete, the software displays the results in the Options panel.
6. To view the property, click
to expand the category, group, and option headings. The
example below shows the search results for the isometric drawing property that defines
Option Switch 31, Position 2:
To view a property's option switch information, mouse over Tool Information

Options panel.
You can also perform a manual search to locate a property based on the option switch. In
the Search box, type o: followed by the option switch number and, optionally, the switch
position (for example, o:31p2), and then click Search
. Use a comma to separate
multiple option switch positions, for example, o:31p2,3,4.
in the
43
Search Filters
Search by I-Configure property

2. Select I-Configure
The search filter ic: displays in the Search box.
3. Type a text string that contains a portion of the property name. For example, if you are
looking for properties that control the accumulation of components on the material list, you
can type accumulation.
4. Click Search
When the search is complete, the software displays the results in the Options panel.
44
Search Filters
5. To view the each property, click
to expand the style category, group, and option
headings. The example below shows all of the isometric drawing properties in which
accumulation is part of the I-Configure property name:
You can also perform a manual search for a property based on its I-Configure property
name. In the Search box, type ic: followed by the required text string (for example,
ic:accumulation), and then click Search
.
To display a description of each property, as well as its I-Configure property name, mouse
over Tool Information
in the Options panel.
45
Search Filters
Search by AText number

2. Select AText.
The search filter at: displays in the Search box.
3. Type the AText number to locate. For example, type -207.
4. Click Search
When the search is complete, the category and style group that contain the AText number
display in the Options panel.
46
Search Filters
5. To locate the AText, navigate to the specified category and style group. In the example
above, use the Navigation bar to navigate to Drawing Area > Content, and then click
to expand the Alternative Texts options group.
To view a property's AText number, mouse over Tool Information

panel.
You can also perform a manual search to locate a specific AText number. In the Search
box, type at: followed by the required number (for example, at:207), and then click Search
.
in the Options
47
Search Filters
View the Search history

Use one of the methods listed below to view a history of all the searches that have been
performed in the current session.
When you exit ISOGEN Configuration, the search history for that session is
erased.
Click once in the Search box. The box expands to show a list of previous searches:
Click the Style Name list on the Navigation bar, and then select Search Results (1). Next,
click the Search Results list to display the current search history (2).
To review the results from a previous search, select the search criteria in the search
history list. The Options panel updates to display the search results.
48
Configure Drawing and Report Settings
SECTION 6

ISOGEN Configuration enables you to set properties for isometric drawing output, such as
dimension styles, layers, drawing frame text, material lists, and welds.
Customize isometric style options (on page 49)
Edit the North arrow on isometric drawings (on page 50)
Set drawing dimension options (on page 51)
Set drawing control options (on page 51)
Enable revision clouds (on page 52)
Assign unique part numbers (on page 53)
Specify the report output location (on page 54)
Set flow arrow options (on page 57)
Set up a material list (on page 57)
Set up a cut list (on page 58)
Define the report layout (on page 59)
Print welds (on page 62)
Configure a detail sketch (on page 63)
49
Customize isometric style options

Isometric drawing styles control several aspects of the isometric drawing output, including the
output location and the type of object used for drawing creation. Each drawing style is also
associated with a set of option groups.
1. Select the required style group on the Home screen.
To find a specific option or property, use the Search box. For more information, see
Search Filters (on page 39).
The software switches to the Configuration view. The Options panel displays the collection
of options that belong to the active style group.
2. Expand and collapse the option headings as needed until all of the required drawing
properties are set.
3. Use the Navigation bar to move through the remaining style categories and groups, and
edit other drawing properties as needed. For more information, see Navigation Techniques
(on page 33).
4. Click
to update the active style file with the new property settings.
5. Review the drawing in the Drawing Preview panel to see the changes.
Set drawing units

1. Click Home
, and select Options.
The Options dialog box displays.

2. Select millimeters or inches in the Drawing Units list.
Your selection controls only the units of measure that display within the Options
panel in the Configuration view. It does not control the units of measure that are output
during generation of the isometric drawing.
3. Click OK.
Edit the North arrow on isometric drawings

1. On the Home screen, click Attribute Display in the Drawing Border pane. Alternatively,
use the Navigation bar to navigate to the required style category and group. For more
information, see Navigation Techniques (on page 33).
The software switches to the Configuration view and displays the contents of the Attribute
Display panel. The Attribute Display panel contains a single collection of options called
Definitions.
2. Expand Definitions.
50

3. Click Show
to open the data grid.
The number that displays on the Attributes icon indicates the number of defined
attributes. The example below indicates that 15 attributes are currently defined in the grid.
4. In the Attribute column, select NORTH-ARROW-POSITION.

5. In the X and Y boxes, specify the X- and Y-coordinates of the north arrow.
To turn the north arrow off, type 0 in the XPos and YPos boxes.
6. In the Text Height and Text Width boxes, specify the height and width.
7. Click
To close the grid, click Hide
Set drawing dimension options

Using the groups of options in the Dimensions category, you can specify how dimensions are
used and displayed within the drawing. These options include such things as how dimensions
are rounded, limits at which to suppress dimension display, and how coordinates are displayed.
For example, to turn on the dimensioning for tapped branches on piping, you do the following:
1. On the Home screen, click Piping Components and Features in the Dimensions pane.
Alternatively, use the Navigation bar to navigate to the required style category and group.
For more information, see Navigation Techniques (on page 33).
The software switches to the Configuration view and displays the contents of the Piping
Components and Features panel.
2. Expand Tap Branches.
3. Set Tap On Pipe to one of the following settings: None, Full, or Pipe Only.
4. Click
For more information about the drawing dimension properties, see Dimensions (on page
292).
51
Set drawing control options

You use the Drawing Manager options to set system controls for the isometric drawing. For
more information on drawing control options, see Drawing Manager (on page 104).
Enable revision clouds

A revision cloud is an ISOGEN customization feature that typically indicates a section of the
pipeline that has been revised. An example of a traditional revision cloud as it appears on the
isometric drawing is shown below:
The traditional representation of revision clouds on the isometric drawing can be modified to
output a polygon enclosure, which can optionally be filled with a color.
There are two revision attributes. The first is the pipeline revision attribute, which defines
the current revision of the whole pipeline. This attribute is commonly incremented whenever a
new revision is issued. The second is a component revision attribute. This attribute is available
for all components in the pipeline and defines the revision that the component was introduced in
52

the pipeline. For revision clouds to be activated on specific components, the pipeline revision
and the component revision must be equal.
1. On the Home screen, click Revision Clouds in the Drawing Area pane. Alternatively, use
the Navigation bar to navigate to the required style category and group. For more
The software switches to the Configuration view and displays the contents of the Revision
Clouds panel.
2. Expand Settings.
3. Set Enabled to True.
4. Use the Distance box to specify the distance from the component centerline to the revision
box.
5. Define the required values for Colour and Layer. The numbers you specify depend on the
drawing system being used, such as AutoCAD or MicroStation.
6. Use Enclosure Style to specify whether the revision box enclosure is a cloud or a polygon.
If you select Cloud, you must also define MinCloudArc and MaxCloudArc.
If you select Polygon, you can optionally define a fill color for the enclosure.
7. Click
Assign unique part numbers

Unique numbers are applied to each part on the isometric drawing. This is typically used for
traceability and to assign heat numbers.
The part numbers are unique per pipeline and are in the format of 1.x, where x is a number or
an alpha character. The examples below show the two format options (highlighted in yellow).
53

A table of unique part numbers can also be plotted on the isometric drawing. This table is
usually mapped against the manually-input heat numbers. An example is shown below:
1. On the Home screen, click Part Numbers in the Materials pane. Alternatively, use the
Navigation bar to navigate to the required style category and group. For more information,
see Navigation Techniques (on page 33).
The software switches to the Configuration view and displays the contents of the Part
Numbers panel.
2. Expand Format.
3. Set Unique Part Number to Alpha or Numeric, depending on the required suffix.
4. Use Unique Gasket Numbers and Unique Bolt Numbers to control whether gaskets and
bolts are assigned unique numbers.
5. Set the remaining properties as needed.
6. Click to
update the style file with the new property settings.
To output and define the contents of a traceability file, see Define ISOGEN Reports.
Specify the report output location

ISOGEN Configuration enables you to define the layout for the following report
types: Cut list summary. Drawing cross-reference, Material control, Neutral report, Printed
material list, Site weld information, Spool information, and Traceability. For more information,
see Define the report layout (on page 59).
1. Navigate to Drawing Manager > Reports.
54

2. Expand Report Types in the Reports panel, and double-click the report to define. For
example, double-click Bending File.
You can also click Add Report
The Configuration view updates the display in the Report Definition panel.
55

3. In the Report Location box, type the output location and file name for the report.
Alternatively, click Browse
, and navigate to the location.
A preview of the report contents displays in the Preview pane, and the Preview (file not
found) ! error message disappears.
ISOGEN Configuration displays this error message until an output location is

specified.
4. Expand File Formatting in the Reports panel, and define the properties as needed.
The File Formatting options group does not display for all report types.
5. When finished, click
56
Set flow arrow options

Isometric drawings commonly have annotations to denote the direction of fluid flow through pipe
and pipe components. You can use ISOGEN Configuration to define when and where flow
arrows are placed on isometric drawings.
The properties for flow arrow placement are located in Drawing Area > Content > Flow
Arrows. The Show on Pipe property toggles all flow arrows on and off. If Show Flow Arrows
is set to True, you can also specify arrow placement. You can set Show on Components so
that component flow arrows appear beside components such as valves. When you configure
your isometric styles, you can set Show on Components to match your project specifications.
Thereafter, you can control all flow arrows on the isometric drawing by toggling Show on Pipe
on or off.
1. On the Home screen, click Content in the Drawing Area pane. Alternatively, use the
The software switches to the Configuration view and displays the contents of the Content
panel.
2. Expand Flow Arrows.
3. Set Show on Components as needed.
Set the property to True if you want component flow arrows to appear for this style. Set
the property to False if you do not want component flow arrows to appear for this style.
4. Set Show on Pipe to True or False. This property is a master switch that toggles all flow
arrows on or off.
5. Click
Set up a material list

The software contains three different styles for material lists on isometric drawings:
Fixed Layout is the default material list and is not customizable.
Variable Layout is a customizable version of the fixed layout style and allows you to specify
the attributes in the columns of the material list.
User Defined is the most customizable of the three styles, allowing full control of the
attributes in the columns, the number of sections in the material list, and remarks.
1. On the Home screen, click Drawing Material List in the Materials pane. Alternatively, use
The software switches to the Configuration view and displays the contents of the Drawing
Material List panel.
57

2. Expand the options group that corresponds to the required material list layout: Fixed,
Variable, or User Defined.
If Visible under Symbol Table in Drawing Border > Table Display is set to False,
you must use the fixed layout material list style. Only a fixed layout material list can be used
with an ISOGEN drawing frame.
3. Set the properties for the selected material list layout
4. Click Save to update the style file with the new property settings.
5. Define the report layout (on page 59).
The amount of area on the drawing that is reserved for the material list must be set properly,
or overlap can occur between the piping symbology and the text of the material list. You can
set the reserved area for the material list by setting the Reserved Area Material List in
Drawing Manager > Drawing File > Drawing Area Size.
By default, bolts and gaskets are accumulated automatically in the material list by diameter.
You can deactivate this feature by setting Bolts or Gaskets to Suppress in Materials >
Accumulation > Settings. For more information, see Accumulation (on page 428).
A material list can contain cut list information. The cut list includes the pieces of cut pipe and
their required lengths. You can specify summary files for the material list and cut list.
You can move components from one sort group to another in the materials list using
Material Group Transfers (on page 407).
The printed material list is a text file that contains the same information as the material list
on the face of the drawing. The information is continuously appended to the file. You can
specify that a printed material list file be created using Materials > Reports > Report Types
and selecting Printed material list. For more information, see Define the report layout (on
page 59).
Set up a cut list

The cut pipe report provides a list of the pieces of cut pipe and their required lengths.
1. On the Home screen, click Drawing Cut List in the Cut Pieces pane. Alternatively, use the
The software switches to the Configuration view and displays the Drawing Cut List panel.
2. Expand the option group heading that corresponds to the required cut list layout: Fixed or
User Defined.
Fixed is the default cut list and is not customizable.
User Defined is a customizable version of the cut list.
3. Set the properties for the selected cut list layout.

4. Click
58
to update the style file with the new property settings.
Define the report layout

The steps for defining report layout apply only to the report types listed below.
Cut list summary
Drawing cross-reference
Material control
Printed material list
Neutral report
Site weld information
Spool information
Traceability
Weld summary
For information about how to output other report types, see Specify the report output location
(on page 54).
1. Navigate to Drawing Manager > Reports.
2. Expand Report Types in the Reports panel, and double-click the report to define. For
example, double-click Material control.
You can also click Add Report
59

The Reports panel updates to show the applicable options groups. The Report Definition
panel also updates to show the applicable options.
3. Type the output location and file name for the report in the Report Location box.
, and navigate to the location.
The Preview (file not found) ! error message disappears. ISOGEN Configuration displays
this message until an output location is specified.
4. Expand File Formatting in the Reports panel, and define the properties as needed.
5. Use the Attributes options groups to specify the columns of attribute data to output in the
report. For example, to output the pipeline reference, expand Pipeline Attributes, and then
double-click Pipeline Reference.
You can also click Add Attribute
attribute.
, which appears each time you mouse over an
The column definition for the attribute data is placed under Report Layout in the Report
Definition panel.
6. Define the Start, Maximum Characters, and Justification settings for the attribute data
column.
Click Comments
60
to insert a comment, and type the text in the text box.

7. Continue adding attributes to the report. In the example below, three columns of attribute
data are defined for the report.
To remove a column of attribute data, click Remove Column
8. To output a title block, click Include Title Block, and then type the title.
9. To output column headers, click Include Column Headers.
10. In the Column Headers box, type a display name for each column of attribute data in the
report. In the example below, display names are defined for the Pipeline Reference,
Revision, Item-Code, N.S, Qty and Group attribute columns.
Use the SPACEBAR and ENTER keys to add spaces between the display names or
for multiple lines of data.
As you define the report layout, the Preview pane dynamically updates. By default,
Automatic Refresh
is turned on, so the update occurs automatically. However, if
Automatic Refresh is turned off, you must click Refresh
to manually update the view in
the Preview pane.
Drawing Manager > Reports organizes all of the reports that ISOGEN can output during
isometric drawing generation. In addition to this global Reports panel, the Materials, Welds,
Spools, and Cut Pieces categories each contain a Reports panel that provides access to a
content-specific subset of report types.
61
Materials > Reports - Material control, Printed material List, and Neutral report
Welds > Reports - Weld summary and Site weld information
Spools > Reports - Spool information
Cut Pieces > Reports - Cut list summary
Print welds
To enable weld list output on an isometric drawing, you must configure a few items in the
software.
First, you must set options to show the weld symbols as well as the weld numbers on the
isometric drawing. The Show Welds property indicates whether the weld symbol appears on the
drawing, and the Show Numbers property indicates if the weld number appears.
1. On the Home screen, click Appearance in the Welds pane. Alternatively, use the
The software switches to the Configuration view and displays the Appearance panel.
2. Expand Controls.
3. Set Show Welds to True.
4. Set Show Numbers to True.
5. Click
You can also specify that a weld list appear on the drawing. To display a weld list on the
drawing, navigate to Welds > Drawing Weld List, expand Settings, and select Weld List. The
weld list does not appear if the property setting to display weld numbers is not also enabled.
62
Configure a detail sketch

Detail sketches provide additional details for components. The sketches are typically used to
show more information about branch connections, support lugs, and special welds. To include
detail sketches on your isometric drawing, you must first create symbols in a graphics package
such as SmartSketch or AutoCAD. Then, use the Detail Sketch Manager (on page 66) to view
the detail sketch and specify options that control its various characteristics, such as the text
formatting and placement. When you place the detail sketch in the drawing, the software prints a
callout, or detail sketch identifier, next to the component. The detail sketch is then output on the
isometric drawing. An example detail sketch is shown below:
Informational notes are similar to detail sketches. These notes refer to pipelines, spools, or
components in the drawing. An example informational note is shown below:
1. On the Home screen, click Detail Sketches in the Drawing Area pane. Alternatively, use
The Detail Sketches panel opens
2. Expand Settings, and set the Path and Format properties as needed.
To populate the list of detail sketches, the software uses the Drawing Appearance >
Detail Sketches > Settings > Format and Drawing Appearance > Detail Sketches >
Settings > Path settings defined for the active style. The Path and Format settings define
the location of the detail sketch library and the file type (.DWG, .IGR, or .SYM), respectively.
3. Click Library.
The Detail Sketch Manager displays.
4. Select a detail sketch in the list.
Use the Search feature on the Detail Sketch Manager toolbar to filter the detail
sketches shown in the list.
The software displays a graphical view of the selected detail sketch in the Preview window.
63

5. In the grid area, define the detail sketch parameters as needed.
Use the XPos and YPos values to position the box in the detail sketch. Alternately, you
can position the box interactively using the mouse. As you drag the box, the XPos and
YPos values in the grid automatically update.
Each line of data in the grid displays a box at the selected X,Y location on the detail sketch.
In the following example, three parameters are defined.
6. Click
to save the data to the active style, and close the Detail Sketch Manager.
To save the data to the active style and then work with another detail sketch, click Apply.
To add a new row at the bottom of the grid, click Add

or click the * row at the bottom of
the grid. To remove a row of data from the grid, click Delete
.
See Also
Detail Sketch Manager (on page 66)
64
Drawing Configuration Tools
SECTION 7

The tools listed below are also included with ISOGEN Configuration. When used, these tools
can further streamline the process for configuring drawing output.
Detail Sketch Manager - Helps you configure detail sketches for isometric drawing output.
The Detail Sketch Manager allows you to place parameters on the selected detail sketch so
that the correct relevant values, such as weld numbers, part numbers, and angles, are
plotted on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Detail Sketch Manager (on page
66).
Drawing Setup Tool - Includes a limited set of drawing options that can assist you in
configuring the drawing template. The drawing template is usually a company standard
backing sheet on which ISOGEN plots the drawing and related data such as the material
take-off, welding report, and project-related data. The Drawing Setup Tool has a graphical
interface, overlaying the location of key items onto the backing sheet. For more information,
see Drawing Setup Tool (on page 70).
In This Section
Detail Sketch Manager ...................................................................66
Drawing Setup Tool ........................................................................70
65
Detail Sketch Manager

To open the Detail Sketch Manager, navigate to Drawing Area > Detail Sketches > Settings,
and then click Library. The Detail Sketch Manager window consists of a toolbar (A), a list of
available detail sketches (B), a viewing area (C), and a grid for data input (D).
A - Detail Sketch Manager Toolbar

Search - Filters the list of available detail sketches based on user-defined criteria. As you type
text into the Search box, the feature responds with an implied wild card at the beginning and at
the end of the character string. For example, if you type B, the list of available sketches updates
to display only those sketches with a B in the filename based on the defined criteria, *B*.
Add - Inserts a blank row at the bottom of the grid. You can also insert a row by clicking in
the * row at the bottom of the grid.
Delete - Removes the currently selected row from the grid, as well as the detail sketch
identifier, or box, that the data defined.
66

Zoom - Increases or decreases the display size of detail sketch objects in the viewing area.
You can zoom in to get a closer view of an object, or zoom out to view more of the detail sketch
at a reduced size. Click the left mouse button and drag the pointer upward in the window to
increase the view of an object as though you were moving closer to it. Drag the pointer
downward in the window to reduce the view as though you were moving further away from the
object.
Zoom Area - Increases the view magnification of an area in the detail sketch that you define
with two points.
Zoom All - Displays the entire detail sketch in the viewing area.
Pan - Repositions the detail sketch in the viewing area so that you can view another section
of the sketch without changing the view magnification.
Style - Displays the active style. This option is read only.
OK - Prompts you to save any unsaved data. Click Yes to save the data in the grid to the
current style and close the Detail Sketch Manager.
Cancel - Discards any unsaved data in the grid, and closes the Detail Sketch Manager.
Apply - Saves the data that has been defined in the grid for the current sketch, but leaves the
Detail Sketch Manager open so that you can define parameters for another sketch.
B - Detail Sketch List

Displays the detail sketches that are available for the active style. When you select a detail
sketch in the list, a graphical view of the sketch displays in the detail sketch viewing area, as
shown below.
When you open the Detail Sketch Manager, the software looks in the folder location
defined by the Drawing Area > Detail Sketches > Settings > Path setting and displays
only those files types defined by the Drawing Area > Detail Sketches > Settings > Format
setting.
67
In the current version of the software, only DWG, IGR, and SYM (SHA) file formats are fully
supported.
You can use the Search box on the Detail Sketch Manager toolbar to limit the list of
available sketches.
C - Detail Sketch Viewing Area

Displays a graphical view of the selected detail sketch. As you define parameters in the grid
area, the viewing area updates the detail sketch to display a box at the selected XPos and
YPos location on the sketch.
D - Grid Area
Allows you to position parameters directly onto the detail sketch. Parameters are derived from
the component on which the detail sketch is placed. Each line of data in the grid displays a box
at the selected X,Y location on the detail sketch. When you select a row in the grid, the
corresponding detail sketch parameter box is considered active and displays as blue in the
detail sketch viewing area. An inactive detail sketch parameter box displays as red. In the
following example, the ANGLE row is selected in the grid, making the corresponding box active.
68

Parameter - Specifies the user-supplied detail sketch identifier.
Method - Specifies how the required data is to be extracted from the piping object data (POD)
file for isometric drawing output. The following table lists the supported methods, along with any
required input parameters.
Selected Method
Required Input Parameter
Description
Copy
Enter any valid attribute or property

of the component, its parent pipeline,
or its material.
Returns the value of the specified property. This

can include the part number, the weld number, or
any other known property.
SectionAxis
X
Y
Returns the X- or Y-axis label.

The Y-axis label for a section through the
component, based on the component
HeaderOrientation property is as follows:
Vertical returns E (or as modified by

ATEXT -248)
Horizontal returns U (-244)
Sloped/falling returns U (-244)
Non-orthogonal returns blank
The X-axis label for a section through the

component, based on the component
HeaderOrientation property is as follows:
SectionAngleFromClosestAxis
Specify a component property, such

as BranchAngle, or attribute that
contains an angle. For example, you
can enter C.BranchAngle or
C.COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1.
Vertical returns S (-247)
Horizontal returns orthogonal vector to

header and Up, E for N/S header, S for
E/W header, compound direction
otherwise.
Sloped/falling returns same as

Horizontal
Non-orthogonal returns blank
Converts the input angle, which is 0-360, to an

angle based on the closest axis.
Angle = 0 to 45 returns angle
Angle = 45.1 to 89.9 returns (90

angle)
Angle = 90 to 135 returns (angle 90)

angle)
Angle = 180 to 225 returns (angle

180)
Angle = 225.1 to 269 returns (270

angle)
Angle = 270 to 315 returns (angle

270)

angle)
Invalid input (not a number in the range

0-360) returns zero ( 0 )
69

Selected Method
Required Input Parameter
Description
MainWeldNumber
N/A
Returns the REPEAT-WELD-IDENTIFIER of the

main (header) weld of an olet.
BranchWeldNumber
N/A
Returns the REPEAT-WELD-IDENTIFIER of the

branch weld of an olet, set-on or tee.
SupportWeldNumber
Enter 1-n.
Returns the REPEAT-WELD-IDENTIFER of the

nth support weld.
LugPartNumber
Enter 1-n.
Returns the REPEAT-PART-NUMBER of the nth

lug
AdditionalMaterialPartNumber
Enter 1-n.
Returns the REPEAT-PART-NUMBER of the nth

additional material
Input - Defines the parameter required by the selected Method. Select a parameter from the
list, or type the parameter directly into the box. For more information about methods and their
associated input parameters, refer to the above table.
CharHeight - Defines the height of the character on the isometric drawing. It also sets the size
of the box used to place text. The default setting is 3.
XPos - Defines the X-position of the detail sketch identifier relative to the bottom left corner of
the detail sketch.
YPos - Defines the Y-position of the detail sketch identifier relative to the bottom left corner of
the detail sketch.
Font - Specifies the type of font used to display text.
Justification - Defines the justification for the text. You can select Left, Centre, or Right.
Layer - Specifies the layer of the CAD file to use.
Colour - Specifies the index number that represents a specific color as defined in the output
drawing software.
Rotation - Defines the angle that text is allowed to be rotated in output.
See Also
Configure a detail sketch (on page 63)
70
Drawing Setup Tool

Customizes the content and format of the isometric drawing for the active isometric drawing
style.
You can access the Drawing Setup Tool only from within ISOGEN Configuration. For
more information, see Open the Drawing Setup Tool (on page 73).
Many of the settings that you can configure using isometric drawing style properties relate to the
positioning of elements on the drawing. Editing these directly in ISOGEN Configuration can be
time-consuming. The Drawing Setup Tool enables you to edit drawing style properties in a
graphic view, which can often be much easier. For example, you can specify a
company-standard backing sheet rather than using one of the templates delivered with the
software. You can graphically define the position of the drawing area on the backing sheet and
specify which user-defined reports, if any, are output on the drawing. You can also use the tool
to define the attributes that display on the drawing frame. The options that you define in the tool
can then be saved to the current isometric drawing style so that they are applied to the
generated drawings.
The Drawing Setup Tool consists of a series of tabbed pages, each of which contains a set of
options and properties that are specific to a particular aspect of the drawing setup, and a
horizontal and vertical toolbar. The pages listed below appear by default for each isometric
drawing style:
Basic Setup
Drawing Areas
Attributes
If a user-defined Material List, Weld List, or Cut List report is currently associated with the
selected isometric drawing style, or if you choose to add one of those reports during the
Drawing Setup Tool process, a tabbed page specific to that report type is automatically
displayed so that you can configure those settings as well. The example below shows the
complete set of tabbed pages that can display in the tool:
71

Basic Setup Page (on page 85)
Drawing Areas Page (on page 87)
Material List Page (on page 90)
Weld List Page (on page 95)
Cut List Page (on page 97)
Attributes Page (on page 100)
Add/Remove Attributes Dialog Box (on page 102)
The commands on the vertical and horizontal toolbars provide options for navigating through the
tool and for manipulating the graphical view. For example, you can adjust the view to display the
entire backing sheet, or you can focus on a specific area, such as the drawing frame. You can
also increase and decrease the viewing area. Decreasing causes everything within the window
to appear larger, while increasing causes everything within the window to appear smaller.
Toolbar commands are also available that allow you to control the content of the user-specified
reports and the attributes that are plotted in the title block.
Drawing Setup Tool Toolbar

Vertical Toolbar:
Zoom In/Out - Increases or decreases the display size of the drawing template. You can zoom in
to get a closer view of an area or zoom out to view more of the drawing template at a reduced
size. Click the left mouse button and drag the pointer upward in the window to increase the view of
an object as though you were moving closer to it. Drag the pointer downward in the window to
reduce the view as though you are moving further away from the object.
Zoom Window- Increases the view magnification of an area in the drawing template that you
define by creating a fence.
Zoom to Fit - Displays the entire contents of the drawing template in the window.
Pan - Repositions the drawing template in the display window so that you can view another
section of the template without changing the view magnification.
Add / Remove Attributes - Opens the Add/Remove Attributes dialog box. This dialog box
allows you to specify the attributes that are available in the Attribute list in the Attributes Grid
window. The command is available only when the Attributes page is active.
Add Column - Inserts a column to the selected report so that an additional attribute can be
plotted in the report. This command is available only when the Material List, Weld List, or Cut
List page is active.
72

Delete Column - Removes the selected column of component attribute data from the plotted
report. This command is available only when you select a Column category label on the Material
List, Weld List, or Cut List page.
Zoom to List Attributes - Zooms in on the selected attribute. Each time you click Zoom to List
Attributes
, the view zooms to the selected attribute in the title block of the drawing frame or
on the reports.
Horizontal Toolbar:
Previous Page - Returns to the previous page of the tool.
Next Page - Proceeds to the next page of the tool.
Help - Opens the on-line documentation delivered with the software and displays information
about the tool.
Exit - Closes the tool. If you have not saved your changes, the software prompts you to do so.
Cancel - Undoes the options and parameters that you have defined.
The four graphic control commands on the vertical toolbar (Zoom In/Out
, Zoom
Window
, Zoom to Fit
, and Pan
) can be used any time while running the tool.
The availability of the remaining vertical toolbar commands is determined by the active page.
You can navigate back and forth sequentially through the pages using Previous Page
and Next Page
on the horizontal toolbar. Alternatively, click the tab to go directly to a
specific page.
Open the Drawing Setup Tool (on page 73)
Move and resize windows (on page 74)
Specify the backing sheet (on page 76)
Define drawing margins and report layout (on page 76)
Customize report settings (on page 78)
Define drawing frame attributes (on page 83)
Update the style (on page 85)
73
Open the Drawing Setup Tool

1. Right-click an isometric drawing style in the Project View panel, and then select Edit.
Alternatively, double-click the isometric drawing style.
The software opens ISOGEN Configuration .
2. Click Drawing Setup Tool in the bottom right corner of the ISOGEN Configuration window.
The software opens the Drawing Setup Tool.
3. Use the options on the tabbed pages to customize the isometric drawing output as needed.
to accept your changes.
Move and resize windows

The Drawing Areas, Material List, Cut List, Weld List, and Attributes Grid windows in the
Drawing Setup Tool work slightly differently than windows in other applications. These
windows can be displayed, hidden, docked, maximized, tabbed, or made to float.
The following tips will help you manage windows effectively. As you are moving windows,
remember that it is the placement of the cursor, not the window, that indicates where you are
placing the window you are dragging. Look for the blue shadow indicator box that shows you
where the window will be placed when you release the mouse button.
To automatically hide a window
1. Click
in the top right corner of a docked window. The window is placed vertically on the
application border on the side to which it was docked.
2. Move your cursor over the window name on the border to display the window, temporarily,
where it was previously displayed. As you move your cursor away, the window automatically
hides again.
The following illustration shows a normal view of the Drawing Areas window and a view with
the window placed on the application border.
To turn off Auto-Hide mode

1. Place your cursor on the window name to show the hidden window.
2. When the window appears, click the
button to place it where it was previously docked.
To undock a window
74
Double-click the title bar of a docked window to undock it and display it as a floating window.

To maximize a window
Double-click a floating, undocked window to dock it against the top border of the software
window. This action maximizes the window as much as possible considering the placement
of other tool and list view windows.
If windows are already docked along the top border of the software and there is no
open space along the border, then you cannot maximize another window. As long as some
portion of the top border does not have a window docked against it, you can minimize a new
window, and the software will place it in that open space.
To dock a floating window
Click and drag the title bar of the floating window to dock it. As you begin to drag a docking
window, it displays as shown in the example below.
Drag the window over one of the

icons. Each icon docks the window in a different
location - top, bottom, left or right. As the cursor passes over an icon, a blue box displays,
showing you how the docked window will appear. The example below illustrates the
relationship between the icon and docking location. The shaded blue box provides a preview
of how the docked window will appear.
75
Specify the backing sheet

1. Open the Drawing Setup Tool (on page 73).
2. On the Basic Setup page, click Browse
file that you want to use.
, and navigate to the backing sheet template
A large selection of pre-formatted backing sheets is delivered with the software to the
[Installation Drive]:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\Intergraph\I-Configure\Backing
Sheets folder.
3. Select the required drawing output format. The default setting is Smart DWG (DWG).
4. Set the required drawing size. If you select Custom, you must specify values for Width and
Height.
5. Under Reports, specify the reports that you want ISOGEN to plot on the isometric drawing.
If a user-defined material list is to be plotted, you must specify the required number of
sections. By default, two sections are output on the material list.
6. Click
in the bottom right corner of the ISOGEN Configuration window.
Define drawing margins and report layout

You can customize the left, right, top, and bottom margins of the drawing area, either
interactively with the mouse or by typing new values in the Drawing Areas window. Likewise,
you can use either method to set the start positions of where ISOGEN plots the material, weld,
and cut lists on the isometric drawing.
Set Drawing Margins Graphically
1. Open the Drawing Setup Tool (on page 73).
2. On the Drawing Areas page, place the cursor on the grab handle for the margin you want
to change.
The cursor updates from a pointer to a two-headed arrow cross, indicating the direction in
which you can drag the boundary.
Alternatively, place the cursor on one of the boundaries. The cursor updates from a
pointer to a cross-hair, indicating that the margin is ready to be resized.
76

3. Drag the boundary to the new position, and then release the mouse.
As you drag the boundary, the corresponding margin value in the Drawing Areas window
dynamically updates.
To accurately fit the drawing area, zoom in to each corner of the area being defined.
Using the corner grab handles, you can move two margins simultaneously while the other
two margins remain unchanged.
Grab handle 1: Resizes the left and top margins.
Grab handle 2: Resizes the right and top margins.
Grab handle 3: Resizes the left and bottom margins
Grab handle 4: Resizes the right and bottom margins.
Set Drawing Margins Using the Grid

1. Expand Drawing Area Margins in the Drawing Areas window, and click the margin you
want to resize.
2. Type the new value.
The drawing boundary box in the View window updates accordingly.
77

Set Report Start Position Graphically
1. On the Drawing Areas page, place the cursor on the appropriate report anchor.
The cursor updates from a pointer to a cross-hair, indicating that the anchor is ready to be
moved.
In the above example, the numbers underneath the cross-hairs indicate the X and Y
coordinate values.
2. Move the anchor to the required location, and then release the mouse.
As you drag the anchor, the corresponding X and Y values that display with the anchor and
in the Drawing Areas window dynamically update.
Set Report Data Start Position Using the Grid
1. Expand the appropriate list category in the Drawing Areas window, click X, and type the
new value.
2. Click Y, and type the new value.
The drawing boundary box in the View window updates accordingly.
Customize report settings

You can use the grid to define formatting properties such as text font, height, and the direction in
which the report data is plotted. Additionally, some of the properties that control the layout of the
report data can be customized graphically using the mouse.
Set Up the Report Using the Grid
1. Open the Drawing Setup Tool (on page 73), and select the tab that corresponds to the
report you want to customize.
Use the Reports section on the Basic Setup page to add and remove the reports to
be plotted on the isometric drawing.
2. If needed, click Zoom to List Attributes
section of the backing frame.
78
on the vertical toolbar to zoom in on the report

3. Expand the report category node to expose those properties. In the example below, the
Weld List category node is expanded.
4. Use List Down to specify the direction in which ISOGEN is to plot the report data.
5. Click Maximum Entries, and set the maximum number of entries allowed in the report
before an overflow sheet is generated.
6. Type the appropriate X and Y values to set the horizontal and vertical start positions of the
first line of the report.
Alternatively, you can define these X and Y settings graphically. For more information,
see Define X,Y, and Offset Settings Graphically below.
7. Select the font to be used to display the report data in the Text Font list.
8. If needed, modify the values for Text Height and Vertical Spacing.
79

9. Expand the column nodes to display those properties. In the example below, the Column 3
node has been expanded.
10. Modify the component attribute settings as needed.
Use the Name list to specify which component attribute is to be plotted.
Use the Offset and X boxes to set the plot start position for the component attribute
data. These settings can also be defined graphically. For more information, see Define
X,Y, and Offset Settings Graphically below.
Define X,Y, and Offset Settings Graphically

Modifying the report layout graphically involves using the mouse to position report data. Using
the mouse, you can define the horizontal and vertical position of the first line of data that is
plotted on the report. You can also define an offset from the start position that the other columns
of data use.
80

Define the report origin graphically
1. Place the mouse on the red rectangle in the first column of the report block.
2. When the mouse changes to a cross-hairs, as shown in the example below, drag the box in
the appropriate left, right, up, or down direction.
The X and Y values dynamically update as you drag the rectangle.

3. Release the mouse when the rectangle has been re-positioned as needed.
81

Define an offset from the report origin graphically
1. Place the mouse on the green rectangle in the column of data that you want to reposition.
2. When the mouse changes to a two-side arrow, as shown in the example below, drag the
box in the appropriate left or right direction.
The Offset and X values dynamically update as you drag the rectangle.
3. Release the mouse when the rectangle has been re-positioned as needed.
82

Add and Remove Report Columns
1. Click Add Column
on the vertical toolbar.
The software adds a node to the tree view, and adds a column of empty rectangles to the
appropriate report location in the View window.
Each empty rectangle represents an attribute value. To view the empty rectangles,
set Maximum Entries and Vertical Spacing to a value greater than zero (0).
2. Define settings for Name, Offset, Maximum Characters, and X as needed.
3. To remove a column from the report, select the column in the tree view, and then click
Delete Column
The software removes the column heading from the tree view and the column of rectangles
from the report location.
Define drawing frame attributes

Add or Remove a Drawing Frame Attribute
1. Open the Drawing Setup Tool (on page 73), and select the Attributes tab.
The Attributes page displays.
2. Click Add/Remove Attributes
The software opens the Add/Remove Attributes dialog box.

3. In the Available list, select the attribute to add.
Hold down the CTRL key to select multiple attributes.
4. Click Add
to add the attribute In Use list.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box.

The software inserts the attribute at the bottom of the Attributes Grid window, and places
an empty rectangle on the drawing frame in the vicinity of the last attribute placed on the
grid.
83

6. Position the rectangle as required, by graphically selecting and moving it, and then adjust its
position by editing it in the Attributes Grid window.
When you select a rectangle in the drawing frame, its outline color changes to red and the
corresponding row in the Attributes Grid window is highlighted. The cursor changes to a
cross-hair, indicating that it can be moved. Finally, the software displays a tooltip showing the
display name as defined in the Project defaults.
Remove a Drawing Frame Attribute

1. Select the Attributes tab in the Drawing Setup Tool.
The Attributes page displays.
2. Click Add/Remove Attributes
The software opens the Add/Remove Attributes dialog box.

3. In the In Use list, select the attribute to remove.
4. Click Remove Attribute
to remove the attribute from In Use list.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box.

6. The software removes the row containing the attribute data from the Attributes Grid
window, removes the corresponding rectangle from the drawing frame.
Graphically Move a Drawing Frame Attribute
1. Click once on the attribute to move.
The software highlights the attribute in red on the drawing frame, and the pointer changes to
a cross.
2. Drag the attribute to its new position, and release the mouse.
3.
As you drag the attribute, the corresponding X and Y settings in the Attributes Grid
window dynamically update.
Modify a Drawing Frame Attribute

1. Click an attribute rectangle in the drawing frame.
The software highlights the attribute in the Attributes Grid window.
2. Modify the attribute values as needed in the Attributes Grid window.
84
Update the style

In order for the changes that you make in the Drawing Setup Tool to be effective, you must
click
in the bottom right corner of the ISOGEN Configuration window to save the
changes to the active isometric drawing style file.
Basic Setup Page

Controls the drawing format, size, and the template file used as the backing sheet. You can also
specify which user-defined reports are to be plotted on the isometric drawing when it is
generated.
Template - Displays the file to be used for the drawing backing sheet. Click Browse
navigate to the required template file.
, and
Drawing Output Format - Controls the 2D CAD file format that ISOGEN creates during
isometric drawing generation. Select one of the following: AutoCAD DXF (DXF), MicroStation
(DGN), Smart DWG (DWG), Smart DGN (DGN), Smart DGN v8 (DG8), SmartSketch (IGR), or
Shape2d (SHA). The default format is Smart DWG.
The current version the Drawing Setup Tool does not support the display of Smart
DGN v8 files (.dg8). To display a .dg8 backing sheet within the tool, save the backing sheet as a
Version 7 DGN file (.DGN), and rename a copy of the Version 7 file using a .DG8 extension. The
software will use the .DGN version of the file when displaying the backing sheet within the
Drawing Setup Tool but will use the .DG8 version of the file during isometric drawing
generation.
Allow ISOGEN to generate standard drawing frame - Ignores the user-specified template
backing sheet. When this option is selected, ISOGEN generates drawings using its own built-in
drawing frame.
85

Drawing Size - Displays the standard paper size for the isometric drawing. Select A0, A1, A2,
A3, A4, ANSI "A", ANSI "B", ANSI "C", ANSI "D", ANSI "E", or Custom. The drawing size
that you select is shown superimposed in green on the backing sheet, as shown in the example
below.
Width - Sets the width of the drawing. This option is available only if you set Drawing Size to
Custom.
Height - Sets the height of the drawing area. This option is available only if you set Drawing
Size to Custom.
Backing Sheet Units - Indicates the drawing units to be used. Typically, backing sheet units are
used only for DXF and DWG formats. Select inches or mm.
When using formats other than DXF and DWG, setting this option to mm gives the best
results within the Drawing Setup Tool.
User Defined Material List - Indicates whether a Material List report is output on the isometric
drawing. To include this report on the isometric drawing, select its check box. If you select this
option, you must also specify the Number of sections. Clear the check box to suppress the
report output.
User Defined Weld List - Indicates whether a Weld List report is output on the isometric
drawing. To include this report on the isometric drawing, select its check box. Clear the check
box to suppress the report output.
User Defined Cut List - Indicates whether a Cut List report is output on the isometric drawing.
To include this report on the isometric drawing, select its check box. Clear the check box to
suppress the report output.
Number of sections - Specifies the number of sections included for the user-defined Material
List report that is output on the isometric drawing. Select One, Two, or Three. This option is
available only if User Defined Material List is selected.
86
Drawing Areas Page

Defines the drawing area, which includes the drawing sheet and the areas of the drawing frame
where ISOGEN plots the user-defined reports. The Drawing Areas page of the tool is divided
into two sections.
Drawing Areas window - Displays a grid view of drawing and report layout properties. In the
View window, a green box with grab handles identifies the drawing boundary. In the report
area, a colored anchor indicates the start position of the report data.
View window - Displays the selected style's default backing sheet with the drawing area
superimposed upon it.
In the View window, you can graphically customize the left, right, top, and bottom margins of the
drawing and define the layout and appearance of the report data that is plotted on the isometric
drawing. You can also type new values in the Drawing Areas window. For more information,
see Define drawing margins and report layout (on page 76).
Drawing Areas Window

Any of the categories and related properties listed below can appear on the Drawing Areas
window, depending on the settings that have been defined on the Basic Setup page.
The Drawing Areas window can be displayed, hidden, docked, maximized, tabbed, or
made to float. For more information, see Moving and Resizing Windows in Drawing Setup Tool
(on page 70).
Categorized - Groups drawing properties in the Drawing Areas window by category. At a
minimum, the panel displays the Drawing Area Margins category, which contains margin
settings for the drawing area. Additional categories, such as Material List, Cut List, and Weld
List, display only if the corresponding report option is selected on the Basic Setup page. These
categories contain format and layout properties specific to the data that is plotted on a report.
87

Another set of categories can also display on the window: Section One, Section Two, and
Section Three. These categories, which contain properties that are specific to the different
sections of the material list, are controlled by the Number of sections setting on the Basic
Setup page. The example below illustrates the relationship between the reports options
selected on the Basic Setup page (1) and the categories that appear on the Drawing Areas
window (2).
Alphabetical - Groups drawing properties in the Drawing Areas window as a flat,

alphabetical list.
Drawing Area Margins - Groups the properties that define the drawing margins. Margins are
measured relative to the drawing sheet. For more information, see Define drawing margins and
report layout (on page 76).
88
Bottom - Sets the distance between the outer edge of the drawing sheet and the outer line
of the drawing frame at the bottom of the drawing. Type a value (real number) in mm or
inches, depending on the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page.
Left - Sets the distance between the outer edge of the drawing sheet and the outer line of
the drawing frame on the left side of the drawing. Type a value (real number) in mm or
Right - Sets the distance between the outer edge of the drawing sheet and the outer line of
the drawing frame on the right side of the drawing. Type a value (real number) in mm or
Top - Sets the distance between the outer edge of the drawing sheet and the outer line of
the drawing frame at the top of the drawing. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches,
depending on the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page.

Material List - Groups layout and format properties for material list report data on the isometric
drawing. This collection of properties appears only if User Defined Material List is selected on
the Basic Setup page.
Text Font - Specifies the font used to display material list report data. Select the required
font in the Text Font list.
Text Height - Specifies the height of the text that appears in the material list report. This
setting applies to all sections of the material list. Type a value (real number) in mm or
X - Sets the bottom left X, or horizontal, position of the first line of the material list plotted on
the isometric drawing. Type a value (integer).
Y - Sets the bottom left Y, or vertical, position of the first line of the material list plotted on
Weld List - Groups layout and format properties for weld list report data on the isometric
drawing. This collection of properties is shown only if User Defined Weld List is selected on the
Basic Setup page.
Text Font - Specifies the font used to display weld list report data. Select the required font
in the Text Font list.
Text Height - Specifies the height of the text that appears in the weld list report. Type a
value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the Backing Sheet Units setting on the
Basic Setup page.
X - Sets the bottom left X, or horizontal, position of the first line of the weld list plotted on the
isometric drawing. Type a value (integer).
Y - Sets the bottom left Y, or vertical, position of the first line of the weld list plotted on the
Cut List - Groups layout and format properties for cut list report data on the isometric drawing.
This collection of properties appears only if User Defined Cut List is selected on the Basic
Setup page.
Text Font - Specifies the font used to display cut list report data. Select the required font in
the list.
Text Height - Specifies the height of the text that appears in the cut list report. Type a value
(real number) in mm or inches, depending on the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic
Setup page.
X - Sets the bottom left X, or horizontal, position of the first line of the cut list plotted on the
Y - Sets the bottom left Y, or vertical, position of the first line of the weld list plotted on the
Section One - Groups layout and format properties for the report data contained in Section 1 of
the material list. This category appears only if User Defined Material List is selected on the
Basic Setup page.
Content - Indicates the category of data plotted in Section 1 of the material list. Select
Fabrication, Erection, Offshore, or Erection/Offshore. The default setting is Fabrication.
89

Section Two - Groups layout and format properties for the report data contained in Section 2 of
the material list. This category appears only if Number of sections on the Basic Setup page is
set to Two or Three.
Fabrication, Erection, Offshore, or Erection/Offshore. The category that you select must
not be the same as the Content setting for Section 1. The default setting is Erection.
Y - Sets the Y, or vertical, offset for Section 2 of the material list with reference to the X and
Y positions of the material list. Type a value (integer) in mm or inches, depending on the
Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page.
Section Three- Groups layout and format properties for the report data contained in Section 3
of the material list. This category appears only if Number of sections on the Basic Setup page
is set to Three.
not be the same as the Content setting for Section 1 or Section 2. The default setting is
Offshore.
Y - Sets the Y, or vertical, offset for Section 3 of the material list with reference to the X and
Y positions of the material list. Type a value (integer) in mm or inches, depending on the
Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page.
Material List Page

Defines the layout and appearance of the report data in the material list that is plotted on the
isometric drawing. When ISOGEN processes the style to generate an isometric drawing, the
material list is automatically populated to report the materials in the pipeline (or spool). The
Drawing Setup Tool displays this page only when User Defined Material List is selected on
the Basic Setup page. The Material List page is divided into two sections.
90
Material List window - Displays properties that control the materials report set up, contents,
and location (also shown graphically). These properties can be customized to meet your
specific isometric drawing requirements. For more information, see Customize report
settings (on page 78).
View window - Displays a copy of the selected style's default backing sheet with the location
of the materials report data superimposed upon it.

Material List Window
The categories and related properties listed below can appear on the Material List window,
depending on the reports options that are selected on the Basic Setup page. The data in the
example below defines a two section material list. The first section (Section 1), starting at
396mm x 397mm, contains a list of up to 25 Fabrication materials plotted downwards (Down).
The second section (Section Two) contains a similar number of Erection materials also plotted
downwards. It is plotted 182mm below the first section.
Many of the properties listed below can also be defined or modified on the Basic Setup
page of the tool.
The Material List window can be displayed, hidden, docked, maximized, tabbed, or made to
float. For more information, see Moving and Resizing Windows in Drawing Setup Tool (on
page 70).
Categorized - Groups material list properties in the Material List window by category. The
Number of sections setting, which is defined on the Basic Setup page, determines whether
the categories Section Two or Section Three are displayed. The Section categories contain
properties that are specific to a particular section of the material list.
Alphabetical - Groups material list properties in the Material List window as a flat,
alphabetical list.
91

Material List - Groups layout and format properties for material list report data, including the
report origin and the text size and font
X - Sets the bottom left X, or horizontal, position of the first line of the material list that is
plotted on the isometric drawing. Type a value (integer).
Y - Sets the bottom left Y, or vertical, position of the first line of the material list that is plotted
on the isometric drawing. Type a value (integer).
Text Font - Specifies the font used to display material list report data. Select the required
Text Height - Specifies the height of the text that appears in the material list report. This
setting applies to all sections of the material list. Type a value (real number) in mm or
Vertical Spacing - Specifies the vertical spacing between the lines of data. The vertical
spacing applies to all sections in the material list. Type a value (real number) in mm or
Section One - Groups layout and format properties for the report data contained in Section 1 of
the material list.
Content - Displays the category of data plotted in Section 1 of the material list. Select
Fabrication, Erection, Offshore, or Erection/Offshore. The default setting is Fabrication.
List Down - Controls the direction in which the material list is printed with reference to the X
and Y settings under the Material List category. If you select Down, ISOGEN plots the
material list from top to bottom. If you select Up, the material list is plotted from bottom going
up.
Maximum Entries - Sets the maximum number of entries in the material list before an
overflow sheet is generated. Type the required value (positive integer).
Section Two - Groups layout and format properties for the report data contained in Section 2 of
the material list. This category appears on the panel only if Number of sections on the Basic
Setup page is set to Two or Three.
92
not be the same as the category defined for Section 1. The default setting is Erection.
up.
Y - Specifies the Y (or vertical) offset for Section 2 of the material list with reference to the
report origin defined by the X and Y settings under the Material List category. Type a value
(integer) in mm or inches, depending on the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic
Setup page.

Section Three - Groups layout and format properties for the report data contained in Section 3
of the material list. This category appears on the panel only if Number of sections on the Basic
Setup page is set to Three.
not be the same as the categories defined for Section 1 and Section 2. The default setting is
Offshore.
up.
For a three section material list, all sections must be plotted in the same
direction.
Y - Specifies the Y (or vertical) offset for Section 3 of the material list with reference to the
report origin defined by the X and Y settings under the Material List category. Type a value
(integer) in mm or inches, depending on the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic
Setup page.
Column Settings - Controls what component attributes are to be plotted in the report, along
with basic layout properties. In the example below, the material list is set up to plot five columns
of attribute data. The first component attribute (PT-NO) is to be plotted with a zero (0) offset
from the origin (X).
Name - Specifies the name of the component attribute being defined in the report. Select
the required attribute in the list.
93
94
Offset - Specifies the offset from the X setting (or report origin) defined under the Material
List category. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the Backing
Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page. The value that you enter has a direct impact
on the column X setting. For example, if the horizontal position of the origin for the first line
of report data is set to 250, and you set a 150mm offset from that origin under Column 6,
the horizontal start position (or X setting) for that component attribute data is 400.
Maximum Characters - Sets the width of the column. The value that you enter must be
zero or greater.
X - Specifies the horizontal) start position for the column data with reference to the X setting
of the material list origin. The value that you enter causes the Offset setting to update
automatically. Type a value (integer) in mm or inches, depending on the Backing Sheet
Units setting on the Basic Setup page.
You can also define Offset and X, Y settings graphically using the mouse. For more
information, see Define X,Y, and Offset Settings Graphically in Customize report settings (on
page 78).
Use Add Column

and Delete Column
to control which component attributes are
plotted in the material list report. For more information, see Add and Remove Report
Columns in Customize report settings (on page 78).
Weld List Page

Defines the layout and appearance of the report data in the weld list that ISOGEN plots on the
isometric drawing. The Drawing Setup Tool displays this page only when User Defined Weld
List is selected on the Basic Setup page. The Weld List page is divided into two sections.
Weld List window - Displays properties that control the report set up and report contents in
a tree view format. These properties can be customized to meet your specific isometric
drawing requirements. For more information, see Customize report settings (on page 78).
of the report data superimposed upon it.
Weld List Window
page of the tool.
The Weld List window can be displayed, hidden, docked, maximized, tabbed, or made to
page 70).
Categorized - Groups weld list properties in the Weld List window by category.
Alphabetical - Groups weld list properties in the Weld List window as a flat, alphabetical
list.
Weld List - Groups layout and format properties for weld list report data, including the report
origin and the text size and font
List Down - Controls the direction in which the weld list is printed with reference to the X
and Y settings under the Weld List category. If you select Down, ISOGEN plots the weld list
from top to bottom. If you select Up, the weld list is plotted from bottom going up.
Maximum Entries - Sets the maximum number of entries in the weld list before an overflow
sheet is generated. Type the required value (positive integer).
X - Sets the bottom left X, or horizontal, position of the first line of the weld list that is plotted
Y - Sets the bottom left Y, or vertical, position of the first line of the weld list that is plotted on
Text Font - Specifies the font used to display weld list report data. Select the required font
in the Text Font list.
Text Height - Specifies the height of the text that appears in the weld list report. This setting
applies to all sections of the weld list. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches,
spacing applies to all sections in the weld list. Type a value (real number) in mm or
95

Column Settings - Controls which component attributes are plotted in the weld list report, along
with basic layout properties. In the example below, the plotted weld list is set up to contain four
columns of attribute data. The fourth component attribute (WELD-LOCATION) is to be plotted
with a 43mm offset from the origin (X).
96
Offset - Specifies the offset from the X setting (or report origin) defined under the Weld List
category. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the Backing Sheet
Units setting on the Basic Setup page. The value that you enter has a direct impact on the
column X setting. For example, if the horizontal position of the origin for the first line of report
data is set to 245, and you set a 15mm offset from that origin under Column 2, the
horizontal start position (or X setting) for that component attribute data is 265.
Maximum Characters - Sets the number of entries that the column can accommodate. The
value that you enter must be zero or greater.
X - Specifies the horizontal start position for the column data with reference to the X setting
of the weld list origin. The value that you enter causes the Offset setting to update
page 78).
Use Add Column

and Delete Column
plotted on the weld list report. For more information, see Add and Remove Report Columns
in Customize report settings (on page 78).
Cut List Page

Defines the layout and appearance of the report data in the cut list that is plotted on the
isometric drawing. The Drawing Setup Tool displays this page only when User Defined Cut
List is selected on the Basic Setup page. The Cut List page is divided into two sections.
Cut List window - Displays properties that control the report set up, report contents, and
report location (shown graphically). These properties can be customized to meet your
specific isometric drawing requirements. For more information, see Customize report
settings (on page 78).
of the report data superimposed upon it.
Cut List Window
page of the tool.
The Cut List window can be displayed, hidden, docked, maximized, tabbed, or made to
page 70).
Categorized - Groups cut list properties in the Cut List window by category.
Alphabetical - Groups cut list properties in the Cut List window as a flat, alphabetical list.
Cut List - Groups layout and format properties for the cut list report data, including the report
origin and the text size and font.
Allow Overflow - Controls whether the cut list causes an overflow drawing.
List Down - Controls the direction in which the cut list is printed with reference to the X and
Y settings under the Cut List category. If you select Down, ISOGEN plots the cut list from
top to bottom. If you select Up, the cut list is plotted from bottom going up.
Maximum Entries - Sets the maximum number of entries in the cut list before an overflow
sheet is generated. Type the required value (positive integer).
97
X - Sets the bottom left X, or horizontal, position of the first line of the cut list that is plotted
Y - Sets the bottom left Y, or vertical, position of the first line of the cut list that is plotted on
Text Font - Specifies the font used to display cut list report data. Select the required font in
the Text Font list.
Text Height - Specifies the height of the text that appears in the cut list report. This setting
applies to all sections of the cut list. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending
on the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page.
spacing applies to all sections in the cut list. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches,
Column Settings - Controls which component attributes are plotted in the cut list report, along
with basic layout properties. In the example below, the plotted cut list is set up to display five
columns of attribute data. The first component attribute (CUT-PIECE-NO) is to be plotted with a
zero offset from the origin (X).
98
Offset - Specifies the offset from the X and Y settings defined under the Cut List category.
Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the Backing Sheet Units setting
on the Basic Setup page. The value that you enter has a direct impact on the column X
setting. For example, if the horizontal position of the origin for the first line of report data is
set to 315.3, and you set an 18mm offset from that origin under Column 2, the horizontal
start position (or X setting) for that component attribute data is 333.3.
Maximum Characters - Sets the number of entries that the column can accommodate. The
value that you enter must be zero or greater.
X - Specifies the horizontal start position for the column data with reference to the X setting
of the cut list origin. The value that you enter causes the Offset setting to update
page 78).
Use Add Column

and Delete Column
plotted on the cut list report. For more information, see Add and Remove Report Columns in
Customize report settings (on page 78).
99
Attributes Page
Defines the pipeline attributes that are plotted on the drawing frame. The Attributes page is
divided into two sections.
View window - Displays a copy of the selected style's default backing sheet.
Attributes window - Displays the component attributes. Each attribute has a position, and
you can define its text size, font, and layer independently. These properties can be
customized to meet your specific isometric drawing requirements. For more information, see
Define drawing frame attributes (on page 83).
Attributes Window
The Attributes window can be displayed, hidden, docked, maximized, tabbed, or made to
float. For more information, see Moving and Resizing Windows in Drawing Setup Tool (on page
70).
Attribute - Specifies the name of the attribute being defined.
X - Defines the X, or horizontal, position for the text. Type a value in mm or inches, depending
on the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page.
Y - Defines the Y, or vertical, position for the text. Type a value in mm or inches, depending on
the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page.
Text Height - Sets the character height for the text. Type the required size in mm or Inches (as
a real number), depending on the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page.
Font - Specifies the font used when plotting the attribute in the drawing frame. Select the
required font in the list.
Barcode - Sets the barcode standard used by ISOGEN. The value you enter creates the start
and finish characters for the barcode reader. Type the number that corresponds to the required
standard: 1 (Barcode 30), 2 (Barcode 25), 3 (Barcode 25 Interleave), or 4 (Barcode 128).
Although several barcode standards exist worldwide to suit different industries, ISOGEN has
only standardized on four.
Justification - Sets the justification for the text. Select Left, Right, or Centre.
Layer - Specifies a number that corresponds to the layer. This number is an integer that
identifies the required layer, or level, to which the component type is to be assigned. Select the
required value in the list.
100

Colour - Specify the index number that represents a specific color as defined in the output
drawing software. This option is required only for MicroStation or AutoCAD output. AutoCAD
uses a fixed 256 color pallet starting at 1 (red) to 256. In MicroStation, in addition to a default
color pallet, each design file can have a unique custom color table. For example, color index
number 3 may be red in one design file, but it may be green in another. The table below shows
a color comparison between a sampling of AutoCAD and MicroStation color index numbers.
AutoCAD Color
Index Number
MicroStation Color
Index Number
14
Color Output on
Isometric Drawing
For specific information about AutoCAD, MicroStation, and other 3rd party drawing
software color tables, refer to the product documentation delivered with your software.
Char Width - Sets the character width for the text. Type the required size in mm or inches (as a
real number), depending on the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page.
Weight - Controls the character thickness. Type a value between 1 and 9. This option is only
used for MicroStation.
Rotation - Defines the angle of rotation in clockwise degrees.
Truncation Length - Defines the number of output characters.
Use Add / Remove Attributes
on the vertical toolbar to control which drawing frame
attributes are plotted on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Define drawing frame
attributes (on page 83).
101
Add/Remove Attributes Dialog Box

Lists the attributes that are plotted in the drawing frame, as well as the attributes that are
available to be plotted. The software opens this dialog box when you click Add / Remove
Attributes
on the Drawing Setup Tool vertical toolbar.
Available - Lists the attributes that you can select to plot on the isometric drawing.
In Use - Lists the attributes that are currently selected for plotting on the isometric drawing.
Add - Moves the selected attribute to the In Use list.
Remove - Removes the selected attribute from the In Use list.
OK - Closes the dialog box, and returns you to the Attributes page. The attributes that you
selected are displayed in the Attributes window grid area.
Cancel - Closes the dialog box without making any changes to the grid in the Attributes
window.
The Available and In Use lists are standard multi-select lists, allowing you to select one
or more attributes. To select consecutive attributes, select the first attribute, press and hold
down the SHIFT key, and then select the last attribute. To select nonconsecutive attributes,
press and hold down the CTRL key, and then select each attribute.
102
APPENDIX A
Appendix: Isometric Drawing Properties

The isometric drawing properties define drawing and report output, which includes drawing
symbols, dimensions, layers, drawing frame, attributes, material lists, weld lists, and detail
sketches. Each isometric drawing style is associated with a set of properties. When you change
the properties that belong to a drawing style, it alters the content and appearance of the drawing
and report file outputs that are produced when the style is used for isometric drawing
generation.
The ISOGEN Configuration Home screen organizes the ISOGEN drawing controls into the
categories listed below:
Drawing Manager - Organizes a collection of properties that set options for system
controls, including pre- and post-processors and the names of the input files used by
ISOGEN. The Drawing Manager category also includes properties that define the content
and layout of output reports. For more information, see Drawing Manager (on page 104).
Drawing Area - Organizes a collection of properties that define the content that displays on
the isometric drawing. The Drawing Area category also includes properties the define how
to represent pipeline components on the drawing. For more information, see Drawing Area
(on page 166).
Dimensions - Organizes a collection of properties that define the display and format of
dimensions and coordinate data on the isometric drawing. For more information, see
Drawing Border - Organizes a collection of properties that specifies the attributes plotted
on the drawing frame, as well as their placement within the drawing frame. The Drawing
Border category also includes properties that define symbol shape positioning. For more
information, see Drawing Border (on page 360).
Materials - Organizes a collection of properties that define the position, format, and
contents of the parts list. For more information, see Materials (on page 371).
Welds - Organizes a collection of properties that define the display of welds on the isometric
drawing. The Welds category also includes properties that set options for weld-specific
reports. The weld list is the report that appears in the drawing, while the weld list summary
contains the weld data formatted in a text file. For more information, see Welds (on page
449).
Spools - Organizes a collection of properties that defined spool attribute data output on the
isometric drawing. The Spools category also includes properties that define spool attribute
data to summary report files, such as the spool information file. For more information, see
Spools (on page 486).
Cut Pieces - Organizes a collection of properties for the cut list, which provides a list of
pipes that are cut into smaller lengths during construction. For more information, see Cut
Pieces (on page 498).
See Also
Configure Drawing and Report Settings (on page 49)
Review the Interface (on page 17)
103
Drawing Manager
Sets properties for system controls, including pre- and post-processors and the names of the
input files used by ISOGEN. Properties that define the content and appearance of the extracted
drawing are also available. The Drawing Manager category includes the style groups listed
below:
104
Drawing Generation - Organizes a collection of properties that define the format of the data
that is output on the isometric drawing, such as the units format, deviations, and
calculations. For more information, see Drawing Generation (on page 105).
Drawing File - Organizes a collection of properties that define the backing sheet, such as
the paper size, margins, template file location, and folder location of the output file. For more
information, see Drawing File (on page 121).
Pre and Post Processor - Organizes a collection of properties that control how pre- and
post-processor applications run and interact with Personal ISOGEN. For more information,
see Pre and Post Processor (on page 128).
Input Files - Organizes a collection of properties that define the names and locations of the
input data files ISOGEN uses. Options are also available for setting the
PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION section of the Data Definition (DDF) file,
heat treatment, and NDE testing data. For more information, see Input Files (on page 131).
Style Properties - Organizes a collection of properties that define the path location and
export behavior of the active style. For more information, see Style Properties (on page
134).
Reports - Organizes a collection of properties that define ISOGEN output and report files.
For more information, see Reports (on page 136).
Click
settings.
to update the active style with any changes that you make to property
To return a property value to its original setting, click Reset Options

that corresponds to the property to reset.
, and then click the
See Also
Drawing Generation
Controls the format of the data that is output on the isometric drawing, such as the units format,
deviations, and calculations.
Topics
Overview ........................................................................................ 105
Units ............................................................................................... 109
Drawing Splitting ............................................................................ 111
Weights .......................................................................................... 115
Centre of Gravity ............................................................................ 115
Tolerances ..................................................................................... 117
Diagnostics .................................................................................... 118
Dates .............................................................................................. 120
Centreline Lengths ......................................................................... 121
Actions ........................................................................................... 121
105
Overview
Specifies the drawing style and type of backing sheet used when the isometric drawing is
generated. Properties also allow you to define the output of the materials, weld, and cut list on
the drawing.
Isometric Type
Sets the required isometric type. You can only modify this setting using ISOGEN Configuration.
Select one of the following types:
Combined - Fabrication, erection, and offshore information.
Erection/Offshore - Erection/offshore type isometric drawing.
Fabrication Only - Fabrication only isometric.
Flat Spool (Flat) - Individual flat spool isometrics (maximum legs flat).
Spool - Individual spool isometrics As-Built orientation.
Material List Only - Isometrics suppression. No isometric drawings are generated.
Combined Material - Combined material list only, without pipeline graphics.
Erection Material - Erection material list only, without pipeline graphics.
Fabrication Material - Fabrication material list only, without pipeline graphics.
Spool Material - Spool material list only, without spool graphics.
Defines:
Option Switch - 21, Pos 1-3
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.IsometricType
North Direction
Controls the viewing direction (isometric orientation), or the direction that the north arrow points
on the isometric drawing. You can only modify this setting using ISOGEN Configuration. Select
one of the orientation options: Top Left, Top Right, Bottom Left, or Bottom Right.
Defines:
Option Switch - 42, Pos1
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.NorthDirection
Rotation Angle
Controls the rotation of the isometric drawing in a clockwise direction by a user-specified
number of degrees.
Type 0 to orient isometric drawings in the horizontal plane using the North Direction setting.
This is the default setting. Alternatively, you can orient isometric drawings in the horizontal plane
in a clockwise direction by the specified number of degrees. Type a value in tenths of a degree
up to a maximum of 3600. This user-specified value overwrites the North Direction setting.
Where pipelines are oriented in a non-primary, or skewed, direction, the subsequent
isometric drawing output can be congested and difficult to read. The ability to orient pipelines in
the horizontal plane so that the majority of skewed pipeline sections are rotated to a primary
106

direction can simplify isometric drawing output. The example below shows pipe oriented in a
southeasterly direction:
The next example shows the same pipe rotated 45 so that it is now in a southerly direction:
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.DrawingRotationAngle
Drawing
Controls isometric drawing generation. Select the checkbox to generate the drawing.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Visible
Drawing Frame
Controls plotting of the standard ISOGEN drawing frame. Select the checkbox to plot the
standard ISOGEN drawing frame.
Defines:
Option Switch - 18
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.Visible
107

Material List
Turns on and off the display of the material list on the drawing.
Select the checkbox to plot the material list. To turn off all material list types, except the material
control file and cut list, clear the checkbox. The software controls the output of these two files
separately.
Defines:
Option Switch - 23, Pos 1
I-Configure - MaterialList.Visible
Weld List
Turns on and off the display of the weld or operations summary on the drawing. Select the
checkbox to plot the weld list.
Defines:
I-Configure - WeldList.Visible
Cut List
Turns on and off the display of the cut piece list and cut piece identifiers. The cut list is a report
on the cut pieces that ISOGEN has determined to be in the pipeline. Select the checkbox to
show the cut piece list and numbers on the isometric drawing.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.Visible
Start Drawing Number

Allows the first sheet to start at an alternative number instead of starting with drawing number 1.
Type 0 to start first sheet at drawing number 1, or type a value to start the first sheet at x+1,
where x is the user-specified value.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.StartDrawingNumber
108

Output Format
Controls the 2D CAD file format that ISOGEN creates. You can only modify this setting using
ISOGEN Configuration. Supported formats are listed below:
AutoCAD DXF (DXF)
MicroStation (DGN)
Smart DWG (DWG)
Smart DGN (DGN)
Smart DGN v8 .DGN)
SmartSketch (IGR)
Shape2d (SHA)
POD2
POD3
Isogen
Postscript
With Smart DGN v8 output, template backing sheets (supplied by Alias) are suffixed with
dg8.
To use .dg8 templates:

a. Rename the .DGN v5 template backing sheets to .dg5.
b. Rename the .dg8 templates to .dgn.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.OutputFormat
DRg1of1OnSingleIsos
Allows a single drawing to be identified as Drg 1 of 1 on single-sheet isometric drawings.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.Drg1of1OnSingleIsos
109
Units
Controls the units format used for bolts and dimensions.
Pipe and Fittings

Specifies the units format used for dimensions.
Metric / MM Bores - Use millimeter lengths and millimeter pipe bores.
Metric / Inch Bores - Use millimeter lengths and inch pipe bores.
Imperial / Inch Bores - Use inch lengths and inch pipe bores.
You can specify the changeover point from where lengths are reported in inches only,
to feet and inches.
Imperial / MM Bores - Use inch pipe bores with lengths in feet and inches.
The combination MM bore, FT-IN dimensions is invalid.

Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Control.Units
110

Bolt Length
Specifies the units used for bolt lengths.
As Drawing - Use the setting defined by Pipes and Fittings.
INCH - Use inch diameters.
MM - Use millimeter diameters.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.BoltLengthUnits
Bolt Diameter
Specifies the units used for bolt diameters.
As Drawing - Use the setting defined by Pipes and Fittings.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.BoltDiameterUnits
Drawing Splitting
Provides options related to split control.
Automatic Drawing Splitting

Invokes automatic splitting of drawings.
Select the checkbox to calculate the volume of pipeline graphics that can be satisfactorily
displayed on the selected drawing size, and generate the required number of isometrics to
contain the complete pipeline. To use the Number of Drawings setting to specify a fixed
number of drawings, clear the checkbox. Clearing the Auto Drawing Split checkbox allows you
to directly dictate how many isometric drawings are produced for the pipeline.
Unless Ignore User Split Points is also selected, the Automatic Drawing Splitting setting
is ignored if manually-added pipeline split points are present in the pipeline data file.
Because the setting is applied to all the pipelines in a run, we recommend that you only set
the number of drawings in special cases, such as for single pipeline runs.
If you need to use the Material Part Number property, we recommend that you do not set
Auto Drawing Split to force single sheet isometric drawings.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.AutoDrawingSplit
111

Ignore User Split Points
Controls how ISOGEN interacts with user-specified drawing split points.
Select the checkbox to ignore user-specified drawing split points present in the piping data file.
To process user-specified drawing split points present in the piping data file, clear the checkbox.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.IgnoredUserSplitPoints
Number of Drawings
Specifies the number of drawing sheets required for split control.
For automatic control of drawing numbers, type 0. To specify the number of drawings, type a
value in the range 1-99
Unless you select Ignore User Split Points, the Number of Drawings setting is ignored if
manually placed pipeline split points are present in the pipeline data file.
Number of Drawings dictates how many drawing sheets are extracted for a pipeline.
Therefore, you should use this property only for special cases for single pipe runs as the
setting applies to all the pipelines in a run.
To use Number of Drawings, you must clear the Auto Drawing Split checkbox.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.NoOfDrawing
Show Continuation at Split Points

Controls the location of drawing continuation messages at drawing split points on the isometric
drawing.
112
True - Output a drawing continuation message that points to the drawing split point. If Show
Coordinates at Split Points is also set to True, coordinate data is displayed (1). However,
if Show Coordinates at Split Points is set to False, the software displays the drawing
continuation message but suppresses the display of coordinate data (2).
False - Output a drawing continuation message that points to the end of continuation
components, and suppress the output of coordinate data (1). Requires that Show
Coordinates at Split Points also be set to False. If Show Coordinates at Split Points is
set to True, the software displays a full set of coordinates and a drawing continuation
message that points to the drawing split point (2).
Show Continuation at Split Points works in conjunction with Show Coordinates at Split
Points.
Setting AText -209 and -276 to blank, suppresses the isometric output of the Show
Continuation at Split Points and Show Coordinates at Split Points settings.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowContAtSplitPoint
Show Coordinates at Split Points

Controls whether the connection coordinates at split points and ISO TEXT are shown on the
isometric.
Select the checkbox to display a full set of connection coordinates in both drawings when a
user-defined split point is used.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowCoordAtSplitPts
Pipeline Splitting in Tube

Controls the actions taken by the software whenever the ISOGEN automatic pipeline split facility
selects a split point that is located in a straight length of pipe.
Normal - Use the default for pipeline splitting to function as normal when the split point
occurs along a section of pipe. The relevant split point information is passed back to the 3D
design system using the isometric repeatability file, if it is being used.
Reject - Write the warning message, UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT, to the message file
if a pipeline split occurs along a section of pipe. No plots are produced and no information is
written to the isometric repeatability file for the pipeline.
113
Message - Write the warning message, UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT, to the message
file if a pipeline split occurs along a section of pipe. Plots are produced with the message,
UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT plotted at the top of each affected drawing. No information
is written to the isometric repeatability file for the pipeline.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.PipelineSplittingInTube
Pipeline Splitting
Controls the amount of drawing data that triggers a drawing split. The specified setting is a scale
factor expressed as a percentage. Setting a value less than 100 causes less of the pipeline to
appear on each drawing before automatic splitting occurs, resulting in a less crowded drawing.
This property is intended only for modest modifications of the drawing whitespace.
Specify a value in the range 90-110. If a particular value does not work, gradually adjust the
value and re-extract the drawing to check the results. Setting Pipeline Splitting to 0 or 100
uses the default for what ISOGEN considers to be the limit for drawing information content. This
limit is set within the software and varies for each size of drawing.
Defines:
Option Switch - 38
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.PipelineSplitting
Overflow Sheet Numbering

Controls the numbering of overflow drawing sheets.
Next Identifier - The second isometric drawing has the next sheet number in the sequence.
Alpha suffix - The second isometric drawing has the same sheet number as the first one,
with a character suffix, for example, A, B, and so forth.
Overflow Sheet Numbering applies only when you set Material List Overflow to
Continuation Sheet to produce a second sheet that displays the material list continuation.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.OverflowDrawingID
Material List Splitting

Controls the plotting of the material list when a pipeline splits onto two or more drawings.
Per Drawing - Plot the material list per isometric drawing.
Per Pipeline - Plot the material list per pipeline.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.MaterialListSplitting.
114
Weights
Output
Controls how component weights are displayed on the isometric drawing.
None - Output no weight information. Applies to all outputs, including such things as
material lists, weight output on the drawing frame, and material control files. This is the
default setting.
kgs - Input and output all weights in kilograms (Kgs).
lbs - Input and output all weights in pounds (Lbs.)
Linear Denominator specifies the units used for the linear weight denominator,
regardless of the units used for weights.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.WeightOutput
Linear Denominator
Specifies the units used for the linear weight denominator, regardless of the units used for
weights.
None - Use the default units for linear denominator. For example: LBS/FT when weight is in
pounds (Lbs.), and KGS/M when weight is in kilograms (Kgs.).
m - Output the linear denominator in meters.
ft - Output the linear denominator in feet.

The weight unit is specified by the Output setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.LinearWeightDenominator
Support Additional Material

Controls inclusion of the weight of additional material associated with supports when performing
center-of-gravity calculations.
Include - Include the weight of additional materials.
Ignore - Ignore the weight of additional materials.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.SupportAdditionsWeight
115
Centre of Gravity
Provides options for controlling center-of-gravity and weight calculations.
Enabled
Controls whether any center-of-gravity and weight calculations are performed.
Select the checkbox to calculate the center-of-gravity and weight calculations that are set by Dry
Pipe Calculations, Wet Pipe Calculations, Show Insulation Weight, and Show Wet Weight.
To suppress all center-of-gravity and weight calculations, clear the checkbox.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.CentreOfGravity.Enabled
Dry Pipe Calculations

Controls which center-of-gravity calculations are performed for dry (empty) pipe. Calculated
values can then be output on the drawing using text positioning facilities, or output in a
Weight/CofG summary report.
Not Required - Center-of-gravity for dry pipe not required.
Calc C of G - Calculate center-of-gravity for dry pipe.
Calc C of G with Insulation - Calculate center-of-gravity for insulated dry pipe.
Calc C of G with and without Insulation - Calculate center-of-gravity for dry pipe and
insulated dry pipe.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.CentreOfGravity.ForDryPipe
Wet Pipe Calculations

Controls which center-of-gravity calculations are performed for wet (full) pipe. Calculated values
can then be output on the drawing using text positioning facilities or output in a Weight/CoG
summary report.
Not Required - Center-of-gravity for wet pipe not required.
Calc C of G - Calculate center-of-gravity for wet pipe.
Calc C of G with Insulation - Calculate center-of-gravity for insulated wet pipe.
Calc C of G with and without Insulation - Calculate center-of-gravity for wet pipe and
insulated wet pipe.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.CentreOfGravity.ForWetPipe
116

Per Pipeline
Controls whether the center-of-gravity and weight calculations are per pipeline or per
drawing/spool.
Select the checkbox to calculate center-of-gravity and weight per pipeline. To calculate
center-of-gravity and weight per drawing/spool, clear the checkbox.
Enabled must also be selected.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.CentreOfGravity.PerPipeline
Show Insulation Weight
Controls whether insulation weight is calculated. Insulation weight can then be output on the
drawing using text positioning facilities or output to a Weight/CofG summary report.
Select the checkbox to calculate insulation weight. To suppress the calculation of insulation
weight, clear the check box.
Show Wet Weight

Controls whether wet (full) weight is calculated. Wet weight can then be output on the drawing
using text positioning facilities or in a Weight/CofG summary report.
Select the checkbox to calculate wet weight. To suppress calculation of wet weight, clear the
checkbox.
Defines:
Option Switch - Supplementary.CentreOfGravity.ShowWetWeight
I-Configure - 82, Pos 2
Tolerances
Sets properties for controlling deviations (dimensional and angular), remainders from dimension
calculations, and tolerances.
Difference Limit
Controls how small dimensional deviations detected in the input pipeline data file are to be
interpreted and acted upon. These deviations can lead to small, unwanted skews being
generated on the isometric drawing. You can use Difference Limit to define a dimensional
cut-off value, whereby any offset coordinate numerically below this value is ignored by the
software.
Set to the required dimensional tolerance in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the
drawing units. For example, you can type 1.0 mm or 0.04 inch. When set to 0, no dimensional
offset tolerance is set.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.MinOffset
117

Angle Limit
Controls how the software interprets and acts on small angular deviations detected in the
pipeline input data. These deviations can lead to small, unwanted skews being generated on the
isometric. You can define an angular cut-off value with this property so that any skew that is
found to have an angular deviation below this value is ignored by the software and not treated
as a skew.
To specify a user-defined angle tolerance, type a value in the range 1-10, such as 0.5 for
0.5-degrees. Type 0 for no angular offset tolerance. This is the default setting.
Defines:
Option Switch - 115
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.MinAngleOffset
PCF Connection Tolerance

Controls the tolerance to be used when connecting components in IDFGEN.
Set a value in millimeters.
To avoid problems when this property is set as a single value, no tolerance is set in
Option Switch 116, Positions 4-7. IDFGEN continues to use positions 1-3 to determine the
connection tolerance.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.IdfgenConnectionTolerance
Add Round Off

Controls the Dimension Round-Off Carry-Over function, which is used to control how remainders
are handled when dimensions are calculated and output on the isometric. At branch locations or
components, this permits the remainder part of a dimension either to be carried over and added
to the next dimension, or discarded.
Normal - Round off dimensions to + or - 1 mm, or 1/16th-inch, and carries over any
reminder to the next dimension.
Branch Intersect - Round off dimensions to + or - 1 mm or 1/16th-inch with no carry-over of

the remainder beyond a branch intersection.
Current Component - Round off dimensions to + or - 1 mm or 1/16th-inch with no

carry-over of the remainder beyond current component.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.AddRoundOff
118
Diagnostics
Sets properties related to the type and level of information output in diagnostic type messages.
Diagnostic Level
Controls the amount of information written to the message file.
Low - Write ISOGEN program version and plot file generation messages to the message
file.
Medium - Write plot and module run messages to the message file.
High - Write plot, module run, and ISOPLOT messages to the message file.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.DiagnosticLevel
Set Pipeline Disconnected

Specifies an IDFGEN-generated diagnostic. Select the checkbox to set the pipeline to
disconnected when an increased tolerance is used to connect the pipeline.
A message is always output if the pipeline does not connect using increased tolerance.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.SetPipeLineDisconnected
Show Disconnection Message

Specifies an IDFGEN-generated diagnostic and controls output of disconnection messages on
the isometric drawing. Select the checkbox to output a message at locations where an increased
tolerance is used to connect pipelines.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.DisconnectionMessage
Version Information
Controls plotting ISOGEN version information, along with the run date and generation time of
the isometric. The information is plotted on two banners, one with the ISOGEN version
information and the other with the run date and generation time. Both banners are plotted on a
single line at the bottom left corner of the drawing frame.
Select the checkbox to plot the banner.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.ShowISOGENVer
119

Test Only
Allows test isometrics to be produced for proving isometric output or to resolve drawing
production issues.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TestIso
Dates
Controls the output of the date on the drawing and in drawing-related files.
Date Format
Controls the format of the date that is to be output on the isometric and in summary files.
None - Display no date.
British - Display the date in British format (dd/mm/yy)
European - Display the date in European format (dd/mm/yy).
American - Display the date in American format (mm/dd/yy).
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.DateFormat
Date Source
Controls the date source.
Data File - Use the date contained in the pipeline data file.
System - Use the system clock date.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.DateSource
Four Digit Year

Controls whether the year portion of the date is output as two or four digits.
Select the checkbox to output a four-digit year, such as 2009. To output a two-digit year, such
as 09, clear the checkbox.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.FourDigitYear
120
Centreline Lengths
Calculation Method
Controls how ISOGEN determines the length of bends and elbows.
Calculate the distance around curve of Bends/Elbows - Calculate the centerline length
using the distance around the radius.
Calculate the distance to intersection of Bends/Elbows - Calculate the centerline length

using the distance from the end point to the intersection point.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.CentrelineLengths
Actions
Controls the behavior of PCFGEN and IDFGEN.
Compute Nozzle Axis

Controls whether the direction of the nozzle axes are calculated and inserted into the piping
component file (PCF) when using the PCFGEN application.
Select the checkbox to calculate nozzles axis direction and insert the data into the PCF. To
perform no calculation of nozzle axis direction, clear the checkbox
This property is not used in the current version of the software.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.ComputeNozzleAxis
If No Item Code
Controls IDFGEN's output of components present in the PCF that have no item code specified.
Default - Set components with no item code to Not On Material List.
Generate Blank Item Code - Assign a blank item code and description and output to the
material list.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.ComponentsWithNoItemCodesInPCF
121
Drawing File
Organizes a collection of properties that define the backing sheet, such as the paper size,
margins, template file location, and folder location of the output file.
Topics
Sheet Size...................................................................................... 122
Drawing Area Size ......................................................................... 123
Template File ................................................................................. 124
Output File ..................................................................................... 125
Sheet Size
Sets standard and non-standard paper sizes.
Size
Specifies a standard paper size for the isometric drawing. You can only modify this setting using
ISOGEN Configuration. Supported sizes are listed below:
Custom
European Sizes:
A0 - 841 x 1189 mm
A1 - 594 x 841 mm
A2 - 420 x 594 mm
A3 - 297 x 420 mm
A4 - 210 x 297 mm
ANSI Sizes:
A - 8.5" x 11"
B - 11" x 17"
C - 17" x 22"
D - 22" x 34"
E - 34" x 44"
If Size is set to Custom, then you must also set Custom Height and Custom Width.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.DrawingSize
122

Custom Height
Sets the height of a non-standard paper size. You must use Custom Height and Custom
Width together. Set both properties to zero or to a suitable value.
For PostScript output, set the paper size using Size
Defines:
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.CustomHeight
Custom Width
Sets the width of a non-standard paper size. You must use Custom Height and Custom Width
together. Set both properties to zero or to a suitable value.
Defines:
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.CustomWidth
Drawing Area Size

Left Margin
Specifies the distance between the outer edge of the drawing sheet and the outer line of the
drawing frame on the left side of the drawing.
Type 0 for no reserved area, or type the required distance.
Defines:
Option Switch - 10
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.LeftMargin
Top Margin
drawing frame at the top of the drawing.
Defines:
Option Switch - 12
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.RightMargin
Right Margin
drawing frame on the right side of the drawing.
Defines:
Option Switch - 11
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.RightMargin
123

Bottom Margin
drawing frame at the bottom of the drawing.
Defines:
Option Switch - 13
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.BottomMargin
Reserved Area Drawing

Specifies the distance between the bottom of the drawing area and the outer line of the drawing
frame.
Defines:
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.ReservedAreaDrawing
Reserved Area Top

Specifies the reserved area along the top of the isometric drawing.
Defines:
I-Configure -
Reserved Area Mat List

Specifies the distance between the bottom of the material list and the outer line of the drawing
frame.
Defines:
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.ReservedAreaMatList
124
Template File
Defines settings for the template file used as the backing sheet.
Format
Specifies the drawing format for the backing sheet. Select one of the following formats:
AutoCAD DXF (DXF), MicroStation (DGN), Smart DWG (DWG), Smart DGN (DGN),
SmartSketch (IGR), Shape2d (SHA), or None.
Defines:
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.TemplateFormat
Path
Specifies the template file that contains the backing sheet. Type the full path location and
filename of the required file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.TemplateFile
DXF Units
Specifies the units for DXF output. Select metric units (mm) or imperial units (inch).
Defines:
Option Switch - 92
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.DXFUnits
125
Output File
Path
Specifies the folder into which drawings are written. You can only modify this setting using
ISOGEN Configuration. Type the full path location for the required folder. Alternatively, click
Browse
and navigate to the required file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.PlotFilePath
Overwrite
Overwrites and deletes any plot files existing with the same name.
Select the checkbox to allocate the plot file name using the selected sequence method after
deleting previously generated files. To allocate the next available plot file and generate the
name using the selected sequence method, clear the checkbox.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.OverwritePlotFile
Append Standard Extension

Adds the file format extension to the name of the backing sheet.
Select the checkbox to append the plot file output format extension to the I01 type file name
extension on all generated plot files that do not use a user-specified plot file prefix. If you select
Append Standard Extension, you must also select Use I01 Style.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.AppendStandardExts
Use I01 Style

Controls the use of I01 type extensions.
Select the checkbox to use I01 type filename extensions on all plot files generated that do not
use a user defined plot file prefix. To use normal filename extensions, clear the checkbox.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.UseI01TypeExts
126

Drawings Per File
Controls how and where isometric drawings are output.
All on same sheet - Output isometric drawings generated during a run to a single plot file or
to a series of plot files, depending upon the File Length setting
One per file - Generate an individual plot file for each isometric drawing.
One per sheet - Plot each isometric drawing on a separate sheet within a single plot file per
pipeline or per system.
All in same file - Plot each isometric drawing on a separate sheet within a single plot file
regardless of the number of individual pipelines in the input file.
The One per sheet and All in the same file settings are valid only for SmartSketch (.igr)
and Shape 2D (.sha) file formats.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.DrawingsPerFile
Page Length
Controls the number of lines per page on any printed output (reports) generated by the ISOGEN
system.
Type the required number of lines to be output per page, or type 0 to use the default value of 55
lines per page.
Defines:
Option Switch - 63
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.PrintedOutputPageLen
Postscript Size
Specifies the Postscript plotter size.
Select one of the European or ANSI sizes listed below:
European Sizes:
A0 - 841 x 1189 mm
A1 - 594 x 841 mm
A2 - 420 x 594 mm
A3 - 297 x 420 mm
A4 - 210 x 297mm
127

ANSI Sizes
A - 8.5" x 11"
B - 11" x 17"
C - 17" x 22"
D - 22" x 34"
E - 34" x 44"
File Length
Controls the physical length of the plot file that is generated by ISOGEN. Setting File Length is
required only when Drawings Per File is set to One per file, and the required plot file length is
different than the default value of 3275mm.
Type the required value for the plot file length in millimeters. The maximum length is limited to
3350mm. To use the default value (3275mm) for the plot file length, type 0.
Defines:
Option Switch - 1
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.PlotFileLength
128
Pre and Post Processor

Controls how pre- and post-processor applications run and interact with Personal ISOGEN
Topics
Settings .......................................................................................... 129
Settings
Sets properties that control how pre- and post-processor applications run and interact with
Personal ISOGEN.
Pre-Processor
Specifies the pre-processor application to run before Personal ISOGEN. Type the full path
location and filename of the required file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.AuxiliaryPrograms.StartProgram
Pre-processor Timeout
Defines the number of seconds that elapse before the pre-processor application specified by the
Pre-processor setting is terminated and ISOGEN begins processing.
Type the required value (integer). The default time is 60 seconds.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.AuxiliaryPrograms.StartTimeout
POD-processor
Specifies an external application to run before ISOGEN's output is translated to the final drawing
output. Specifying the external application allows you to complete some minor editing of the
drawing output.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.AuxiliaryPrograms.PodGraphicsProgram
POD-processor Timeout
Specifies the number of seconds that elapse before the external application specified by the
POD-Processor setting is terminated and ISOGEN begins processing.
Type the required value (integer). The default time is 60 seconds.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.AuxiliaryPrograms.PodGraphicsTimeout
129

Post-processor
Specifies a post-processor application to run after Personal ISOGEN finishes processing. Type
the full path location and filename of the required file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.AuxiliaryPrograms.EndProgram
Stop on Error
Controls whether Personal ISOGEN runs if the pre-processor application experiences an error
and fails.
Select the checkbox to suppress running Personal ISOGEN if the pre-processor application
fails. To run Personal ISOGEN even if the pre-processor application fails, clear the checkbox.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.AuxiliaryPrograms.StopOnError
130
Input Files
Organizes a collection of properties that define the names and locations of the input data files
ISOGEN uses. Includes properties for setting the
PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION section of the Data Definition (DDF) file, heat
treatment, and NDE testing data.
Topics
Summary........................................................................................ 131
Pipeline Attributes .......................................................................... 132
Heat Treatment .............................................................................. 133
Summary
Lists the names and locations of the input data files ISOGEN uses. For example, ISOGEN can
calculate weights of components if a data file containing weight information is available. You can
also edit the contents of the input file.
Input Files
Controls which input files ISOGEN uses. Data is entered using a grid. To open the grid, click
Show .
Path - Defines the full path location and file name of the input file. Click Browse
navigate to the required file.
Content - Opens a free-form text box in which you can edit the contents of the text file. Click
Browse
to open the text editor. Edit the data as needed, and then click File > Update to
save your changes.
to
To close the text editor without saving your changes, click File > Cancel.
Type - Specifies the type of input file. Available file types are listed below:
File Type
Description
ASCII-SYMBOLS
ASCII version of the ISOGEN symbol file.
BENDING-DATABASE-FILE
Bending, cutting and hole information file.
BINARY-SYMBOLS
Binary version of the ISOGEN symbol file.
BOLT-INFORMATION-FILE
Bolting information file.
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE
Contains detailed information related to individual

components.
FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE
Defines the content and structure of other files

that form part of the Component Information
facilities.
131

File Type
Description
INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE
Contains weights of insulation on a bore / unit

length basis for each Insulation specification.
PROJECT-MATERIAL-DATA
System specified.
PROJECT-MATERIAL-MANAGER
System specified.
PROJECT-PIPELINE
System specified.
REMARKS
Remarks data file.
OPTION-SWITCH-LONG
DRAWING-DEFINITION
POSITIONED-TEXT
ALTERNATIVE-TEXT
User alternative control files.
MATERIAL-LIST-DEFINITION
WELDING-DEFINITION
TITLE-BLOCK
SPECIAL-INSTRUMENTS
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY
132
Contains the specific gravity values for pipeline

fluid or gas contents.
For more information about ISOGEN file types, see Appendix: ISOGEN Files (on page 519).
The value that displays on the Input Files icon is a count of how many data files have been
defined. The example below indicates the three data files are currently defined.
Click Hide
to close the grid.
Pipeline Attributes
Sets options in the PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION section of the Data
Definition (DDF) file.
Enabled
Controls whether the pipeline attributes file is created. Select the checkbox to create the file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.PipeLineAtts.Enabled
Path
Specifies the full path location and filename for the pipeline attributes file. Type the full path
location and filename of the file. Alternatively, click Browse
and navigate to the file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.PipeLineAtts.Path
Text
Defines the data required for the PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION.
Click Show
to open a free-form text box. Type the data in the text box, and then click
. The software updates the style displays the text under the Text property label.
The data that you enter is written to the DDF when Enabled is selected.
Click Hide
to close the text box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.PipeLineAtts.Text
Heat Treatment
Sets options for heat treatment and NDE testing data.
Enabled
Controls the creation of the heat treatment/NDE file. To create the file, select the checkbox.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.HeatTreatment.Enabled
133

Path
Specifies the name and location of the heat treatment/NDE file. Type the full path location and
filename of the file. Alternatively, click Browse
and navigate to the file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.HeatTreatment.Path
Text
Defines the data required for heat treatment/NDE testing.
Click Show
. The software displays the text under the Text property label.
The data that you type data written to the DDF when Enabled is selected.
Click Hide
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.HeatTreatment.Text
134
Style Properties
Defines the path location and export behavior of the active style.
Topics
Properties....................................................................................... 135
Properties
Defines the path location and export behavior of the active style.
Name
Displays the name of the active isometric drawing style.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - .Name
Options
Supplements the properties delivered with the software to include properties specific to Smart
>3D.
Click Show
. The software displays the text under the Options property label.
Click Hide
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - .Options
Style Type
Indicates whether the isometric drawing style is a system style, such as the special purpose
SGImport style (used by SmartPlant Spoolgen) or a general purpose user style. The property is
read-only and has no effect on the behavior of the 2D piping solutions or 3D plant design
software.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - .StyleType
Path
Displays the file path to the <Drawing Style Name> folder. The Options (.opl) file and the Data
Definition (.ddf) files are located in the <Drawing Style Name> folder.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - .Path
135

Export Behavior
Controls the behavior of the File > Export command in I-Configure. For more information, see
Export Isometric Drawing Style Settings in the I-Configure User's Guide.
Always Export - Export the isometric drawing style property to the ISOGEN control files.
Export if Pending - Export the isometric drawing style property only if Style State is
defined as Export Pending or Export and Save Pending.
Never Export - Suppress export of the isometric drawing style property.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - .ExportBehavior
136
Reports
Controls the format and content of the report files generated by ISOGEN. There are many
different reports that ISOGEN can output when generating an isometric drawing. Some of the
most common ISOGEN reports are the material control file, the cut list summary file, the spool
information file, and the weld summary file.
You configure output reports using the Report Definition panel. The report options that are
shown in this panel depend on the report type that you are defining. All report types require that
you specify an output location for the report file, and many report types display a preview of the
report contents. However, some reports also provide options for defining the report layout,
including which attributes are output (2) and whether the title block (3) and column headers (4)
display. As you define the layout for these report types, a preview of the report displays at the
bottom of the window. As you modify the layout, the preview updates dynamically (5).
Topics
Report Types ................................................................................. 138
File Formatting ............................................................................... 139
Output Rules .................................................................................. 147
POD Attributes ............................................................................... 150
Pipeline Attributes .......................................................................... 150
Component Attributes .................................................................... 152
Material Attributes .......................................................................... 158
Weld Attributes .............................................................................. 159
Spool Attributes ............................................................................. 160
Miscellaneous Attributes ................................................................ 160
Alternative Texts ............................................................................ 164
137
Report Types
Lists the reports that ISOGEN can output during isometric drawing generation process.
To select a report, double-click the report name. Alternatively, click Add Attribute
. The
Report Definition window opens and displays the options listed below so that you can
configure the report as needed. For detailed information about configuring reports, see Specify
the report output location (on page 54) and Define the report layout (on page 59).
Report Definition Panel Options

The options listed below are not available for all report types. For example, some
reports allow you to only define the output location. Other reports allow you to specify attribute
data and define the layout.
Report Location - Specifies the output location of the report. Type the full path and filename of
the report. Alternatively, click Browse
option is mandatory.
, and navigate to the output location. Setting this
Include Title Block - Controls the output of a report title. To include a title, select the checkbox.
Title Block - Specifies the report title output by ISOGEN. Type the title of the report in the text
box. Use the SPACEBAR and ENTER keys to insert spaces and blank lines. This option
displays only if Include Title Block is selected.
Include Column Headers - Controls the output of column headers. To include headers, select
the checkbox.
Column Headers - Specifies the display name for each column of attribute data that is output in
the report. This option displays only if Include Column Headers is selected.
In the text box, type the display name for each column that you have selected for output. Use
the SPACEBAR to insert empty spaces between each display name. To insert a blank row so
that you can type another line of text, press ENTER. The display in the Preview pane updates
as you enter text. The example below shows the relationship between the content of the
Column Headers box (1) and the content in the Preview pane (2).
138

Report Layout - Displays the attributes selected for the active report. Each attribute translates
to a column of data in the report. For each attribute, you can define the data listed below:
Comments - Opens a text box so that you can type a text comment for any
definition contained in the previous column. If any text is entered in this field, the text is
output as a comment--preceded by a !--to the relevant data or summary report file.
Start - Specifies the starting point for the column.
Maximum Characters - Defines the maximum number of characters allowed in the

column.
Justification - Defines the justification of the text within the column. Select Left, Right,
or Numeric.
Enabled - Controls the display of data in the report file for the component group defined
by the Group setting. Select the checkbox to display component data for the specified
group. This option displays only for the neutral report.
Group - Specifies the component group output in the current report file record. Select a
component group in the list. This option displays only for the neutral report.
To add an attribute to the report layout, open an options group and double-click the
attribute name. For more information, see Define the report layout (on page 59).
Preview - Displays a preview of the report content based on the current report definition
parameters. When you first begin defining a report, a Preview (file not found) ! error message
displays until you specify the output location in the Report Location box.
Automatic Refresh - Controls whether the software automatically updates the report
Preview. By default, this command is active. When the command is turned off, you must use
Refresh to manually update the isometric drawing preview.
Refresh - Updates the view of the report to display any changes to the layout that you have
made since the last refresh action.
139
File Formatting
Provides a collection of properties that define the report file format. File formatting properties
that are available for each report type are listed under Common Properties. Report-specific
properties are listed under the respective report type heading.
Common File Format Properties

Format - Defines whether the report file is a fixed format or delimited. Select Fixed or
Delimited.
Delimiter - Defines the character used as a delimiter when the file format is delimited.
Acceptable characters are listed below:
Blank
Comma ( , )
Semi-colon ( ; )
Colon ( : )
Bending File
Report Creation - Defines whether the file is opened in appended mode or overwrite mode.
Append to report - Append the file.
Overwrite report - Overwrite the file.
Content - Determines the information included in the bending report.
Standard - Include pipe fabrication information, including details of each cut piece. List
the length, diameter, end preparation, material part number, and other related details to
assist manufacturing. Also output angle and radius details, and give distances to and
between bends.
Full - Include the same pipe fabrication information as with Standard and also include
details to enable profiling the shaped ends of pipe and cutting holes for tees, olets, and
crosses.
Cut list
User Defined - Specifies whether the software uses the user-specified properties to control the
data that is output to the cut list summary file or uses the standard cut list file. Select the
checkbox to use the user-specifies properties. To create a standard cut list summary file, clear
the checkbox.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.SummaryFile.UserDefined
140

Material control
User Defined - Specifies whether the software creates a standard material control file or uses
the user-specified properties to control the data that is output to file. Select the checkbox to
create the material file using the user-defined properties. To create a standard material control
file, clear the checkbox.
You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the MLD file.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.SummaryFile.UserDefined
Individual Entries - Controls whether individual entries are output to the material control file
when material accumulation is used on the material list. This allows components with different
attributes to be listed correctly but avoids non-accumulation of materials that can often create
overflow drawings. Select the checkbox to output individual entries to the material control file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.SummaryFile.IndividualEntries
Include Bolts - Specifies whether bolts are included in the summary file. Select the checkbox to
include bolts in the material control file. This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.SummaryFile.IncludeBolts
Header Output - Controls the output of material headings.
Pipeline - Output headings for each pipeline.
Drawing - Output headings for each drawing.
Single - Output a single output of the headings.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.SummaryFile.MaterialHeadings
141

Unique Delimiter - Defines the character used as a delimiter when the file format is delimited.
Acceptable characters are listed below:
Blank
Comma ( , )
Semi-colon ( ; )
Colon ( : )
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.SummaryFile.UniqueDelimiter
Neutral report
Output Cut Pieces - Controls whether output components are grouped by cut piece. Select the
checkbox to output components to the report file by cut piece. This is the default setting. To
suppress this grouping so that each component has its own entry in the report file, clear the
checkbox.
An example is the component grouping Pipe-Pulled Bend-Pipe. Because these three
components form a single cut piece, only one entry is written to the Neutral report file if Output
Cut Pieces is selected. If Output Cut Pieces is not selected, three entries are written to the
report file: one for each component.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.OutputCutPieces
Group By - Specifies how components are grouped in the Neutral report file.
Pipeline - Group component output on a per pipeline basis.
Sheet - Group component output on a per sheet basis.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.GroupBy
Record Length - Defines the length of each record. This property is available only when
Format is set to Fixed.
Type a number in range 1-9999 that specifies the number of characters to pad or truncate. If you
type 0, trailing white space is trimmed from each record.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.RecordLength
142

Count - Displays the number of attributes to be output in the printed material list summary file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.PrintedMaterialList.Count
Repeatability return
Reorder Bypass - Controls by-pass component re-ordering. Select the checkbox to re-order
components at by-pass closure points.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.RepeatFile.ByPass
Component Information - Controls if and how component information is written to the
repeatability return file.
Off - Suppress writing component information to the repeatability return file.
With Numeric - Write numeric component information to the file
With Alphabetic - Write full alphanumeric component information to the file (4 character
maximum).
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.RepeatFile.ComponentInfo
Content - Controls the type of repeatability return file output.
Standard - Output only of only successfully processed pipelines. This is the default
setting for a standard repeatability return file type (FOR052).
Original - Output the original repeat information.
Revised - Output the original repeat information and new records for spool information.
Original ASCII - Output an ASCII version of the original repeat information.
Revised ASCII - Output an ASCII version of the original repeat information.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.RepeatFile.Content
Part Numbers - Controls whether material list part number information is written to the
repeatability return file. Select the checkbox to write material list part number information to the
repeatability return file.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.RepeatFile.MatList
143

Split Points - Controls whether split points are written to the repeatability return file. Select the
checkbox to write split point information.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.RepeatFile.SplitPoints
Spool Identifier - Controls whether spool identifier information is written to the repeatability
return file.
Off - Suppress writing any spool identifier information to the file.
Numeric - Write spool identifier to the file.
Alphabetic - Write full alphanumeric spool identifier information to the file (4 character
maximum).
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementarty.RepeatFile.SpoolID
Start Point - Controls whether the start point for data extraction is written to the repeatability
return file. Select the checkbox to write the data extraction start point.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.RepeatFile.StartPoint
Weld Numbers - Controls whether weld number information is written to the repeatability return
file. Select the checkbox to write the information to the file.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.RepeatFile.WeldNos
Site assembly
Spool information
144

Traceability
Unique Part Number - Controls whether unique part numbers are used. Also defines the type
of suffix used for unique part numbers.
Alpha - Use an alphabetic suffix.
Numeric - Use a numeric suffix.
Off - Turn off all unique part number facilities.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.UniquePartNumber
Part Number Suffix - Controls sequencing of the identifier suffix used for part numbering on the
isometric drawing.
Continuous - Generate unique part number suffixes as a continuous sequence across

all output drawings. For example, 6.1 to 6.6 on Drg 1 of 2 and 6.7 to 6.11 on Drg 2 of 2.
Per Drawing - Generate part number suffixes with a new sequence for each drawing.
For example, 6.1 to 6.6 on Drg 1 of 2 and 6.1 to 6.5 on Drg 2 of 2.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.IdentifierSuffix
Show - Controls whether the unique part numbers table is plotted. To plot the table, select the
checkbox.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.PlotUniquePtNoTable
Continuous Down - Controls the direction of the unique part numbers table. Select the
checkbox to set the table direction so that it is down. To set the table direction so it is down,
clear the checkbox.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.ContinuousDown
Start X - Defines the starting X position of the list in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.StartX
Start Y - Defines the starting Y position of the list in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.StartY
145

Vertical Spacing - Sets the vertical spacing between each horizontal line in millimeters or
inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.VerticalSpacing
Text Height - Sets the text height to be used. Type a value (real number) in millimeters or
inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.TextHeight
Maximum Entries - Controls the maximum number of entries before an overflow drawing is
created if you have selected the Overflow checkbox.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.MaxEntries
Overflow - Controls whether an overflow drawing is created when the Maximum Entries setting
is exceeded. Select the checkbox to create an overflow drawing.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.TableOverflow
Layer - Sets the drawing layer for the unique part number table. Type the required value in the
range 1-50.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.DrawingLayer
Unique Bolt Numbers - Controls the output of unique part numbers on bolts.
Yes - Output unique part numbers on bolts.
No - Suppress the output.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.UniqueNosBolts
Unique Gasket Numbers - Controls output of unique part numbers on gaskets.
Yes - Output unique part numbers on gaskets.
No - Suppress the output.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.UniqueNosGaskets
146

Weight / Centre of gravity summary
Weld summary
Output Rules
Controls what is output to the Neutral report file.
Output Rules only displays in the Reports panel when the Neutral report tab is active in
the Report Definition panel.
Default
Controls the output of components in the report file.
Include - Output all components to the report file. This is the default setting.
Exclude - Suppress the output of all components.
This property implies all components. However, you can use the individual component type
setting to override Default. The table below illustrates the relationship between the Default
setting and the settings of the individual component types.
Property
Setting
Report File Output
Default
Include
Output all components
Default
Bolts
Include
Exclude
Output all components except bolts.
Default
Flanges
Exclude
Include
Suppress output of all components except

flanges.
Penetration plates and pseudo-components, such as set-on tees and taps, are not output to
the Neutral report file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.Default
147

Bolts
Controls the output of bolt components in the report file.
Include - Output bolt components to the report file. This is the default setting.
Exclude - Suppress the output of bolt components.
Inherit - Use the setting defined in Default.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.Bolts
Fittings
Controls the output of fitting in the report file.
Include - Output fittings to the report file. This is the default setting.
Exclude - Suppress the output of fittings.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.Fittings
Flanges
Controls the output of flange components in the report file.
Include - Output flange components to the report file. This is the default setting.
Exclude - Suppress the output of flange components.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.Flange
Gaskets
Controls the output of gasket components in the report file.
Include - Output gasket components to the report file. This is the default setting.
Exclude - Suppress the output of gasket components.
Defines:
Option Switch -N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.Gasket
148

Instruments
Controls the output of instrument components in the report file.
Include - Output instrument components to the report file. This is the default setting.
Exclude - Suppress the output of instrument components.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.Instrument
Miscellaneous
Controls the output of miscellaneous components in the report file.
Include - Output miscellaneous components to the report file. This is the default setting.
Exclude - Suppress the output of miscellaneous components.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.Miscellaneous
Pipe
Controls the output of pipe components in the report file.
Include - Output pipe components to the report file. This is the default setting.
Exclude - Suppress the output of pipe components.
Defines:
Option Switch -N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.Pipe
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.
Supports
Controls the output of support components in the report file.
Include - Output support components to the report file. This is the default setting.
Exclude - Suppress the output of support components.
Defines:
Option Switch -N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.Support
149

Valves
Controls the output of valve components in the report file.
Include - Output valve components to the report file. This is the default setting.
Exclude - Suppress the output of valve components.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.Valve
Welds
Controls the output of weld components in the report file.
Include - Output weld components to the report file. This is the default setting.
Exclude - Suppress the output of weld components.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.We;d
POD Attributes
Lists the attributes available for piping object data (POD) files. To add an attribute to a report,
double-click its name in the list, or click Add Attribute
. Use the options in the Report
Definition panel to define the attribute for the Neutral file report. For more information, see
Define the report layout (on page 59).
POD Attributes only displays in the Reports panel when the Neutral report tab is active
in the Report Definition panel.
150
Attribute Name
Description
Name
Name of the piping object data (POD) file.
North Arrow
Direction on the drawing that represents North defined as top

left, top right, bottom left, or bottom right.
Primary Spec
Primary specification for the POD file.
System Isometric Reference
Name of the drawing generated from a system POD.
Pipeline Attributes
Lists the attributes available for the pipeline.
Double-click an attribute name to add it to the Report Layout area. Alternatively, click Add
Attribute
. Then use the options in the Report Definition panel to configure the report as
needed. For more information, see Define the report layout (on page 59).
Not all of the pipeline attributes listed in the table below are permissible for all
report types. As such, the report that is currently active in the Report Definition panel
determines which pipeline attributes appear in the attributes list.
To make a report active, select the report type tab in the Report Definition panel.
Attribute Name
Description
-7
Record identifier for spool prefix/number.
ATTRIBUTE0 to
ATTRIBUTE199
User-specified general purpose pipeline attribute that can be output in reports

or plotted on drawings. Up to 200 attributes can be defined and can be used
for any purpose.
BATCH
Section of the plant or project.
Batch/Area
Section of the plant or project. Batch and Area can be used interchangeably.
CLIENT-DRAWING-IDENTIFIER
User-specified string used to identify/track/control each individual drawing

without using the usual pipeline reference or sheet number identification.
Typically, this attribute is output on spool isometric drawings.
Date
Date associated with the pipeline.
DRG
Sheet number of the isometric drawing.
Insulation Spec
Default insulation specification.
Jacket Spec
Default piping specification for the components in the pipeline that form part of
the jacket.
Misc Spec1 to
Misc Spec5
User-specified specification references that can hold additional, arbitrary data.

Up to 5 miscellaneous specification references can be defined.
Name
User-specified identifier for the pipeline.
Nominal Class
Pipeline design class.
Nominal Rating
Pressure rating of the pipeline.
Painting Spec
Default painting specification.
Pipe Spec
Primary specification to which the pipeline belongs.
Pipeline Reference
Line reference or ID of the pipeline.
Pipeline Temp
Pipeline operating temperature.
151
152
Pipeline Type
Type of pipeline construction.
PIPELINE-DRAWINGSEQUENCE
User-specified text string used to identify/track/control each individual drawing

without using the pipeline reference.
Project Identifier
Project number or name.
Revision
Revision identifier for the pipeline.
Specific Gravity
Specific gravity of the pipeline contents.
Spool Naming Rule
Text string that specifies the spool prefix, type of identifier (alpha or numeric),
and the length of the spool identifier.
Spool Prefix
String used when creating spool identifiers.
Support Weld Prefix (Erect)
Prefix used to identify erection pipe support welds.
Support Weld Prefix (Fab)
Prefix used to identify fabrication pipe support welds.
Support Weld Prefix (Offs)
Prefix used to identify offshore pipe support welds.
Tracing Spec
Default tracing specification reference.
Weld Prefix (Erec)
Prefix used to identify all erection welds.
Weld Prefix (Fab)
Prefix used to identify all fabrication welds.
Weld Prefix (General)
String that ISOGEN uses to override the default weld number prefix for the
pipeline.
Weld Prefix (Offs)
Prefix used to identify all offshore welds.
Component Attributes
Lists the attributes available to all components.
Attribute
Not all of the component attributes listed below are permissible for all report types.
As such, the report that is currently active in the Report Definition panel determines which
component attributes appear in the attributes list.
Attribute Name
Description
Angle
Value of the angle in hundredths of degrees for elbow, bend, tee, cross,
bend-teed, and elbow-teed type components.
Assembly ID
Bolt assembly identifier.
Auto Generated
Indicator for whether the software automatically assigns and creates bolt sets.
Bend Radius
Allowable radius of a standard pulled bend.
Bend Radius Multiplier
NPD multiplier used to define the bend radius.
Bolt Diameter
Units of dimensions (in or mm) used for bolt diameter.
Bolt Item Code
Unique identifier for the bolt component.
Bolt Item Descriptions
Material description for bolts with the same item code.
Bolt Length
Units of dimensions (in or mm) used for bolt length.
BOP Elevation
Bottom of pipe elevation. Overrides the standard elevation output for tees,
crosses, and elbows.
Characteristic Bore
Commonly written description of the bore, such as 25x25mm.
COMPONENT Attribute 1 to
COMPONENT Attribute 100
User-specified component attribute. Up to 100 attributes can be defined and

can be used for any purpose.
Associates a text remark with a component. The remark information appears
on the material list in two areas:
Component Remark Number
A cross-reference number against the component.

In list of remarks output at the bottom of the material list with a cross-reference
against each remark.
Coordinate X
X coordinate.
Coordinate Y
Y coordinate.
Coordinate Z
Z coordinate.
Coords On
Internal piping object data (POD) file field.
153
154
Attribute Name
Description
Cost Factor
Explicitly defined value used by ISOGEN to calculate weld diameter totals.
Cut Piece Length
Value for the required cut piece length of the pipe or bend. Overrides
ISOGEN's normal cut piece length calculation.
Dial Face Direction
Direction of face on instrument dials and balloons.
Equipment Centre Point X
Coordinate at the X position related to the center or intersection of the

component.
Equipment Centre Point Y
Coordinate at the Y position related to the center or intersection of the

component.
Equipment Centre Point Z
Coordinate at the Z position related to the center or intersection of the

component.
Equipment Non Primary

Orientation
Direction of the equipment.
Equipment Shape
Shape of the equipment to be output.
Equipment Shape 2
Shape to be plotted at the exit end of a piece of equipment.
Equipment Size X
Size of the rectangular-shaped equipment (cross-section at the X position).
Equipment Size Y
Size of the rectangular-shaped equipment (cross-section at the Y position).
Equipment Size Z
Size of the rectangular-shaped equipment (cross-section at the Z position).
External UCI
System-generated unique component identifier.
Flange Left Loose
Trigger that indicates the flange is to be left loose for fitting at site.
FlangeCutMinus
Negative cutting allowance for flange types with SKEYs such as FLRC, FLRE,
FLSO, and FOSO. Allowance is used when calculating cut pipe length.
FlangeCutPlus
Positive cutting allowance for flange types with SKEYs such as FLFL or FLSJ.
Allowance is used when calculating cut pipe length.
Flat Direction
Direction of flat side of eccentric reducer.
FlyText
Concise summary of the properties for the currently select object.
Gasket Class
Design class for special transition gasket used on fixed length type line pipe.
Gasket Rating
Pressure rating for special transition gasket used on fixed length type line pipe.
Gearbox
Gearbox orientation direction.
Ignored Tube
Indicator for whether the pipe is ignored. That is, the component is neither
considered in the computation of system dimensions nor is it displayed on the
isometric drawing.
Insulation
Trigger that indicates the component is or is not insulated.

Attribute Name
Description
Insulation Spec
Insulation specification. Indicates a specification change on the plotted

isometric.
Item Code
Unique material identifier for the component.
Item Code Description
Material description for components with the same item code.
Item Group
Component group.
Length
Leg length.
Jacket
Indicator for whether the component is part of a jacketed system.
Jacket Spec
Jacket specification reference.
Material List
Indicator for how the pipe or component is handled on the material list on the
generated drawing (include or exclude).
Misc Spec1 to
Misc Spec5
Alternative user-defined specification. Indicates a specification change on the

plotted isometric.
Name or Tag
User-defined identifier for a component.
Nozzle Coordinates X
Coordinate at the X position of the nozzle.
Nozzle Coordinates Y
Coordinate at the Y position of the nozzle.
Nozzle Coordinates Z
Coordinate at the Z position of the nozzle.
Nozzle Diameter
Units of dimensions used for the nozzle.
Nozzle Direction
Direction of the nozzle.
Nozzle End Prep
End preparation for the nozzle.
Nozzle Non Primary Direction
Direction of the nozzle.
Nozzle Position
Relative position of the nozzle in relation to the equipment.
Orifice Tap Direction
Direction of tapping connection on orifice plate.
Painting Spec
Painting specification reference. Indicates a specification change on the plotted

isometric.
Part Number
Alternative part number used by ISOGEN instead of its automatically generated

one.
Pipe Spec
Primary specification to which the component belongs.
Plant
String that identifies a specific area of the plant.
Plant Area
Plant Area identification number.
155
156
Attribute Name
Description
Plate Direction
Orientation of the penetration plate.
Plate Thickness
Thickness of the penetration plate.
Port Reference 1 to
Port Reference 10
Port reference number for a multi-port component.
Quantity
Number of items to be associated.
Revision
Pipeline revision at which the component was introduced.
Rotation Angle
Angle of rotation in degrees clockwise.
Sequence Number
Internal POD field.
SHEET
Sheet number.
Size1
Size of the main pipe.
Size1 Units
Units of dimension for the size of the main pipe.
Size2
Size of the branch pipe.
Size2 Units
Units of dimension for the size of the branch pipe.
Size3
Size of the tertiary bore.
Size3 Units
Units of dimension for the tertiary bore.
Slip Plate Tail Direction
Direction of tail on slip plate, slip ring, or spectacle blind.
Spindle Direction
Direction of spindle (operator) on a valve.
Status
Trigger to indicate that a component is part of a special status, such as ON

HOLD or EXISTING, section on a pipeline.
Support Direction
Direction of user-defined support symbol.
Suppress Item Code
Indicator for whether the component displays in the material list.
Tap Point
Internal POD field.
Thickness/Rating
Attribute in the welding definition file (WDF) to extract the data value from the
THICKNESS-RATING attribute on a WELD record.
Tracing
Trigger that indicates whether a component is traced.
Tracing Spec
Alternative tracing specification. Indicates a specification change on the plotted

isometric.
UCI
Unique database identifier generated by the host system for each component.
Waste
Basic wastage factor applied when the software calculates pipe lengths.

Attribute Name
Description
Weight1 / Weight2
Weight on fabricated tees and crosses with unequal branch bores. Weight1 is
for BRANCH1 pipe, and Weight2 is for BRANCH2 pipe.
Weld Attribute 1 to
Weld Attribute 100
User-specified weld attribute. Up to 100 attributes can be defined and used for
any purpose.
Weld Gap
Space between male welded ends of a welded joint.
Weld Number
System-generated number for welds that do not have weld numbers defined in
the input data file (PCF or IDF).
Associates a text remark with a particular weld. The remark information
appears on the isometric drawing two areas:
Weld Remark Number
A cross-reference number against the weld identifier in the weld box.

In a list of remarks that is output at the bottom of the material list with a
cross-reference number against each remark.
Weld Spec
Weld specification reference.
Weld Type
Text identifier on a weld, as distinct from the weld SKEY or from implied end
type.
Welding Allowance
Denotes from which ends of the pipe have any associated field fit weld (FFW)
allowances taken.
Window Direction
Direction of window on sight glass.
157
Material Attributes
Lists the material attributes available for the pipeline.
Attribute
Not all of the material attributes listed below are permissible for all report types.
As such, the report that is currently active in the Report Definition panel determines which
pipeline attributes appear in the attributes list.
158
Attribute Name
Description
-80 to
-89
User-specified material attribute. Corresponds to the IDF record number.
-1400 to
-1489
User-specified additional material/item attribute. Corresponds to the IDF record

number.
Bolt Diameter
Units of dimensions (in or mm) used for bolt diameter.
Bolt Length
Units of dimensions (in or mm) used for bolt length.
CharacteristicBore
Commonly written description of the bore, such as 25x25mm.
ComponentType
Type of component.
ConfigurationAsString
Human-readable string of the material configuration.
DESCRIPTION
Item description. The Description can include information such as component

type, material, or geometric standard.
GEOMETRIC-STANDARD
Industry standard, such as DIN or ANSI.
Group
Component group, such as pipe, flange, valve, and so forth.
Item Group
Collection of related components.
Item Code
Identifier for the component that uniquely defines its bore and dimension.
MATERIAL-ATTRIBUTE1 to
MATERIAL-ATTRIBTE100
User-specified material attribute. Up to 100 attributes can be used for any

purpose.
MaterialOfConstruction
Material type, such as carbon-steel or iron.
MATERIAL-OF-CONSTRUCTION
Material type, such as carbon-steel or iron.
OUTSIDE-DIAMETER /
OUTSIDE-DIAMETER2
Outside diameter on the pipe.
Rating
Maximum pressure allowed for the pipe.
RATING / RATING2
Maximum pressure allowed for the pipe

Attribute Name
Description
SCHEDULE / SCHEDULE 2
Pipe schedule code.
Size1
Size of the main pipe.
Size1Units
Units of dimension for the size of the main pipe.
Size2
Size of the branch pipe.
Size2Units
Units of dimension for the size of the branch pipe.
Size3
Size of the tertiary bore.
Size3Units
Units of dimension for the tertiary bore.
SKEY
Valid ISOGEN symbol key for the component.
Standard
Industry standard, such as DIN or ANSI.
WAFER
Wafter component (XW) between two flanges or two flanges/gaskets.
WAFER-QUANTITY
Amount of wafer component.
WALL-THICKNESS /
WALL-THICKNESS2
Pipe wall thickness.
Weight
Component weight.
159
Weld Attributes
Lists the attributes available for welds.
Attribute
Not all of the weld attributes listed below are permissible for all report types. As
such, the report that is currently active in the Report Definition panel determines which pipeline
attributes appear in the attributes list.
Attribute Name
Description
Weld Attribute 1 to
Weld Attribute 100
User-specified weld attribute. Up to 100 attributes can be defined and used for
any purpose.
Weld Spec
The weld specification reference.
Spool Attributes
Lists the attributes available for spools.
Attribute
Not all of the spool attributes listed below are permissible for all report types. As
such, the report that is currently active in the Report Definition panel determines which pipeline
160
Attribute Name
Description
Spool Attribute 1 to
Spool Attribute 10
A user-specified spool attributes. Up to 200 attributes can be defined and can

be used for any purpose.
Spool Drawing Number
A number used to identify, track, or control each individual drawing without

using the pipeline reference or spool number identification. Only used on
spool isometrics.
SPOOL-ID
A unique identifier for the spool.
Miscellaneous Attributes
Lists the attributes that are available to report the specialized information related to some
component types.
Attribute
Not all of the attributes listed below are permissible for all report types. As such,
the report that is currently active in the Report Definition panel determines which pipeline
Attribute Name
Description
Allowance
Cut-piece allowance for the end of the pipe where it is placed.
Angle
Value of the angle in hundredths of degrees. Angle data is reported for

components such as elbow, bend, olet, tee, cross, bend-teed, and elbow-teed
type components.
Location where the component is assembled with other components to form a
spool or pipeline.
Category
Erection - Defines the component to be placed or constructed in the field. An

erection component also creates a spool break.
Fabrication - Defines the component to be fabricated in a workshop.
Offshore - Defines the component to be placed or constructed in the field as
part of an offshore operation.
Centre Of Gravity X
Calculated center of gravity at the X position.
Centre Of Gravity Y
Calculated center of gravity at the Y position.
Centre Of Gravity Z
Calculated center of gravity at the Z position.
Centreline Length
Length of the pipeline as derived by the pipe and component coordinates. Used
in reports and can be output in a table on the isometric drawing on a per bore
basis.
Connection Reference
Connection reference of the of the connected pipeline or equipment item.
Cut Piece Length
Cut piece length of the pipe or bend.
CUT-PIECE-NO
Cross-reference to the cut length identifier that appears along a section of

plotted pipe on the isometric drawing to a table on the drawing or a report. This
cross-reference can be to a table on the drawing or in a report.
DELIMITER-CHARACTER
Special character used as the delimiter.
Enclosure
Type of enclosure output on the isometric drawing.
END-PREPARATION-1
END-PREPARATION-2
End preparation description, such as bevel, screwed, mitred, butt weld, and so
on, used with additional material.
161

Attribute Name
Description
Factor Diameter
Work content erection factor that can be output to the spool information file.
GENERAL-WELD-PREFIX
String that ISOGEN uses to override the default weld number prefix for the
pipeline.
GROUP
Component type group, such as pipe, flange, valve, and so forth.
HAND
162
Highest ID
Highest identifier generated on the previous run of the pipeline.
Highest Number
Highest number generated on the previous run of the pipeline.
Highest Offshore Number
Highest offshore number generated on the previous run of the pipeline.
INFORMATION Attribute 1 to
INFORMATION Attribute 100
User-defined information attribute. Up to 100 attributes can be used for any

purpose.
LineStyle
User-specified line style number.
Measurement Points
Number of placement points (Thickness Measurement Location).
Measurement Type
Type of measurement (Thickness Measurement Location).
Message Text
Relevant information related to the error/warning message.
N.S.
Main bore of the component.
N.S. (OUTPUT-UNITS)
Output units for the component bore.
N.S.SEC.
Secondary bore of the component.
N.S.SEC.(MANDATORY)
Indicator to always output the secondary nominal size in the material control file.
N.S.SEC.(OPTIONAL)
Indicator to output the secondary nominal size only on multi-leg components.
N.S.THIRD
Third bore of the component.
NUMBER-OF-DRGS
Number of drawings contained in the plot file.
NUMBER-OF-SPOOLS
Number of spools contains in the plot file.
Part Number
Part number used by ISGOEN instead of its automatically generated one.
PIPELINE-DATA-FILENAME
File name of the input data file.
PLOTFILE-DATE
Date the plot file was generated by ISOGEN.
PLOTFILE-NAME
Name of the ISOGEN-generated plot file.
PT-NO
Item part number.

Attribute Name
Description
QTY
Number items to be associated.
Referenced Item
Coordinates that give the direction of the centerline of the referenced item.
Mainly used for skewed items.
Referenced Item Direction
Primary direction of the referenced item.
Remark
User-specified comment containing special requirements. Output to the remarks

file and plotted on the isometric drawing.
REVISION-IDENTIFIER
Revision of the item.
SERVICE/COMMODITY
Sheet Number
Number of the drawing sheet.
SKEY
ISOGEN symbol key for the component.
SPECIFIC-WELD-PREFIX
Spool Attribute 1 to
Spool Attribute 10
User-defined spool attribute. Up to 10 attributes can be used for any purpose.
Spool Drawing Number
Text string used to identify/track/control each individual drawing. Output only on

a spool isometric drawing.
Spool Identifier
Spool identification number.
SPOOL-CL-LENGTH
Value of the spool centerline length.
SPOOL-CL-LENGTH/N.S.
True length of the spool, including any branches. Calculated length includes all
flanges, fittings and pipe, including the true length around bends. Output values
are given to the nearest 1/10th foot or meter.
SPOOL-CL-N.S.
SPOOL-COFG
Value of the center of gravity calculation for the spool.
SPOOL-FACTOR-DIA/FT
Spool erection factor output in imperial units.
SPOOL-FACTOR-DIA/MT
Spool erection factor output in mixed or metric units.
SPOOL-NUMBER
Number of the pipe spool.
SPOOL-SURFACE-AREA
Calculated surface area of the pipe spool. Based on the pipe O/D and the
accumulated length of the spool being processed.
SPOOL-WEIGHT
Total weight of the pipe spool.
SPOOL-WELDS/DIA/INCH
Summation of weld diameter in inches multiplied by quantity for each spool.
SPOOL-WELDS-DIA/MM
Summation of weld diameter in meters multiplied by quantity for each spool.
163
164
Attribute Name
Description
Style
Representation of output units (DECIMAL or INCH).
Surface Area
Calculated surface area of the pipeline. Calculation is based on the actual pipe
O/D and the accumulated length of the pipeline. Assists in determining paint
quantity, costs, and so on.
TAG
User-specified identifier that identifies the component.
Type of Dimension
Dimension type.
Thickness/Rating
Thickness of the weld.
UNIQUE-PT-NO-LIST
Additional part number information output in the material list definition (MLD)
file. Supplements or replaces the existing PT-NO field.
UNIQUE-PT-NO-SUFFIX-LIST
Additional part number information output in the material list definition (MLD)
file. Supplements or replaces the existing PT-NO field.
Weight
Weight of the component or the weight per unit length of pipe.
Weld Type
Text identifier on a weld, as distinct from the weld SKEY or from implied end
type.
WELD-CAT
Weld category, such as fabrication, shop, or offshore.
Weld Diameter
Units of dimensions (in or mm) used for weld diameter.
WELD-DIAMETERS-PIPE
Pipe weld diameters or pipe weld cost factors on the isometric drawing.
WELD-DIAMETERS-SUPPORT
Support weld diameters or support weld cost factors on the isometric drawing.
WELD-LOCATION
Trigger to allow the location of each weld on the pipeline to be shown on any
generated list.
WELD-NO
Number of the weld.
Weld Number 1 to
Weld Number 9
User-defined weld number. Up to 10 numbers can be defined.
WELD-REM
Text remark associated with a particular weld.
Alternative Texts
Where applicable, each AText description includes its respective default value. If a default value
is not specified, the AText is normally left blank.
For each AText, three options are available:
<Default> - Use the default AText value.
<Suppress> - Suppress the AText value.
<Edit value> - Modify the AText value with the user-specified entry.
The preview graphics shown below illustrate the default AText setting.
Nozzle Label
Indicates the nozzle name attached to items of equipment. The default value is NOZZLE?.
AText ID:
-440
? Value:
Yes
$ Supported:
Yes
Equipment Location Label

Indicates equipment location. The default value is EQUIPMENT$LOCATION.
AText ID:
-441
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
165
Drawing Area
Sets properties that define isometric drawing objects, such as components, enclosures, and
detail sketches. The Drawing Area category includes the style groups listed below:
166
Piping Components - Organizes a collection of properties that control the output and
format of isometric drawing objects, including pipe, supports, flanges, elbows, and so forth.
For more information, see Piping Components (on page 168).
Piping Features - Organizes a collection of properties that define piping features, such as
branches, assemblies, nozzles, and taps. For more information, see Piping Features (on
page 195).
Enclosures - Organizes a collection of properties that control the output and format of
enclosures for drawing objects. For more information, see Enclosures (on page 215).
Graphics - Organizes a collection of properties that define how to represent pipeline

components on the isometric drawing. Properties are also available that define the layer
names and the colors assigned to layer numbers. For more information, see Graphics (on
page 240).
Content - Organizes a collection of properties that control what is shown on the isometric
drawing, such as the north arrow, continuation messages, and insulation indicators. For
more information, see Content (on page 247).
Detail Sketches - Organizes a collection of properties that define the characteristics of

detail sketches on the isometric drawing. Properties are also available for local details
sketches and information notes. For more information, see Detail Sketches (on page 267).
Revision Clouds - Organizes a collection of properties that control the output of revision
changes on the isometric drawing. For more information see Revision Clouds (on page 276).
Text - Organizes a collection of properties that control all aspects of the fonts that appear on
the isometric drawing. For more information, see Text (on page 279).
Click
settings.

See Also
167
Piping Components
Organizes a collection of properties that control the output and format of isometric drawing
objects, including pipe, supports, flanges, elbows, and so forth.
Topics
Pipe ................................................................................................ 168
Valves ............................................................................................ 169
Instruments .................................................................................... 170
Supports......................................................................................... 172
Bends ............................................................................................. 174
Elbows ........................................................................................... 176
Flanges .......................................................................................... 177
Gaskets .......................................................................................... 178
Multi-Port........................................................................................ 180
Pipe
Defines settings for pipe on the isometric drawing. For example, you can how insulation or heat
tracing is plotted on the drawing.
Drawing Splitting in Pipe

Controls the actions taken by the software whenever the ISOGEN automatic pipeline split facility
selects a split point that is located in a straight length of pipe.
Normal - Default for pipeline splitting to function as normal when the split point occurs along
a section of pipe. The relevant split point information is passed back to the 3D design
system using the isometric repeatability file, if it is being used.
Reject - If a pipeline split occurs along a section of pipe, the warning message,
UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT, is written to the message file. No plots are produced and
no information is written to the isometric repeatability file for the pipeline.
Message - If a pipeline split occurs along a section of pipe, the warning message,
UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT, is written to the message file. Plots are produced with the
message, UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT plotted at the top of each affected drawing. No
information is written to the isometric repeatability file for the pipeline.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.PipeLineSplittingInTube
168

Insulation Style
Specifies whether to show insulation along pipe only or along pipe and components.
Click Show
to display graphical representations of the options listed below, and then select
the appropriate setting.
None - Suppress insulation indication.
Alongside Pipe - Plot dashed insulation lines alongside pipe only, with a gap of 1 mm.
Alongside Pipe and Components - Plot dashed insulation lines alongside pipe and all
components, both with a 1 mm gap.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.InsulationStyle
Tracing Style
Specifies where heat tracing is shown on the isometric drawing.
Click Show
Alongside Pipe - Use the default to plot chain dotted tracing lines alongside the pipe only,
with a gap of 1 mm.
None - Suppress tracing indication.
Alongside Pipe and Components - Plot chain dotted tracing lines alongside pipe and all
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TracingStyle
169
Valves
Defines settings for valves on the isometric drawing.
Show Isometric Spindles

Controls the display of valve and instrument spindles in isometric projection.
True - Display valve and instrument spindles in isometric projection.
False - Display valve and instrument spindles as flat.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowIsometricSpindles
170
Instruments
Defines settings for instruments on the isometric drawing.
Show Isometric Spindles

Controls the display of valve and instrument spindles in isometric projection.
True - Display valve and instrument spindles in isometric projection.
False - Display valve and instrument spindles as flat.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowIsometricSpindles
Identification
Specifies whether to use the instrument tag or the item code in the material list or any material
control file that is generated. Typically, 3D design systems have parameters for both the
instrument name (tag) and the specification reference (item code), but only one of these can be
selected for output.
Use Tag - Output the default for the instrument name (tag).
Use Item Code - Output the instrument item code.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.InstIdentificaiton
171
Supports
Defines settings for supports on the isometric drawing.
Show
Controls the display of pipe supports on the isometric drawing.
True - Display pipe supports on the isometric drawing and in the material list.
False - Suppress the display of pipe supports on the isometric drawing and the material list.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowSupports
172

Format
Specifies the format for support dimensions.
Click Show
None - Suppress the display of support dimensions on the isometric drawing.
String - Dimension pipe supports in string format.
Overall - Dimension pipe supports in overall format
Included - Dimension pipe supports in included format.
Suppress - Suppress dimensions for pipe supports.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.SuppFormat
173

Identification
Specifies whether support names are shown on the isometric drawing and whether the names
are boxed or un-boxed. This property also controls whether supports are in the material list
(BOM) and whether the tag or specification reference (item code) is in the item code field.
Click Show
No Tags / Spec Ref - Suppress output of support names (tags) on the isometric drawing
and output of the specification reference (item code) in the item code field of the material list.
Unboxed Tags / Tags - Output un-boxed support names (tags) on the isometric drawing,
and outputs support names in the item code field of the material list.
Boxed Tags / Spec Ref - Output boxed support names (tags) on the isometric drawing, and
outputs the specification reference in the item code field of the material list.
Unboxed Tags - Output un-boxed support names (tags) on the isometric drawing, and
excludes supports from the material list.
Boxed Tags - Output boxed support names (tags) on the isometric, and excludes supports
from the material list.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SupportIdentificatoin
Support Additional Material

Controls inclusion of the weight of additional material associated with supports when performing
center-of-gravity calculations.
Include - Include the weight of additional materials. This is the default setting.
Ignore - Ignore the weight of additional materials.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.SupportAdditionaWeight
174
Bends
Defines settings for bends on the isometric drawing.
Representation
Defines how bends appear on the isometric drawing.
Square
Round
If this property is not set, the supporting graphic appears as shown below:
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.BendRepresentation
175

Radius
Sets the bend radius in millimeters. Use this property only if you set the Representation to
Round. Type a value in the range 0-9. The example below shows a radius that is set to 8 mm.
If you set Radius to 0, the software uses a default radius of 3 mm.

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.BendRadius
Elbows
Defines settings for elbows on the isometric drawing.
Representation
Defines how elbows appear on the isometric drawing.
Square
Round
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.ElbowRepresentation
176

Radius
Controls the radius depiction (in millimeters) on the isometric drawing for elbows. Type a value
in the range 3 mm to 9 mm. In the example below, Radius is set to 4.5 mm.
Use this property only if you set Representation to Round.
The default radius used for elbows is 3 mm.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.ElbowRadius
Leg Length
Specifies a plotted leg length for elbows, tees, and crosses. Leg Length does not apply to
fabricated (pulled) bends or set-on (stub-in) type tees or crosses.
Specify the required leg length in whole millimeters. For example, for a 12 mm leg length, type
12.
The maximum suggested value is 18 (18 mm), and the minimum suggested value is 6 (6
mm).
If you set the Leg Length to 0, the software uses a default value of 9 mm.
Defines:
Option Switch - 95
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.ComponentLegLength
177
Flanges
Defines settings for flanges on the isometric drawing.
Show Flange Rotation

Controls the output of flange rotation angles, which are used by the fabricator when welding on
flanges that must be rotated away from the normal off-center axes.
Select the checkbox to display flange rotation angles.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowFlangeRotation
Enclosure Style
Specifies the style of the enclosure box used for flange rotation angles on the isometric drawing
when Show Flange Rotation is selected.
No Box - Output angle data without an enclosure box.
Diamond Ends - Output a diamond-ended enclosure box.
Round Ends - Output a round-ended enclosure box.
Square Ends - Output a square-ended enclosure box.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.FlangeRotationStyle
178
Gaskets
Defines settings for gaskets on the isometric drawing.
Show
Controls the output of gaskets on the isometric drawing.
True - Output a gasket fitting shape on the isometric drawing
ISOGEN does not normally output a fitting shape to depict a gasket on the isometric
drawing. Where a gasket is present between two flanged components, a gap appears
between the components.
False - Suppress the output of the gasket fitting shape.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowGaskets
179
Multi-Port
Defines settings for multi-port components on the isometric drawing.
Connection Style
Controls the connection leg depiction of multi-port components.
All Dotted - Display dotted connection lines on all multi-port connections.
Dotted for Clarity - Display dotted connection lines only when needed for picture clarity,
such as when two or more ports are positioned on the same side with attached pipe work
running parallel to each other.
Not shown - Suppress the display of dotted connection lines shown.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.MultiPortConnections
180
Alternative Texts
The preview graphics shown below illustrate the default AText setting.
Flange Part Number

Defines the format of the flange part number. The default value is F.
AText ID:
-210
? Value:
Part Number
$ Supported:
Yes
Gasket Part Number

Defines the format of the gasket part number. The default value is G.
AText ID:
-211
? Value:
Part Number
$ Supported:
Yes
181

Bolt Part Number
Defines the format of the bolt part number. The default value is B.
AText ID:
-212
? Value:
Part Number
$ Supported:
Yes
Spindle Orientation Label

Indicates the direction of an operating spindle on a valve when it is not pointing in the primary
direction. The default value is SPINDLE.
AText ID:
-213
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
MM Label
Denotes millimeters. Used with arrowed dimensions on angle and multi-way valves to indicate
leg length. The default value is MM.
182
AText ID:
-214
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Reducing Flange Callout
Denotes a reducing flange. The indicator points to the location of the reducing flange. The
default value is REDUCING FLANGE.
AText ID:
-215
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Offset Label
Indicates a dimensional offset, such as eccentric reducer, reducing flange, and all forms of offset
blocks. The default value is OFFSET.
AText ID:
-216
? Value:
Offset Dimension
$ Supported:
Yes
Mitre Bend Callout

Denotes a mitre bend. See also AText -231 (Bend Label). The default value is MITRE.
AText ID:
-217
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
183

Lobster Bend Callout
Denotes a lobster back bend. See also AText - 231 (Bend Label). The default value is
LOBSTER.
AText ID:
-218
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Reinforced Branch Callout

Plots an identification message that points to a reinforced tee or cross when the symbol key is
TERF or CRRF and no reinforcement pad is required. The default value is REINFORCED.
AText ID:
-219
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Loose Flange Callout

Plots a distinguishing message that points to a flange where the LOOSE indicator is set. The
default value is LEFT LOOSE.
184
AText ID:
-220
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Bend Label
Identifies mitre and lobster back type bends. Used in conjunction with AText -217 (Mitre Bend
Callout) and AText -218 (Lobster Bend Callout). The default value is BEND.
AText ID:
-231
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Connector Part Number

Identifies a connector (clamp) as part of a material list cross-reference, such as C12 in a box.
The default value is C.
AText ID:
-233
? Value:
Part Number
$ Supported:
Yes
Line / Nut Part Number

Prefixes liners and nut material part numbers that are output on the isometric drawing. The
default value is ?.
AText ID:
-234
? Value:
Part Number
$ Supported:
Yes
185

Support Part Number
Identifies a support as part of a material list cross-reference, such as S8 in a box. The default
value is S.
AText ID:
-236
? Value:
Part Number
$ Supported:
Yes
Primary Flat Direction

This AText has no default text, but if you set it to a word, such as FLAT, then that text acts as a
trigger to output the flat direction of eccentric reducers that have their flat side pointing in a
primary direction.
AText ID:
-243
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Swept Tee Callout

Plots a message that points to a tee with a symbol key that starts with TS. The default value is
SWEPT TEE.
186
AText ID:
-275
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Orifice Flange Callout
Outputs text that points to orifice flanges. The default value is ORIFICE FLANGE.
AText ID:
-277
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Dial Face Callout

Outputs text that points to instrument dials with a symbol key that starts with ID and is followed
by a relevant direction letter. The default value is DIAL FACE.
AText ID:
-278
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Lapjoint Part Number

Denotes a lap joint stub end. The letter used with the material list cross-reference pointer for
LJSE symbol keys. The default value is L.
AText ID:
-279
? Value:
Part Number
$ Supported:
Yes
187

Orifice Callout
Outputs text that points to orifice plates and is followed by a relevant direction letter. The default
value is TAPPING.
AText ID:
-280
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Slip Plate Callout

Outputs text that points to spectacle blinds and slip plates and is followed by a relevant direction
letter. The default value is TAIL.
AText ID:
-281
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Sight Glass Callout

Outputs text that points to a sight glass and is followed by a relevant direction letter. The default
value is WINDOW.
188
AText ID:
-282
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Non Primary Flat Direction
Identifies non-primary flat directions on eccentric reducers. The contents of the AText is output
in front of the contest of a DIRECTION record that contains the flat skew direction. The default
value is FLAT.
AText ID:
-283
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Teed Bend Callout

Plots text at bends that have an off-line leg. The default value is TEED BEND.
AText ID:
-284
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Flange Rating Callout

Provides an extra message at a flange that has a different pressure rating to standard. This is
achieved by giving the mating gasket a symbol key of the required rating (such as 300#) in the
Intermediate Data File (IDF). The facility is only used on fixed length piping. The default value is
RATING FLANGE.
AText ID:
-285
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
189

Teed Elbow Callout
Identifies a teed elbow fitting. The default value is TEE ELBOW.
AText ID:
-298
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Bend Radius Diameter Label

Outputs the text 3D Bend Radius on individual pulled bends where the bend radius is
expressed in terms of a number of pipe diameters. The default value is D BEND RADIUS.
AText ID:
-337
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Bend Radius Length Label

Outputs the text bend radius on individual pulled bends where the bend radius is expressed in
terms of the dimensional units in use. The default value is BEND RADIUS.
190
AText ID:
-338
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Gearbox Label
Used in conjunction with directional information taken from a GEARBOX type record in the
pipeline data input file and which is appended to this AText. The default value is GEARBOX
ORIENTATION.
AText ID:
-346
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Heat Tracing Part Number

Used on the isometric drawing in conjunction with tracing controller coordinates. The default
value is the question mark symbol ( ? ).
AText ID:
-397
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Flange Tap Callout

Used on the isometric drawing in conjunctions with flange tap connections. The default value is
TAP DIRECTION.
AText ID:
-432
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Set On Label
Plots a message that points to a user-positioned set on connections.
AText ID:
-433
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
191

Set In Label
Plots a message that points to a user-positioned set in connections. The default value is STUB
END.
AText ID:
-434
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Flange Elevation Label

Indicates the elevation coordinate of the flange connection face. Used at flange positions in
vertical pipe legs.
AText ID:
-455
? Value:
Flange Elevation
$ Supported:
Yes
Support Coordinates Label

Identifies pipe support coordinates. The default value is SUPPORT LOCATION.
AText ID:
-470
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Port Reference Label

Displays a reference message at each port of a multi-port components on the isometric. If set to
blank, the message is suppressed.
192
AText ID:
-479
? Value:
Port Number
$ Supported:
Yes

Port Coordinates Label
Displays coordinate information at each port on the isometric drawing. If set to blank, the display
of coordinate data output is suppressed.
AText ID:
-480
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Support Direction Label

Indicates the orientation of pipe support. Content of the associated DIRECTION record
(containing compound directions for skewed support) is appended to AText. The default value is
SUPPORT.
AText ID:
-502
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Reducing Tee NS Label

Outputs a nominal size message on reducing tees, such as TEE RED.
AText ID:
-550
? Value:
NS1xNS2
$ Supported:
Yes
Equal Tee NS Label

Outputs a nominal size message on equal tees, such as TEE EQU.
AText ID:
-551
? Value:
NS1xNS2
$ Supported:
Yes
Concentric Reducer NS Label

Outputs a nominal size message on concentric reducers, such as CONC RED.
AText ID:
-552
? Value:
NS1xNS2
$ Supported:
Yes
193

Eccentric Reducer NS Label
Outputs a nominal size message on eccentric reducers, such as ECC RED.
AText ID:
-553
? Value:
NS1xNS2
$ Supported:
Yes
Flat Spool Flange Rotation

Identifies flange rotations on flat spools. The calculated angle is edited in by the software at the
position of the question mark ( ? ) character. The default value is FLANGE ROTATION ?.
AText ID:
-497
? Value:
Calculated Flange Rotation
$ Supported:
Yes
Ref Ecc Reducer Label

Identifies which eccentric reducer flat direction is used as a reference for a given flange rotation.
The default value is *** REFERENCE FLAT ***.
AText ID:
-487
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Ref Spindle Label

Identifies which spindle is used as a reference for a given flange rotation. The default value is ***
REFERENCE SPINDLE ***.
194
AText ID:
-488
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Ref Support Label
Identifies which support is used as a reference for a given flange rotation. The default value is
*** REFERENCE SUPPORT ***.
AText ID:
-489
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Ref Branch Label

Identifies which branch is used as reference for a given flange rotation. The default value is ***
REFERENCE BRANCH ***.
AText ID:
-490
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Ref Window Label

Identifies which window is used as a reference for a given flange rotation. The default value is
*** REFERENCE WINDOW ***.
AText ID:
-491
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
195
Piping Features
Defines properties for piping features, such as branches, assemblies, nozzles, and taps.
Topics
Branches ........................................................................................ 196
Assemblies..................................................................................... 200
Taps ............................................................................................... 205
Nozzles .......................................................................................... 212
Branches
Defines settings for branches.
Tap Branch Coordinates

Controls the output of coordinates at tapped branch connection points, which is the point on the
host component where the tapped branch is connected.
True - Output the coordinates.
False - Suppress the output of coordinates.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowTapBrnchCoords
Skew Orientation Reference

Controls the output of skew orientation.
196
Previous Position - Output the orientation direction message showing rotation relative to
previous position.
Primary Direction - Output the orientation direction message showing rotation from primary
direction.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.OrientationFrom
Olet Branch Orientation Message

Controls the output of an orientation message on undeveloped olet branches that are in primary
directions.
No Message - Suppress output of an orientation message on the isometric drawing.
Create Orientation Message - Output an orientation message on undeveloped olet

branches in a primary direction.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.OletBranchOrientationMessage
197

Tap Branch Inline Scale
Provides a tapped branch scaling factor for taps on inline items such as valves and flanges.
Type 0 for no tapped branch scaling. Tapped branches shown the same size as the main
pipeline (100%). This is the default setting. Alternatively, type an alternative branch scaling
factor. This value represents a percentage of the main pipeline size. For example, type 110 to
increase scaling, 90 to decrease scaling. The minimum value is 75 and the maximum is 125.
A tapped branch is a collection of components attached to a connection tapping point. The

components in a tapped branch can be scaled up or down from the size used for the main
pipeline.
50% is the minimum recommended value.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TapBranchInlineScale
Tap Branch Pipe Scale

Provides a tapped branch scaling factor for taps on pipe type components. Examples of pipe
type components are elbows, tees, reducers, and so forth.
Type 0 for tapped branch scaling at 65% of main pipeline size. This is the default setting.
Alternatively, type an alternative tapped branch scaling factor. This value represents a
percentage of the main pipeline size. For example, type 80 to increase scaling, 45 to decrease
scaling. The minimum value is 1 and the maximum is 99 (%).
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TapBranchPipeScale
198

Tap Branch Dimension
Controls the dimensioning of tee and tap branches to allow dimensioning to the edge of pipe.
Click Show
CENTERLINE - Originate dimensions from the centerlines of the main run.
TAPANDSETONSTARTPOINT - Dimension to the edge of pipe.
TAPSTARTPOINT - Defines tap dimensions only.

Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.TapBranchDimension
Tap Branch Suppression
Suppresses the drawing of tapped branches for particular components. Tapped branch
connections can sometimes be difficult to draw clearly on an isometric, particularly where a
number of fittings are in close proximity. An alternative to drawing tapped branches is using a
detailed sketch to show branch connections.
Click Show
to open a free-form text box. Type the data in the text box. The suppressed
components are defined by the component type SKEY, such as VALVEVB**, or by component
type as listed below:
ALL - Suppress the output of all tapped branches.
PIPE - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on pipe.
FITTING - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on fittings.
FLANGE - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on flanges.
VALVE - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on valves.
INSTRUMENT - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on instruments.
MISC-ITEM - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on misc. components.
199

When finished, click
. The software updates the style and displays the specified text
under the Tap Branch Suppression property label.
Where tapped branches have been suppressed, part numbers and weld numbers can still
be output on the isometric.
Click Hide
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.TapBranchSuppression
Show Reinforcement Pads
Controls the automatic generation of an item code and a material description on the material list
and a plotted shape for the pad on the isometric drawing.
True - Generate an item code, material description, and show a plotted pad shape on the
isometric drawing.
False - Suppress the generation of an item code and a material description and plotted pad
shape. This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowRPads
Assemblies
Defines settings for assemblies.
Show Site Assembly Table

Controls the display of the site assembly table on the isometric drawing.
The default setting is to suppress the display of site assembly table. To display the table, select
the checkbox.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowSiteAssemblyTable
200

Show Site Assembly Identifier
Controls site assembly information displayed on the isometric drawing.
Click Show
Off - Suppress display of flange assembly identification.
Numeric - Display numeric flange assembly identification.
Alphabetic - Display alphabetic flange assembly identification.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SiteAssemblyIDs
Assembly Identifier Sequence

Controls how site assembly identifiers are sequenced.
Combined - Sequence all assembly identifiers.
Category - Sequence assembly identifiers by category.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.AssemblyIDSequencing
Site Assembly Identifiers Per Drawing

Controls whether site assemblies are numbered per drawing or per pipeline.
Select the checkbox to number flange assembly identification per drawing. To number flange
assembly identification per pipeline, clear the checkbox.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SiteAssemblyIDsPerDrawing
201

Site Assembly Style
Controls the enclosure style used for site assemblies on the isometric drawing.
Click Show
202
None - Display no box enclosure.
Diamond - Display a diamond-ended box enclosure.
Round - Display a round-ended box enclosure.
Triangular - Display a triangular-shaped enclosure.
Diamond - Display a diamond-shaped enclosure.
Rectangular - Display a rectangular-shaped enclosure.
Circular - Display a circular-shaped enclosure.
Double Circle - Display a circular-shaped enclosure inside another circle.
Ellipse - Display an elliptical-shaped enclosure.
The site assembly uses AText -478, default J--such as J1 or JA--to prefix the flange
assembly identification.
The size that the circle, double circle, and ellipse is drawn at is controlled by the Site
Assembly Size setting (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the
enclosure. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts
to suit.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure
203

Site Assembly Size
Controls the number of characters used for the size of circle, double circle, and ellipse enclosure
style.
Valid entries are from 1 to 8 characters or Variable size, which dynamically sizes the enclosure.
The default setting is 2. The example below shows the default size used for a circle style
enclosure:
The number of characters defines the minimum size that the circle, double circle, and
ellipse is drawn at. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure is dynamically
adjusted to suit. The Variable size setting allows the circle, double circle, and ellipse to be
smaller than the default of 2 characters, but again dynamically adjusts to suit the number of
characters.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize
Fabrication Assembly Style

Controls the enclosure style for Fabrication assembly identifiers output on the isometric drawing.
Click Show
None - Display assembly identifiers with no box enclosure.
Diamond Ended - Display assembly identifiers in a diamond-ended box enclosure.
Round Ended - Display assembly identifiers in a round-ended box enclosure.
Triangle - Display assembly identifiers in a triangular-shaped enclosure.
Diamond - Display assembly identifiers in a diamond-shaped enclosure.
Square Ended - Display assembly identifiers in a square-ended box enclosure.
Circle - Display assembly identifiers in a circular enclosure.
Suppress - Suppress the display of assembly identifiers.
Double Circle - Display assembly identifiers in a circular-shaped enclosure inside another

circle.
Ellipse - Display assembly identifiers in an elliptical-shaped enclosure.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.FabricationAssemblyIDEnclosure
204

Offshore Assembly Style
Controls the enclosure style for Offshore assembly identifiers output on the isometric drawing.
Click Show
None - Display assembly identifiers in no box enclosure.

circle.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.OffshoreAssemblyIDEnclosure
205
Taps
Defines settings for taps.
Tap on Pipe
Controls the dimensioning of tapped branches on pipe-type components, such as elbows, tees,
and pipe.
Click Show
A tapped branch is a collection of components attached to a connection tapping point.
None - Turn off dimensions for tapped branch dimensions. This is the default setting.
Full - Turn on tapped branch dimensions.
Pipe Only - Turn off tapped branch dimensions, except for those on pipe and pipe-type
components.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.TapOnPipe
206

Tap on Component
Controls the dimensioning of tapped branches on actual fitting components, such as valves and
flanges.
Click Show
None - Suppress the display of tapped branch dimensions.
Full - Display dimensions for tapped branches as set for the main pipeline.
Pipe Only - Display dimensions only for pipes and pipe-type components (elbows, tees,
reducers, and so forth).
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.TapOnCpt
207

Tap on Pipe Fittings
Controls the dimensioning of tapping points on pipe-type components, such as elbows/teed
elbows, bends/teed bends, tees, and crosses.
None - Suppress dimensioning of tapped branches on pipe fittings.
Full - Dimension tapped branches on pipe fittings.

Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.TapOnPipeFittings

Click Show
208
Centreline- Originate dimensions from the centerlines of the main run.
TapAndSetOnStartPoint - Dimension to the edge of pipe.
TapStartPoint - Define tap dimensions only.
Defines:
Option Switch 81, Pos 9
I-Configure Drawing.Dimensions.TapBranchDimension
209

Tap Branch Suppression
Suppresses the drawing of tapped branches for particular components. Tapped branch
connections can sometimes be difficult to draw clearly on an isometric, particularly where a
number of fittings are in close proximity. An alternative to drawing tap branches is using a
detailed sketch to show branch connections.
Click Show
to open a free-form text box. Type the data in the text box. The suppressed
components are defined by the component type SKEY, such as VALVEVB**, or by component
type as listed below:
ALL - Suppress the output of all tapped branches.
PIPE - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on pipe.
FITTING - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on fittings.
FLANGE - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on flanges.
VALVE - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on valves.
INSTRUMENT - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on instruments.
MISC-ITEM - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on misc. components.

. The software updates the style and displays the specified text
under the Tap Branch Suppression property label.
Where tapped branches have been suppressed, part numbers and weld numbers can still
be output on the isometric.
Click Hide
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TapBranchSuppression

Controls the output of coordinates at tapped branch connection points, which is the point on the
True - Output the coordinates.
False - Suppress the output of coordinates.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowTapBranchCoords
210

Tap Branch Inline Scale
Controls the plotted size of tapped in-line branches. The components in a tapped branch can be
scaled up or down from the size used for the main pipeline.
Type 0 for no tapped branch scaling. Tapped branches are shown the same size as the main
pipeline (100%). Alternatively, type an alternative tapped branch scaling factor. This value
represents a percentage of the main pipeline size. For example, type 110 to increase scaling, 90
to decrease scaling. The minimum value is 75 and the maximum is 125.
A tapped branch is a collection of components attached to a connection tapping point. The

components in a tapped branch can be scaled up or down from the size used for the main
pipeline.
50% is the minimum recommended value.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TapBranchInlineScale
Tap Branch Pipe Scale

Provides a tapped branch scaling factor for taps on pipe-type components. Examples of
pipe-type components are elbows, tees, reducers, and so forth.
Type 0 for tapped branch scaling at 65% of main pipeline size, or type an alternative tapped
branch scaling factor. This value represents a percentage of the main pipeline size. For
example, type 80 to increase scaling, 45 to decrease scaling. The minimum value is 1 and the
maximum is 99 (%).
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TapBranchPipeScale
211
Nozzles
Defines settings for nozzles.
Show
Controls whether equipment nozzle indicators are plotted (in dotted line style) on the isometric
drawing.
True - Display equipment nozzle indicators.
False - Suppress the display of equipment nozzle indicators. This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowNozzles
Alternative Texts
Screwed End Label

Plots an indicator that points to a pipe end that has been set to screwed in the pipeline input
data file. The default value is SCREWED END.
AText ID:
-229
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Screwed Erection Callout

Sets the output text as a message on screwed erection (construction) fittings. This AText is
blank by default.
212
AText ID:
-286
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Pipeline Change Label
Denotes the positions of a change in the pipeline reference or system isometrics. The default
value is PIPE.
AText ID:
-288
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Tangential Connection Label

Identifies tangential connections. In cases where the tapping point method is used, the existing
tapping connection message (AText -451) is not output. The default value is TANGENTIAL
CONNECTION.
AText ID:
-388
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Offset Connection Label

Identifies offset connections. In cases where the tapping point method is used, the existing
tapping connection message (AText -451) is not output. The default value is OFFSET
CONNECTION.
AText ID:
-389
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Connection Origin Label

Identifies tangential/offset connections. In cases where the tapping point method is used, the
existing tapping connection message (AText -451) is not output. The default value is FROM ?
ORIGIN.
AText ID:
-390
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
213

Tap Connection Label
Identifies tangential/offset connections. In cases where the tapping point method is used, the
existing tapping connection message (AText -451) is not output.
AText ID:
-391
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Fab Site Assembly Prefix

Used on the isometric drawing in conjunction with fabrication site assembly identifier. The
default value is J.
AText ID:
-429
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Offshore Site Assembly Prefix

Used on the isometric drawing in conjunction with offshore site assembly identifier. The default
value is J.
AText ID:
-430
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Tapping Connection Label

Is output along with coordinate values at the tapping point on a user-specified fitting. Requires
Option Switch 122 to be set to 1 for tapping coordinates that are output on the isometric
drawing. The default value is TAPPING CONNECTION.
214
AText ID:
-451
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Undeveloped Branch Label
Indicates undeveloped set-on tees and olets, which have no branch leg and are indicated on
dotted form on the pipeline, where the intended branch connection is in a skewed direction. A
system-generated direction word is appended. The default value is CONNECTION
ORIENTATION.
AText ID:
-454
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Thickness Label
Shows thickness of a penetration plate on the drawing.
AText ID:
-459
? Value:
Penetration Plate
Thickness
$ Supported:
Yes
Flange Assembly Prefix

The site assembly uses the AText -478 default value J, such as J1 or JA, to prefix the flange
assembly identification. The default value is J.
AText ID:
-478
? Value:
Assembly Number
$ Supported:
Yes
215
Enclosures
Controls the output and format of enclosures for drawing objects.
Topics
Part Numbers ................................................................................. 216
Component Attributes .................................................................... 219
Component Tags ........................................................................... 220
Weld Numbers ............................................................................... 224
Spool Identifiers ............................................................................. 227
Cut Pieces...................................................................................... 231
Joints and Assemblies ................................................................... 231
Messages....................................................................................... 236
Part Numbers
Defines settings for part number enclosures.
Show
Suppresses the plotting of part numbers and associated enclosure boxes on the drawing.
True - Display part numbers on the isometric drawing.
False - Suppress the display of part numbers on the isometric drawing.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.PartNoVisible
Size
Controls the number of characters used for the size of circle, double circle, and eclipse
enclosure style.
The default setting is 2. The example below shows the default setting used for the circle
enclosure style:
216

The number of characters defines the minimum size at which the circle, double circle, or
ellipse is drawn. If there are more characters than the value that is defined, the enclosure
dynamically adjusts to suit. When set to Variable size, the circle, double circle, and ellipse can
be smaller than the default of 2 characters, but dynamically adjust to suit the number of
characters.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.PartNoEnclSize
Length
Sets a fixed length for part numbers (1-9 characters or variable). Select a fixed part number
length in the list.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.PartNoLength
Number of Spaces
Sets the number of spaces used for Type 1, Type 2, and Type 3 enclosure (as specified by the
Additional Items Style setting).
Set the number of spaces to use. If no value is set, ISOGEN uses a default value of 2.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.PartNoSpaces
Style
Specifies the part number enclosure box shape.
Click Show
None - Display no enclosure box. Only plot the part number.
Square Ends
217
Round Ends
Diamond Ends
Circle
Double Circle
Ellipse
The size at which the circle, double circle, and ellipse is drawn is controlled by the Size
setting (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the enclosure. If there are
more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to accommodate.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.PartNoEnclosureStyle
218

Additional Items Style
Specifies the style for part number enclosures.
Click Show
None - Display no enclosure style.
Type1 Square
Type1 Round
Type1 Diamond
Type2 - Use Style to define the style of end used with Type 2 additional enclosure.
Number of Spaces needs to be set to control the number of blank spaces used.
If Style is set to Circle, Double Circle, or Ellipse, then Type 2 Additional Items Style is
switched off, as this uses the same setting.
For Type2, the enclosure style for the box with the part numbers in it is defined using the
Style setting.
All pipe part numbers, which are usually output as messages along the pipe, are converted
to arrowed out type messages.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.AdditionalEnclosureStyle
219
Component Attributes
Defines settings for component attribute enclosures.
Data
Specifies the text that is output to the data definition (DDF) file for the component attribute
enclosure.
Click Show
. The software updates the style and displays the specified text under the Data property
label.
Use the format Message-Type Attribute.

Message-Types:
MESSAGE-POINTED
MESSAGE-ROUND
MESSAGE-TRIANGLE
MESSAGE-DIAMOND
MESSAGE-SQUARE
MESSAGE-CIRCLE
MESSAGE-UNBOXED
Attributes:
COMPONENT-NAME
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 to COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10
You can output attributes to the following:
Material list (variable and user-defined)
Material control file
Cut list report
Cut list file
Click Hide
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.CptATtributesEnclStyle
220
Component Tags
Defines settings for component tag enclosures.
Component Tag Enclosure

Defines the style for tag numbers on in-line items.
Suppress - Suppress plotting of tags and names.
Enclosure - Plot and box in tags and names.
No Enclosure - Plot tags/names without boxing in.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.CptTagStyle
221

Component Tag Enclosure Style
Controls the enclosure shapes used for components if Component Tag Enclosure is set to
Boxed.
Click Show
Square-ended box
Diamond-ended box
Round-ended box
Triangular
Diamond
Rectangular
Circular
Elliptical
Hexagonal
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.CptTagEnclStyle
Instrument Size
Specifies the size of the enclosure for instrument text. You can select 1 through 4 characters on
each of the two available lines within an instrument balloon, or you can specify no balloon.
Click Show
222
No Balloon - Suppress plotting of a balloon around the instrument name.
1 Character - Plot a balloon size at least 1 character on each line.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.InstIDEnclosureSize
Instrument Style
Specifies the shape of the instrument name box.
Click Show
No Box - Revert to using the Instrument Size setting .
Triangular - Display a triangle-shaped enclosure.
Square - Display a square-ended box enclosure.
Circle - Display a circular-shaped enclosure.
Hexagon - Display a hexagonal-shaped enclosure.
To reduce the chances of these enclosures becoming quite large, especially the diamond
and triangle enclosures, limit the display to only 2 or 3 characters.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.InstIDEnclosureStyle
223

Support Style
Controls the enclosure shapes used for supports when Identification is set to Boxed Tags /
Spec Ref or Boxed Tags. For more information, see Supports (on page 172).
Click Show
Default Rectangle
Round Ends
Diamond Ends
Triangle
Diamond
Rectangle
Circle
Ellipse
Hexagon
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SupportTagEnclStyle
224
Weld Numbers
Defines the assignment of weld enclosures. You can define up to six enclosure definitions, each
of which can apply to one or more of the six weld types. You can also use the Enclosure Editor
to modify the style, shape, and label length of an existing weld enclosure definition. The editor
can also be used to define additional enclosure assignments.
Section 1
Specifies which of the six weld types are shown on the isometric drawing. This section also
defines which enclosure definitions are shown in the summary and can be edited. Weld
enclosure assignments are specified by selecting and clearing the checkboxes.
All welds - Assigns the enclosure definition to pipe and support welds across all categories
(Fabrication, Erection, and Offshore).
Pipe welds - Assigns the enclosure definition to pipe welds only across all categories. To
exclude a category, clear its checkbox. In the example below, Offshore pipe welds are excluded
from the enclosure assignment.
Support welds - Assigns the enclosure definition to support welds only across all categories. To
exclude a category, clear its checkbox. In the example below, only Fabrication support welds
are assigned a weld enclosure.
225

Section 2
Shows a preview of all currently defined weld enclosures (1) and includes a summary of the
selected weld types to which each enclosure applies (2).
Section 2 also provides access to the Enclosure Editor.
Enclosure Editor
Provides options for modifying an existing enclosure definition and for creating a new definition.
Click Edit enclosure definitions to open the Enclosure Editor.
Set additional enclosures - Opens an enclosure panel so that you can define a new weld
enclosure.
Enclosure style - Specifies the weld enclosure type. The available types are simple, extended,
or one of the four special extended types.
Simple Enclosure - Represents an enclosure with a single field that shows the weld
number and prefix, if set.
Extended Enclosure - A segmented enclosure. Each segment contains a weld

attribute. An extended enclosure can have up to 10 segments.
Special Extended Enclosure - An enclosure with two, three, or four segments. Each
segment contains a weld attribute. Available segment arrangements are shown below:
Enclosure shape - Specifies the shape of the enclosure. Available shapes depend on the
selected enclosure type.
226

Label length - Controls the number of characters used for a simple enclosure. Valid entries are
from 1 to 8 characters and Variable size, which dynamically sizes the enclosure. The default
setting is 2. This option appears only when a simple enclosure type is select for Enclosure
style.
Attribute - Specifies the attribute that appears in the enclosure. This option appears only when
an extended or special extended enclosure type is selected for Enclosure style.
Width - Controls the number of characters displayed in each segment. Select a number in the
list. This option appears only when an extended or special extended enclosure type is selected
for Enclosure style.
Force all welds as special - Only applies to objects with Enclosure style set to one of the
special extended enclosure types.
Select the checkbox to force all welds to adopt the special layout for their enclosure. This option
appears only when an extended enclosure type is selected for Enclosure style.
To allow the generation of an enclosure containing only the weld number, when the data for all
the other fields in an enclosure are missing, clear the checkbox.
Add a segment - Adds a segment to the enclosure and displays an additional Attribute and
Width list so that you can define the content to appear in the segment. This option displays only
when the non-special extended enclosure is selected in the Enclosure style list.
Apply enclosure to - Displays a summary of the welds selected in Section 1.
Click Hide
to close the Enclosure Editor.
227
Spool Identifiers
Defines settings for spool identifier enclosures.
Layout
Controls the size of the spool ID enclosure. Specifying a mixture of new line and blank character
indicators that are used by the software to pad-out the Style setting effectively increases the
size of the enclosure. The size of the text, which is controlled by the Text Size setting, that is
displayed within any increased size enclosure is not increased in size. The data string
associated with each identifier consists of a combination of the @, $, and ? characters.
The @ character signals a blank (space) requirement.
The $ character signals a new line requirement.
The ? character indicates where the actual data from the declared record should be located
in the 'padded-out' record.
Setting the value to the text string @$@@?@@$@ increases the Style with the diamond-end
enclosure as shown in the example below:
Use the increase in size with care as it affects the isometric representation considerably.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SpoolIDEnclosureStyle
Style
Specifies the enclosure shape for the spool identifiers.
Click Show
228
None - Use no enclosure.
Square Brackets - Enclose spool identifiers in the standard square brackets or a double
box enclosure.
Diamond Ends - Enclose spool identifiers in a diamond-ended box.
Round - Enclose spool identifiers in a round-ended box.
Triangular - Enclose spool identifiers in a triangle-shaped box.
Diamond Box - Enclose spool identifiers in a diamond-shaped box.
Square Box - Enclose spool identifiers in a square-ended box.
Circle - Enclose spool identifiers in a circle.
229
Double Circle - Enclose spool identifiers in a double circle.
Ellipse - Enclose spool identifiers in an ellipse.
The size at which the circle, double circle, and ellipse is drawn is controlled by the Spools
> Settings > Spool Identifiers > Size setting (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum
size for the enclosure. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically
adjusts to suit.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SpoolIDEnclosure
230
Cut Pieces
Defines settings for cut piece enclosures.
Style
Controls the shape of the enclosure used to surround the cut piece numbers on the isometric.
Click Show
<n> Default
Circle
Diamond
Diamond Ends
Double Circle
Double Ellipse
Ellipse
Hexagon Ends
Round Ends
Square Ends
Triangle
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.CutPieceEnclosureStyle
231
Joints and Assemblies

Defines settings for assemblies.
Site Assembly Style

Controls the enclosure style used for site assemblies on the isometric drawing.
Click Show
232
None - Display no box enclosure.
Triangular - Display a triangular-shaped enclosure.
Rectangular - Display a rectangular-shaped enclosure.
Circular - Display a circular-shaped enclosure.
Double Circle - Display a circular-shaped enclosure inside another circle.
The site assembly uses the AText -478 default value J, such as J1 or JA, to prefix the
flange assembly identification.
The size at which the circle, double circle, and ellipse is drawn is controlled by the Site
Assembly Size setting (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the
enclosure. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts
to suit.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure
233

Site Assembly Size
style.
The default setting is 2. The example below shows the default setting used for a circle style
enclosure:
The number of characters defines the minimum size that the circle, double circle, and
ellipse is drawn at. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure is dynamically
adjusted to suit. The Variable size setting allows the circle, double circle, and ellipse to be
smaller than the default of 2 characters, but again dynamically adjusts to suit the number of
characters.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize
Fabrication Assembly Style

Controls the enclosure style for fabrication assembly identifiers output on the isometric drawing.
Click Show
234
None - Display assembly identifiers with no box enclosure.

circle.

Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.FabricationAssemblyIDEnclosure
Offshore Assembly Style - Controls the enclosure style for offshore assembly identifiers output
on the isometric drawing.
Click Show
None - Display assembly identifiers in no box enclosure.
235

circle.

Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.OffshoreAssemblyIDEnclosure
236
Messages
Defines settings for message enclosures.
You can increase the size an enclosure by specifying a mixture of new line and blank character
indicators that are used by the software to pad-out the normal message record. The data string
associated with each identifier consists of a combination of the @, $, and ? characters. Setting
the value to the text string @@?@@ increases the message enclosure.
The ? character indicates where the actual data from the declared record is be located in
the padded-out record.
Ideally, the message enclosure should only contain two or three characters, and should
also be used with care, as a large message considerably affects the isometric representation.
Round Layout
Controls the physical size of the round enclosure used to contain user input messages. Type the
data string in the box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.MessageRoundEnclosure
Circle Layout
Controls the physical size of the circle enclosure used to contain user input messages. Type the
data string in the box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.MessageCircleEnclosure
237

Diamond Layout
Controls the physical size of the diamond enclosure used to contain user input messages. Type
the data string in the box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.MessageDiamondEnclosure
Pointed Layout
Controls the physical size of the pointed-ended enclosure used to contain user input messages.
Type the data string in the box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.MessagePointedEnclosure.
Square Layout
Controls the physical size of the square enclosure used to contain user input messages. Type
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.MessageSquareEnclosure
238

Triangle Layout
Controls the physical size of the triangle enclosure used to contain user input messages. Type
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.MessageTriangleEnclosure
239
Graphics
Defines the representation of pipeline components on the isometric drawing. Properties are also
available that define the layer names and the colors assigned to layer numbers.
Topics
Definitions ...................................................................................... 240
Layers ............................................................................................ 244
Scale .............................................................................................. 245
Additional ....................................................................................... 245
Definitions
Defines the representation of pipeline components on the isometric drawing.
Definitions
Specifies how to represent pipeline components or facilities on the drawing. For example, you
can specify that valves are to be drawn 1.5 times normal size with a line thickness of 1 on layer
5, and appear in the color blue. This collection is used to construct the corresponding drawing
definition (DDF) file. Data is entered using a grid. To open the grid, click Show .
Applies To - Specifies the pipeline, pipeline component, or facility to which the definition is
applied. This is set using a list, which includes the allowable settings for this property.
Lower NS - Defines the minimum bore as an integer or real number. Type a value in the
current nominal size units.
When there are two or more definitions with the same Applies To setting, you can use a
zero (0) in the first of the lower bore positions to signal there is no lower bore, as shown in
the example below.
Applies To
Lower NS
Upper NS
Pipeline
Pipeline
2.5
Pipeline
ISOGEN Configuration displays the Lower NS and Upper NS options together, rather
than separated.
240
Upper NS - Defines the maximum bore as an integer or real number. Type the required
value in the current nominal size units.
When there are two or more definitions with the same Applies To setting, you can use a
zero (0) in the last maximum bore position to signal there is no maximum bore limit, as
shown in the example below:
Applies To
Lower NS
Upper NS
Pipeline
Pipeline
2.5
Pipeline
ISOGEN Configuration displays the Lower NS/Upper NS parameter together, rather

than separated.
Category - Specifies the category governed by this definition. ALL represents an

unspecified category.
Colour - Specifies the index number that represents a specific color as defined in the output
drawing software. AutoCAD uses a fixed 256 color pallet starting at 1 (red) to 256. In
MicroStation, in addition to a default color pallet, each design file can have a unique custom
color table. For example, color index number 3 may be red in one design file, but it may be
green in another.
The table below shows a color comparison between a sampling of AutoCAD and
MicroStation color index numbers.
AutoCAD Colour Index
Number
MicroStation Colour Index

Number
Colour Output on Isometric

Drawing
241

AutoCAD Colour Index
Number
MicroStation Colour Index

Number
14
Colour Output on Isometric

Drawing
For specific information about AutoCAD, MicroStation, and other third party drawing
software color tables, refer to the product documentation delivered with your software.
The table below shows the index numbers applicable to the software and their mapped
colors.
242
Numeric
Value
Mapped Color
Black
Blue
Cyan
Green
Magenta
Red
Yellow
White
Dark Blue
Dark Cyan
10
Dark Green
11
Dark Magenta
12
Dark Red
13
Dark Yellow
14
Dark Gray
15
Light Gray
Layer - Defines a number that corresponds to the layer. This number is an integer that
identifies the required layer (level) to which the component type is to be assigned. Type a
value in the range 1-50.
Scale - Specifies an integer value for the scale that represents an increase or decrease to
the basic 100% standard symbol size for all types of fitting. Type a value in the range 75 200.
Thickness Actual - Defines the actual thickness (width) of the plotted line in millimeters (a
real number). Type a value in the range 0.0 to 10.0.
Thickness Logical - Specifies an integer for the required thickness. Type a value in the
range 0 - 99.
Line Style - Specifies the number that corresponds to the line style that is to be output on
the isometric drawing. A line style is a simple pattern of lines and gaps. In the Line Style list,
the 12 line styles generated by ISOGEN, shown below, are listed by default.
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
You can define additional line styles using Line Style Table.
ISOGEN-generated line styles apply only for showing heat tracing on the isometric
drawing. They do not apply for piping. User-specified line styles can be applied for showing
either heat tracing or piping.
The value that displays on the Definitions icon indicates the number of columns currently
defined in the report. In the example below, three columns are currently defined.
Click Hide
to close the grid.
243

Line Style Table
Maps a standard name to a line style number.
Click Show
. The software updates the style and displays the specified text under the Line Style
Table property label.
Any line style number that you enter in the text field is displayed in the Line Style list.
Click Hide
The text that you enter must be the name of a line style defined in the output CAD system.
The software supports up to 1000 user-specified line styles.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Definitions.LineStyleTable
Layers
Defines settings for layer numbers.
Layers
Stores the definitions of the layer names and colors assigned to layer numbers. Data is entered
using a grid. To open the grid, click Show
.
Colour - Specifies the optional color integer number to override the default color as defined
in the output drawing system.
Number - Identifies the integer number that corresponds to the layer defined in Definitions.
Name - Specifies a name for the layer. For example, delivered layers include PIPE,
FITTINGS, DIMTEXT, DIMLINES, and MATLIST.
The value that displays on the Layers icon indicates the number of layers currently defined
for the active isometric drawing style. In the example below, 11 layers are currently defined:
244
Click Hide
to close the grid.

Default Colour
Sets the default color for all layers if a color is not set explicitly.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Layers.DefaultColour
Scale
Defines the scale of the pipeline within drawing area of the plotted isometric.
Drawing Area
Increases or decreases the scale of the pipeline picture part of the isometric only, while leaving
all other parts, such as the drawing frame, material list, title block and line summary areas,
unaltered. Use Drawing Area to re-scale the pipeline picture and all text pointing to it.
Type 0 or 100 to use the default scale, or type a number to increase or decrease the scaling
effect as a percentage.
Defines:
Option Switch - 34
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.PipeLineScale
Drawing Size
Controls the finished isometric drawing size. You can increase or decrease the final plotted
isometric size from the size defined by Drawing Size, or Custom Height and Custom Width.
Type the number that represents the percentage by which to increase or decrease the final
isometric drawing size. For example, if you type 71, the software generates a drawing reduced
by 71% of the set size. If you type 120, the software generates a drawing increased by 120% of
the set size. If you type 0 or 100, there is no scaling change. The software generates the
isometric drawing at the size defined by Drawing Size or Custom Height and Custom Width.
Defines:
Option Switch - 32
I-Configure - Drawing.Control.IsoScale
True Scale
Attempts to adjust the length of sections of pipe to be proportional to their actual physical length.
Select the checkbox to use true scaling of isometrics (proportional pipe lengths).
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.TrueScale
245
Additional
Defines additional data for the data definition (DDF) file.
Enabled
Controls whether the data specified in the DDFLines setting is added to the DDF file. To include
the data, select the checkbox.
Defines:
Option Switch N/A
I-Configure Supplementary.AdditionalData.Enabled
Data
Specifies a block of text to be added to the DDF file.
Click Show
. The software updates the style and displays the specified text under the Data property
label.
Click Hide
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.AdditionalData.DDFLines
246
Content
Controls what is shown on the isometric drawing. For example, you can set the direction of the
north arrow and specify how nominal size information appears on the isometric drawing.
Topics
North Arrow .................................................................................... 247
Continuations ................................................................................. 247
Nominal Sizes ................................................................................ 250
Insulation and Tracing ................................................................... 252
Spec Breaks................................................................................... 253
Flow Arrows ................................................................................... 254
Ghost Gap...................................................................................... 256
North Arrow
Show Enclosure
Controls whether the north arrow, as specified by North Direction, is displayed in an enclosing
box.
True - Display the north arrow in an enclosing box.
False - Suppress the display of the north arrow in an enclosing box.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.NorthArrowBox
Continuations
Defines settings for continuation messages.
Pipe Name Style

Controls the style of pipeline name output for drawing continuation messages when Include
Pipeline Name is selected.
Click Show
Blank - Output a standard drawing continuation message.
Drawing Identifier - Output a drawing continuation message that includes

CLIENT-DRAWING-IDENTIFIER.
Pipe Reference - Output a drawing continuation message includes pipeline name.
Sequence Number - Output a drawing continuation message that includes

PIPELINE-DRAWING-SEQUENCE-NUMBER.
247
Spool Drawing Sequence Number - Output a drawing continuation message that includes
SPOOL-DRAWING-SEQUENCE-NUMBER.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.PipeNameStyle
Include Pipeline Name

Controls whether the pipeline name is output as part of the drawing continuation message on
the isometric.
True - Output the pipeline name as part of the continuation message on the isometric
drawing.
False - Output a standard drawing message.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.PipeNameInContMessages
Show for Pipelines

Controls whether the coordinate information for pipeline continuations and ISO TEXT are shown
Select the checkbox to display the coordinate information. This is the default setting.
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for pipeline continuation is -209. The default
value is CONT. ON.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowPipeLineCont
248

Show Continuations at Split Points
Controls the location of drawing continuation messages at drawing split points on the isometric
drawing. This property works in conjunction with Show Coordinates at Split Points. For more
information, see Drawing Splitting (on page 111).
True - Output a drawing continuation message that points to the drawing split point. If Show
Coordinates at Split Points is also selected, coordinate data is displayed (1). However, if
Show Coordinates at Split Points is not selected, the software displays the drawing
continuation message but suppresses the display of coordinate data (2).
False - Output a drawing continuation message that points to the end of continuation
components, and suppress the output of coordinate data (1). This setting also requires that
the Show Coordinates at Split Points checkbox be cleared. If Show Coordinates at Split
Points is selected, the software displays a full set of coordinates and a drawing continuation
message that points to the drawing split point (2).
Setting AText -209 and -276 to blank, suppresses the isometric output of the Show
Continuation at Split Points and Show Coordinates at Split Points settings.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowContAtSplitPoint
Show for Spools

Controls the display of continuation graphics at the ends of spool isometric drawings. Where a
spool continues on another spool, an appropriate continuation message is also output on the
isometric drawing.
True - Display continuation graphics on spool isometric drawings.
False - Suppress the display of continuation graphics on spool isometric drawings.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.ContinuationGraphicsOnSpoolIsos
249
Nominal Sizes
Defines settings for the output of nominal size data.
Units in Drawings
Controls how nominal size information is output in a number of tables and lists appearing on the
isometric drawing. ISOGEN does not have an option when outputting the nominal size on
whether the units (typically the character) is appended to the output text. To give you control
over the output of the nominal size units, the software adds keywords to the appropriate control
files.
Select the checkbox to append the keyword OUTPUT-UNITS to N.S, N.S.SEC and N.S.THIRD
when this appears in the control files for tables and lists appearing on the isometric drawing. An
example is shown below.
PRINTED-M/C-DATA-ITEMS
'PIPELINE-REFERENCE' 1 L
'REVISION' 18 L
'ITEM-CODE' 24 L
'N.S.' 41 L OUTPUT-UNITS
'QTY' 57 N
'GROUP' 64 L
Clear the checkbox to append the keyword SUPPRESS-UNITS to N.S, N.S.SEC and
N.S.THIRD when this appears in the control files for tables and lists appearing on the isometric
drawing.
You can control nominal size units for the following output tables and report files:
Material List Style 2
Material Control File
Cut Pipe List
Cut Pipe Report File
Weld List
Welding Report File
Site Welding Report File
Operations List (default units output)
Site Assembly Report File (default units output)
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowNSUnitsOnDrg
250

Units in Report
Controls whether nominal size is output at branch (tee/olet/cross) and reducer locations.
True - Output nominal size information at branches and reducers as normal.
False - Suppress the output of nominal size information at branches and reducers.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.NominalSize
Tees and Crosses

Controls the nominal size (N.S.) output at set-on tees and crosses.
Combined - Display nominal size output at set-on tees and crosses as combined.
251
Separate - Display nominal size output at set-on tees and crosses separately.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TeeCrossNS
Insulation and Tracing

Defines settings for the representation of insulation and heat tracing.
Insulation Style
Specifies whether to show insulation along pipe only or along pipe and components.
Click Show
None - Suppress insulation indication.
Alongside Pipe - Plot dashed insulation lines alongside pipe only, with a gap of 1 mm.
Alongside Pipe and Components - Plot dashed insulation lines alongside pipe and all
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.InsulationStyle
252

Tracing Style
Specifies where heat tracing is shown on the isometric drawing.
Click Show
Alongside Pipe - Use the default to plot chain dotted tracing lines alongside the pipe only,
with a gap of 1 mm.
None - Suppress tracing indication.
Alongside Pipe and Components - Plot chain dotted tracing lines alongside pipe and all
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.format.TracingStyle
Heat Tracing Options

Controls heat tracing options.
On - Use heat tracing options.
Off - Suppress the use of heat tracing options.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.HeatTracingOptions
Spec Breaks
Defines the appearance of specification breaks on the isometric drawing.
Enclosure
Controls the shape of the enclosure that surrounds the indication of a specification break
(specification change) on the isometric drawing.
Click Show
None - Suppress the display of an enclosure around the specification break reference on
the isometric drawing.
Square Ended - Display a square-shaped box enclosure around the specification break
reference on the isometric drawing.
Diamond Ended - Display a diamond-shaped enclosure around the specification break

Round Ended - Display a round-ended box enclosure around the specification break
253
Hexagonal Ended - Display a hexagonally-shaped enclosure around the specification break

Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SpecBrkEnclosure
Representation
Specifies single or dual specification break indication boxes on the isometric drawing.
Single - Indicate a single specification. Boxed message consisting of the new specification
reference pointing to the position on the pipeline where the change occurs.
Dual - Indicate two specifications. Two boxed messages containing the current and new
specification references are positioned at the point on the pipeline where the change occurs.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SpecBrkRepresentation
254
Flow Arrows
Defines settings for displaying flow arrows on pipe and in-line components. Flow arrows are
used to show the flow direction of fluid or gas in the pipeline.
Show on Pipe
Controls the use of flow arrows that are plotted directly on the pipe. Their purpose is to show the
flow direction of fluid or gas in the pipeline. The size of the flow arrow is controlled by the Scale
setting.
True - Show flow arrows on pipe on the isometric drawing.
False - Suppress the display of flow arrows on pipe.
You can generate this type of flow arrow only if the relevant information is included in the
input pipeline data file.
You can also use a separate type of flow arrow that is plotted alongside in-line fittings, either
as well as, or instead of, the one output on pipe.
Defines:
Option Switch -112, Pos 1-3
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowFlowArrows
Show on Components
Controls the use of flow arrows that are plotted alongside certain types of in-line components.
Their purpose is to show the fluid or gas flow direction in a pipeline.
True - Display flow arrows. This is the default setting.
False - Suppress the display of flow arrows.
Defines:
Option Switch -17, Pos 1
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowCptFlowArrows
Scale
Scales flow arrows that are plotted directly on the pipe.
Type a value in the range 5 to 15 to plot pipeline flow arrows at an alternative scale factor. A
value of 5 produces smaller arrows, 15 larger.
You can generate this type of flow arrow only if the relevant information is included in the
input pipeline data file.
You can also use a separate type of flow arrow, which is plotted alongside in-line fittings,
either as well as or instead of, the flow arrow annotation output on pipe.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.FlowArrowScale
255
Ghost Gap
Length
Controls the plotted length of a ghost gap element. A ghost gap element is a physical gap on the
plotted isometric that can be used when generating individual pipeline isometrics, or as a link
between related, but unconnected, pipelines on a system type isometric.
Specify a minimum gap dimension in whole millimeters, or type 0 to use the normal minimum
gap as controlled by ISOGEN. This is the default setting.
The smallest allowable value is 18 mm, and the largest allowable value is 60 mm.
The software defaults to using the appropriate maximum value if it detects a setting outside
these limits.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.GhostGapDimension
Alternative Texts
Nominal Size
Denotes the pipe nominal size. By setting the AText to blank, the nominal size message is
suppressed. Using the question mark (?) character determines the format used for outputting
the nominal size message. The default value is ? NS.
256
AText ID:
-207
? Value:
Pipe nominal size
$ Supported:
Yes

Equipment Connection
Denotes CONNected TO where a pipeline branch end is connected to an equipment nozzle.
The default value is CONN. TO.
AText ID:
-208
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Pipeline Connection
Denotes CONTinued ON at the point where a pipeline/branch end is continued onto another
drawing. Used in conjunction with END-CONNECTION type record. Also used with AText -255
(Drawing Label) to create a CONT. ON DRG 2 type message when a pipeline is split across
multiple drawings (isometric drawing area and material list overflow).For more information, see
Alternative Texts (on page 283) in Drawing Area > Text. The default value is CONT. ON.
AText ID:
-209
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Continued From
Denotes CONTinued FROM. This message is plotted when a pipeline is split onto two or more
drawings, such as CONT. FROM DRG 1.
The text DRG comes from AText -255 (Drawing Label).
AText ID:
-276
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Continuation Jacket
Denotes continuation of core pipe used on a jacket pipeline. The default value is CONT
JACKET.
AText ID:
-557
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
257

Continuation Core
Denotes continuation of jacket pipe on a core pipeline. The default value is CONT CORE.
AText ID:
-558
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Vent Callout
Plots an indicator that points to a vent position at any open-ended pipe. It is used in conjunction
with an END-POSITION-VENT type record. The default value is VENT.
AText ID:
-230
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Pipe Spec Label

Plots an identification message that points to any place in the pipe where the piping specification
changes. The name of the new specification is automatically indicted. The default value is
SPEC.
AText ID:
-232
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Start Point Message

Plots a user-specified start point message on the isometric drawing. Use the special characters
listed below to output information items as part of the message:
258
? - Output the system/pipeline reference (IDF record -25 or -6)
?? - Output the spool.

AText ID:
-235
? Value:
Various
$ Supported:
Yes

Drain Callout
Plots a message that points to a drain position on any open-ended pipe. Used in conjunction
with an END-POSITION-DRAIN type record. The default value is DRAIN.
AText ID:
-239
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Open Callout
Produces a message at any open-ended pipe. Used in conjunction with an
END-POSITION-OPEN type record.
AText ID:
-240
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Closed Callout
Produces a message at any open-ended pipe. Used in conjunction with an
END-POSITION-OPEN type record. The default setting for this AText value is blank.
AText ID:
-241
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Null Callout
Produces a message at any miscellaneous pipe end. Used in conjunctions with an
END-POSITION-NULL type record. The default setting for this AText value is blank.
AText ID:
-242
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
259

Pipe Spec Change Label
Indicates a piping material specification change. The content of the PIPING-SPEC type record in
the pipeline input data file is appended AText to form a composite message.
AText ID:
-286
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Insulation Spec Change Label

Indicates an insulation specification change. The content of the INSULATION-SPEC type record
in the pipeline input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message. The
default value is INSUL.
AText ID:
-290
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Tracing Spec Change Label

Indicates a tracing specification change. The content of the TRACING-SPEC type record in the
pipeline input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message. The default
value is TRACE.
AText ID:
-291
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Painting Spec Change Label

Indicates a PAINTING specification change. The content of the PAINTING-SPEC type record in
the pipeline input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message. The default
value is PAINT.
260
AText ID:
-292
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Misc Spec 1 Change Label
Reserved for user-specified AText. The content of a MISC-SPEC1 type record in the pipeline
input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message.
AText ID:
-293
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

AText ID:
-294
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

AText ID:
-295
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

AText ID:
-296
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
261

AText ID:
-297
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Personnel Protection Label

Indicates personal protection type insulation. Indication symbols having the symbol key NPP.
The default value is PP.
AText ID:
-349
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Reducing Elbow Label

Indicates a reducing elbow with symbol key ER** on fittings. The default value is REDUCING
ELBOW.
AText ID:
-350
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Pipe Summary Ft
Indicates unit type feet in pipe centerline length region. The default value is FT.
262
AText ID:
-360
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Pipe Summary Ft-In
Indicates unit type feet-inches in pipe centerline length region. The default value is FT-INS.
AText ID:
-361
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Pipe Summary Insulation Heading

Controls the output of insulation length. The default value is blank.
AText ID:
-386
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Pipe Summary Tracing Heading

Controls the output trace length. The default value is blank.
AText ID:
-387
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
ATexts -400 through -411 are used in the line summary area along the bottom of the
isometric drawing and can have their values changed or made blank. If the AText value is
changed, then its associated symbol is drawn. If set to blank, then the symbol is not drawn. In
these ATexts, the inclusion of the dollar sign character ( $ ) creates a forced line feed that
results in the text being plotted over two lines.
Traced Symbol Header

Plots text with the symbol for traced pipe in the Line Summary area. The default value is
TRACED$PIPE.
AText ID:
-400
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
263

Insulated Symbol Header
Plots text with the symbol for insulated pipe in the Line Summary area. The default value is
LAGGED$PIPE.
AText ID:
-401
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Support Symbol Header

Plots text with the symbol for supports in the Line Summary area. The default value is
PIPE$SUPPORT.
AText ID:
-402
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Compression Symbol Header

Plots text with the symbol for compression joints in the Line Summary area. The default value is
COMPN$JOINT.
AText ID:
-403
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Screwed Symbol Header

Plots text with the symbol for screwed joints in the Line Summary area. The default value is
SCREWED$JOINT.
264
AText ID:
-404
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Socket Symbol Header
Plots text with the symbol for socket welded joints in the Line Summary area. The default value
is SOCKET$WELD.
AText ID:
-405
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Field Weld Symbol Header

Plots text with the symbol for field welds in the Line Summary area. The default value is
FIELD$WELD.
AText ID:
-406
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Shop Weld Symbol Header

Plots text with the symbol for Fabrication or Shop welds in the Line Summary area. The default
value is SHOP$WELD.
AText ID:
-407
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
User Note 1
Represents any user-specified general information on the drawing frame. A typical example is
PULLED BEND RADIUS IS 3X NOMINAL PIPE BORE. No default text.
AText ID:
-408
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
265

User Note 2
Represents any user-specified general information on the drawing frame. A typical example is
PULLED BEND RADIUS IS 3X NOMINAL PIPE BORE. No default text.
AText ID:
-409
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Spool Numbers Note

Signifies how spool numbers are shown on the isometric drawing.
AText ID:
-410
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Part Numbers Note

Signifies how material list part numbers are shown on the isometric drawing.
266
AText ID:
-411
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Detail Sketches
Defines the characteristics of detail sketches on the isometric drawing. Options are also
available for local details sketches and information notes.
Topics
Settings .......................................................................................... 267
Local Sketches .............................................................................. 273
Settings
Specifies the characteristics of detail sketches on the isometric drawing.
Path
Defines the full path to the detail sketch folder containing SYM or DXF data or sets the location
of a DGN CEL file (cell library.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.Path
Fixed Position
Controls positioning of detail sketches along the top of the drawing border.
Select the checkbox to position detail sketches left to right along top of drawing border. For
normal detail sketch placement, where sketches run right to left along the top of the drawing
border, clear the checkbox
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.PositionFix
Format
Sets the format of the detail sketch symbols. In most cases, this setting agrees with the drawing
output format.
The format of the detail sketch, information note and, drawing output, must be consistent.
For example, if Format is set to DXF, then Note Format and Output Format must also be
set to DXF. These properties change automatically whenever the Output Format or
Template Format settings change.
The IGR setting corresponds with the Intergraph SmartSketch product.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.FileFormat
267

Position
Defines the location of detail sketches on the isometric drawing.
Default - Plots detail sketches along the top of the drawing. The horizontal positioning of the
detail sketches is controlled by the North arrow setting. Usually, ISOGEN displays the
sketches from right to left (Figure 1). However, if there is no North arrow, the sketches are
displayed from left to right (Figure 2).
Fixed - Plots detail sketches along the top of the drawing from right to left, regardless of the
position of the North arrow.
Local - Plots detail sketches as close as possible to the related pipeline component.
Overflow - Overflows detail sketches to a separate sheet.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.SketchPosition
Height
Sets the height of user-generated sketches. This setting must be the same for all sketches.
Type a value (integer or decimal number).
If drawing units are set to millimeters, the value should not exceed 50 mm.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.SketchHeight
268

Width
Sets the width of user-generated sketches. Type a value (integer or decimal number).
If drawing units are set to millimeters, the value should not exceed 50 mm.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.SketchWidth
Label Type
Specifies whether you want sketches ordered alphabetically (A, B, C...) or numerically (1, 2,
3...).
Alpha - Order sketches alphabetically.
Number - Order sketches numerically.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.LabelType
269

Label Layer
Specifies the layer on which the label text resides. For example, the label text in Detail A is the
letter A.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.LabelLayer
Colour
Sets the drawing color for the detail sketch. This value is expressed as an integer number
representing the color number as defined in the output drawing system.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.Colour
Label X
Provides the X-coordinate of the label text, relative to the bottom left corner of a sketch. Type
the required value.
The sketch origin is always at the bottom left corner.

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.LabelX
270

Label Y
Provides the Y-coordinate of the label text, relative to the bottom left corner of a sketch. Type
the required value.
The sketch origin is always at the bottom left corner.

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.LabelY
Text Font
Specifies a font corresponding to a font entry in the font information (FIF) file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.TextFont
Text Height
Specifies the size of the label text. Type a value (integer or real number). This setting overrides
Text Size.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.TextHeight
Text Weight
Controls the character thickness of the cross-reference text.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.TextWeight
271

Note Position
Specifies the location of informational notes.
Default - Plots notes along the bottom of the drawing.
Local - Plots notes along the bottom of the isometric, near the reference.
OverFlow - In the case of duplicate occurrences, only one copy of each unique information
note is output on a single isometric.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.NotePosition
Note Format
Specifies the format of informational notes, which refer to a pipeline, spool, or component in the
drawing.
The format of the detail sketch, information note and, drawing output, must be consistent.
If Format is set to DXF, then Note Format and Output Format must also be set to DXF. These
properties change automatically when the Output Format or Template Format settings
change.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.NoteFormat
Note Height
Specifies the height of the informational notes. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.NoteHeight
272

Note Width
Specifies the width of the informational notes. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.NoteWidth
Library
Opens the Detail Sketch Manager (on page 66), which allows you to place parameters on the
selected detail sketch so that correct relevant values, such as weld numbers, part number, and
angles, are displayed on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Configure a detail
sketch (on page 63).
You must use the Path property to set the full path location to the detail sketch
folder.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches
273
Local Sketches
Local Sketches
Stores the properties for local detail sketches and information notes. Data is entered using a
grid. Data is entered using a grid. To open the grid, click Show .
274
Identifier - Specifies the detail sketch or Information note string identifier. The following are
examples:
Detail Sketch - SK1.dxf
Information Note - note_N.dxf or note_S.dxf
For AutoCAD and SmartSketch, the file format extension must be shown in the ID, such
as SK1.dxf or SK1.igr.
For MicroStation, specify just the name of the sketch as found in the graphic cell library,
as in SK1.
Inclusion of _N - as in GenNote_N.dxf or GenNote_N - as part of the information note

name signifies a general note, which is output on every sheet.
Inclusion of _S - as in SpecNote_S.dxf or SpecNote_S - signifies a specific note, which

is only output on the sheet on which the component having this particular note attached
is output.
Height - Specifies a single value for the height of the detail sketch or information note in
millimeters.
Width - Defines the width of the detail sketch/information note. Type a single value in
millimeters.
Label X - Specifies the horizontal cross-reference position measured from the bottom left
corner of the detail sketch in millimeters.
Label Y - Specifies the vertical cross-reference position measured from the bottom left
corner of the detail sketch in millimeters.
Text Height - Sets the text height to be used. Type a value in millimeters or inches,
depending on the setting of the drawing units.
The value that displays on the Local Sketches icon is a count of how many attributes have
been defined for output in the user-defined cut list. The example below indicates that three
attributes are currently defined.
Click Hide
to close the grid.
Alternative Texts
Equipment Detail Label

Used on isometric drawings in conjunction with detail sketches on equipment. The default value
is DETAIL ?.
AText ID:
-442
? Value:
Detail Identifier
$ Supported:
Yes
Detail Sketch Label

Provides a cross-reference message for detail sketches. This AText appears on the drawing
part of the isometric drawing. The sketch identifying number or letter is edited in by the software
at the ? position. The default value is SEE DETAIL ?.
AText ID:
-456
? Value:
Detail Sketch
Identifier
$ Supported:
Yes
General Note Suffix

Denotes a delimiter/identifier in general note names. The default value is _N.
AText ID:
-541
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
275

General Sketch Suffix
Denotes a delimiter/identifier in general sketch names. The default value is _S.
276
AText ID:
-542
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Revision Clouds
Controls the output of revision changes on the isometric drawing.
Topics
Settings .......................................................................................... 277
Settings
Sets properties that control the output of revision changes. Revision output is triggered only
when the component and pipeline revisions match. During isometric drawing generation, the
software considers each component individually. When a revision match occurs, the component
is highlighted on the isometric drawing.
Enabled
Controls the output of the revision block to the data definition file (DDF). When the component
revision matches the pipeline revision, the revision output is triggered.
True - Output the revision block to the DDF.
False - Suppress output of the revision block.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Revisions.Enabled
Layer
Controls on what layer the revision box is placed. Type the number that corresponds to the layer
in the drawing system. The default setting is 0.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Revisions.Layer
Colour
Controls the color of the revision box. The default setting is the color associated with the Layer
attribute.
Type the index number that corresponds to the color defined in the drawing system.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Revisions.Colour
277

Distance
Controls the distance from the component centerline to the revision cloud.
Type a value in 1/10th millimeters. The default setting is 50.
This value should not exceed the setting of a standard leg length.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Revisions.Distance
Colour
Controls the fill color of the revision box when Enclosure Style is set to Polygon. The default
setting is the color associated with the Layer attribute.
Type the index number that corresponds to the color defined in the drawing system. For
example, for AutoCAD you can type 1 = Red and 2 = Yellow.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Revisions.Colour
Minimum Cloud Arc

Defines the minimum pitch of the cloud enclosure.
Type a value in 1/10 mm. The default setting is 20.
Setting this property is required only when you set Enclosure Style to Cloud.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Revisions.MinCloudArc
Maximum Cloud Arc

Defines the maximum pitch of the cloud enclosure.
Type a value in 1/10 mm. The default setting is 60.
Setting the property is required only when you set Enclosure Style to Cloud.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Revisions.MaxCloudArc
278

Enclosure Style
Controls the output of the enclosure type that surrounds the revision block to the Data Definition
file
Polygon - Highlight revised components with a polygon. This is the default setting.
Cloud - Highlight revised components with a cloud.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Revisions.EnclosureType
279
Text
Controls all aspects of the fonts that appear on the isometric drawing
Topics
Settings .......................................................................................... 280
Static Fonts .................................................................................... 282
Dynamic Fonts ............................................................................... 282
Settings
Defines the type of font and its size (including weight) for text that is output on the isometric
drawing.
Size
Specifies the size of the text characters on the drawing.
Small (2.1 mm) - Output small characters, 2.1 mm high.
Medium (2.5 mm) - Output medium-sized characters, 2.4 mm high. This is the default
setting.
Large (2.8 mm) - Output large-sized characters, 2.8 mm high.
XLarge (3.5 mm) - Output extra-large characters, 3.5 mm high.
XXLarge (4.2 mm) - Output extra-large characters, 4.2 mm high.
XXXLarge (4.9 mm) - Output extra-large characters, 4.9 mm high.
Or User - Output characters with a height defined by Custom Size.
Title block text, which is always output using large characters (2.8 mm) and material list
text, which is controlled by properties of the material list object, are not affected by this setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TextSize
Custom Size
Specifies a user-defined size.
Type a value in 1/10 millimeters (in the range 10-99).
Set this property only if Size is set to User.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TextSize
280

Font
Defines the font used when outputting text on the isometric. Use the Font list to select the font
type.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TextFont
Width
Specifies the character width when using a fixed-width font.
Type the value required (in the range 10-99) in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TextWidth
Weight
Specifies the thickness of the text.
Type a value as an integer in the range 10-99 in mm or inches
Set this property only if Size is set to User.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TextWeight
Isometric
Controls the output of dimension text and messages.
Select the checkbox to place dimension text and messages along a section of pipe in isometric
projection (oblique angle\slanted text). Text oblique angle is adjusted to be parallel to the
dimension standout direction. ISOGEN attempts to set a vertical dimension standout for
horizontal sections of pipeline wherever practical.
This feature is only available for DXF format output styles generated using the piping
object data (POD) file interface.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.IsometricText
281
Static Fonts
Controls the use of the ISOGEN font information (FIF) file. If required, it can be used to turn off
the use of fonts in the ISOGEN output files.
By default, there is always a path to the supplementary fonts file. If one does not exist, for
example, you delete it, it is recreated automatically. However, if you select Enabled, this setting
is persisted.
When importing a style, the Enabled property is turned off before import starts, and only
resets if there was previously a FONT-INFORMATION-FILE (or IDF -152 record) reference in
the imported style.
Enabled
Controls whether fonts are enabled. By default, this property is turned on.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Fonts.Enabled
Path
Specifies the ISOGEN font information (FIF) file. Type the full path location and filename of the
file. Alternatively, click Browse
, and navigate to the file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Fonts.Path
Dynamic Fonts
Defines the parameters of the user-defined fonts that are available for output on the isometric
drawing.
Dynamic Fonts
Controls the output of user-specified dynamic fonts on the isometric drawing. Data is entered
using a grid. To open the grid, click Show .
Number - Specifies the ISOGEN font number.

This value is used to cross-reference ISOGEN control options to determine which fonts
should be used on the isometric drawing.
282
The value that you enter must be 3 digits and cannot exist in the ISOGEN font
information (FIF) file (Fontstd.fif). The first 300 numbers are reserved exclusively for use in
the FIF file. As such, the value you enter must be 301 or higher.
Name - Specifies the name of the user-specified font.
The TrueType font name that you type enter must already be installed on the computer.
Type the name of the font exactly as it appears in the C:\Windows\Fonts folder.
To view a list of installed fonts, Open the Control Panel, and double-click Fonts.
Correction Factor - Specifies the factor by which the width of characters are adjusted so
that the font neither falls short of nor overlaps the boxes/gaps that are provided for the text
on the drawing. The default setting is 1.
Typically, this value is adjusted up or down by 1 or 2 after viewing the isometric
drawing output.
AutoCAD Style Name - Specifies the AutoCAD text style name.
Microstation Number - Specifies the MicroStation-specific index number of the required

font. This option is required only if you want to view the correct font on the screen.
Multibyte Width - Specifies the factor by which the width of all multibyte characters are
adjusted so that the font neither falls short of nor overlaps the boxes/gaps that are provided
for the text on the drawing. The default setting is 2.
Typically, this value is adjusted up or down by 1 or 2 after viewing the isometric
drawing output.
The value that displays on the Dynamic Fonts icon is a count of how many attributes have
been defined for output in the user-defined cut list. The example below indicates that three
Click Hide
to close the grid.
283
Alternative Texts
ATexts -244 to -249 are used to output directions in conjunction with other ATexts on
items that carry a direction setting on the component record in the pipeline input data file. The
appropriate direction as defined by ATexts -244 to -249 is appended to the specific fitting text to
make a composite message, such as DIAL FACE WEST.
X Coordinate
Labels the positive X coordinate. The default value is E.
AText ID:
-201
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Y Coordinate
Labels the positive Y coordinate. The default value is N.
AText ID:
-202
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
-X Coordinate
Labels the negative X coordinate. The default value is W.
284
AText ID:
-203
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

-Y Coordinate
Labels the negative Y coordinate. The default value is S.
AText ID:
-204
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Z Coordinate
Labels the positive Z coordinate. The default value is EL+.
AText ID:
-205
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
-Z Coordinate
Labels the negative Z coordinate. The default value is EL-.
AText ID:
-206
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Degree Symbol
Produces a software-generated degree ( ) symbol, which is output at all angle indicators
requiring a degree symbol (bends, falls, and so on).
AText ID:
-223
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
285

Primary +Z Label
Appends a primary direction as part of a composite message. The default value is UP.
For more information, see Alternative Texts (on page 180) in Drawing Area > Piping
Components.
AText ID:
-244
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Primary -Z Label
Appends a primary direction as part of a composite message. Used in conjunction with ATexts
-243 (PRIMARY FLAT DIRECTION), -278 (DIAL FACE CALLOUT), -280 (TAPPING), -281
(SLIP PAINT CALLOUT), and -282 (SIGHT GLASS CALLOUT).The default value is DOWN.
Components.
AText ID:
-245
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Primary +Y Label
(SLIP PAINT CALLOUT), and -282 (SIGHT GLASS CALLOUT). The default value is NORTH.
Components.
286
AText ID:
-246
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Primary -Y Label
(SLIP PAINT CALLOUT), and -282 (SIGHT GLASS CALLOUT). The default value is SOUTH.
Components.
AText ID:
-247
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Primary +X Label
(SLIP PAINT CALLOUT), and -282 (SIGHT GLASS CALLOUT). The default value is EAST.
Components.
AText ID:
-248
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Primary -X Label
(SLIP PAINT CALLOUT), and -282 (SIGHT GLASS CALLOUT). The default value is WEST.
Components.
AText ID:
-249
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
287

Drawing Label
Used in conjunctions with AText -256 to generate a drawing identifier of the form DRG n OF n in
cases where a pipeline is split into multiple isometric drawings. The default value is DRG.
AText ID:
-255
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Drawing Count Label

Used in conjunctions with AText -256 to generate a drawing identifier of the form DRG n OF n in
cases where a pipeline is split into multiple isometric drawings. The default value is OF.
AText ID:
-256
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Material List Separator

Acts as a separator between the pipeline reference and the spool identifier in the spool isometric
drawing identifier.
AText ID:
-274
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
System Reference Label

Indicates the system reference in a printed material list. This has the system reference
automatically appended. The default value is SYSTEM REF.
288
AText ID:
-336
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

View Direction Label
Labels the view direction arrow. The default label for combined, fabrication, erection, and normal
spool isometrics is N, while U is the default label for flat spool isometric drawings. If set as blank,
the viewpoint direction arrow is suppressed.
AText ID:
-339
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Edge of Pipe Indicator

Used to indicate edge of pipe dimensions. The default value is EOP.
AText ID:
-439
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Bottom of Pipe Callout

Used on the isometric drawing in conjunction with bottom of pipe text. The default value is
B.O.P.
AText ID:
-450
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Split Failure Message

Indicates that an unacceptable drawing split point has been found in tube. When used, the
message is output in the top left corner of each affected drawing. The default value is
UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT.
AText ID:
-452
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
289

NS Metric Units
Indicates the nominal size for metric bore units. For example, if set to mm, the output is 32mm
NS. If set to Blank, the output is 32NS.
AText ID:
-458
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Cut Out Label

Shows the location of where the material should be removed. The default value is CUT OUT?.
AText ID:
-477
? Value:
Unknown
$ Supported:
Yes
Unique Part Number Delimiter

Acts as a delimiter between the material list cross-reference identifier and the suffix that is
added as a unique component identifier in the style of Identifier (3.1, 3.2, 3.3, as opposed to 3).
The default value is the period symbol ( . ).
AText ID:
-539
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Additional Material Separator

Acts as a separator between part numbers when outputting dual numbers for associated
additional material identification on the plotted isometric drawing. The default value is /.
290
AText ID:
-545
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

I01 Extension Character
Acts as the first character of the drawing output file extension (used in conjunction with Drawing
Manager > Drawing File > Use I01 Style). The default value is the pipe character ( | ).
AText ID:
-546
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Underline Character
Acts as an character. The default value is the underline character ( _ ).
AText ID:
-547
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
291
Dimensions
Sets properties that control the display and format of dimension and coordinate data on the
isometric drawing. The Dimensions category includes the style groups listed below:
292
Dimension Style - Organizes a collection of properties that specify the dimension styles
that are output on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Dimension Style (on
page 294).
Piping Components and Features - Organizes a collection of properties that control the
representation of component dimensions on the isometric drawing. For more information,
see Piping Components and Features (on page 306).
Coordinates - Organizes a collection of properties that control the representation of

coordinate data on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Coordinates (on page
324).
Display Format - Organizes a collection of properties that control the display of metric and
imperial dimensions and angle data on the isometric drawing. For more information, see
Display Format (on page 330).
Skews and Falls - Organizes a collection of properties that control the representation of
such things as skews, falls, slopes, callouts, and tolerances on the isometric drawing. For
more information, see Skews and Falls (on page 337).
Reference Dimensions - Organizes a collection of properties that control the display of

reference dimensions on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Reference
Reference Planes - Organizes a collection of properties that define reference planes for the
Reference Plane Definition file (RPDF). These properties provide the ability to reference
grids for coordinate callouts on isometric drawings. For more information, see Reference
Planes (on page 354).
Click
settings.

See Also
293
Dimension Style
Controls the dimension styles that are output on the isometric drawing.
Topics
Standard Dimensions .................................................................... 294
Overall Dimensions ........................................................................ 295
Standouts ....................................................................................... 297
Dimension Location ....................................................................... 301
Dual Units ...................................................................................... 301
Additional Allowance ...................................................................... 302
Suppress Branch Dimensions ....................................................... 302
Vertical Legs .................................................................................. 304
Standard Dimensions
Sets standard dimensions.
Format
Controls the dimension format plotted on the isometric drawing.
Click Show
Basic - Plot ordinary string dimensions, support/message dimensions, and reference

dimensions on the isometric drawing.
Combined Erec/Offsh - Basic - Plot ordinary string dimensions. Do not dimension

separately erection pipe fittings (bends, elbows, tees, and so forth), support/message
dimensions and reference dimensions on the isometric drawing.
Composite - Plot composite dimensions together with support/message dimensions and

reference dimensions on the isometric drawing.
Combined Erec/Offsh - Composite - Plot composite dimensions. Do not dimension

separately erection pipe fittings (bends, elbows, tees, and so forth), support/message
dimensions and reference dimensions on the isometric drawing.
Support - Plot only support/message and reference dimensions on the isometric drawing.
Reference Only- Plot only reference dimensions on the isometric drawing. Suppress all
other dimensions.
Full String - Plot full string dimensions, support/message dimensions, and reference
dimensions on the isometric drawing. All components are dimensioned individually.
Pipe Only - Plot pipe dimensions, support/message dimensions, and reference dimensions
on the isometric drawing. Suppress fitting dimensions.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.Format
294
Overall Dimensions
Sets overall dimensions.
Style
Controls the use of overall dimensions. You can specify whether overall dimensions are plotted,
and if they are, which type.
Click Show
295
296
None - Plot no overall dimensions.
Across Branches - Plot overall dimensions across branches (tees, olets and crosses).
Stop At Branches - Plot overall dimensions that stop at branches.
Valves / Across Branches - Plot overall dimensions to valve centers and across branches.
Valves / Stop At Branches - Plot overall dimensions to valve centers, stopping at

branches.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.Overall
Break at Spools
Controls the output of overall dimensions across spool breaks.
True - Output overall dimensions across fabrication items only.
False - Output overall dimensions across component categories.

Overall dimensions to valve centers are only available to valves that have a spindle.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.OverallAcrossFabItemsOnly
297
Standouts
Use text size (2.8 mm)
Use the text size of 2.8 mm. When you select this property, Composite Standout and Overall
are not available.
Composite Standout
Controls dimension line standout distances for the conditions listed below. Composite
Standout is only available if Use text size (2.8 mm) is not selected.
String and composite dimensions that are normally plotted as the middle layer of multi-layer
dimensions.
Dimensioned messages, support dimensions and reference dimensions on the inner layer,
but only when Dimensions > Piping Components and Features > Supports > Standout
is not set.
Overall dimensions on the outer layer, but only when Overall is not set.
In the Composite Standout box, type a value that equals the required standout distance for
string and composite dimensions on the middle layer in mm or inches. In the example below,
Composite Standout is set to 18, so all dimension lines are 18 mm away from the pipe.
When you set the value to 0 (zero), which is the default, the standard dimension line standouts
listed below are used depending on the Text Size setting:
298
Small
String / Composite Dimension Standout = 12 mm.
Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout = 6 mm.
Overall Dimension Standout = 18 mm.
Medium
String / Composite Dimension Standout = 1 4mm.
Large
XLarge
XXLarge
XXXLarge
String / Composite Dimension standout = 22 mm.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.StandoutComposite
The software ignores values greater than or equal to 11 mm and substitutes the appropriate
standard dimension line standout distance.
The software uses values greater than 11 mm to set the dimension line standout distance
for string and composite dimensions on the middle layer. The inner dimension layer for
dimensioned messages, Support dimensions and reference dimensions are then be set to
0.5 x this distance, while the outer layer overall dimensions is set to 1.5 x this distance.
299

Overall
Controls the overall dimension standout in millimeters. Overall is only available if Use text size
(2.8 mm) is not selected.
Type a value in the range 0 and 99.
For no overall dimension standout, type 0.

Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.StandoutOverall
Vertical Standout
Controls the position of the standout dimension.
True - Position the standout dimension vertically, if possible.
False - Use normal standout rules. This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.StandoutVertical
300
Dimension Location
Controls the location of the dimension text in relation to the dimension line.
Above Line
Controls whether the dimension line is broken to make space for the dimension characters.
True - Use USA dimensioning style where the text is positioned on top of dimension line.
False - Use regular dimensioning style where the text is inserted into dimension line.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.USAStyle
Dual Units
Sets the units of measure output.
Double Units
Controls whether measurements are output in both imperial and metric units, or just one.
True - Output measurements in both imperial and metric units.
False - Output measurements in one type of unit only. This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.DoubleUnits
301
Additional Allowance
Sets the display of additional allowances on the isometric drawing.
Format
Controls how additional allowances are displayed alongside or as part of dimensions.
Click Show
Suppress - Display no additional allowances.
Dim + Allowance - Display dimension plus allowance.
Dim Includes Allowance - Add allowance to dimension. Select this setting only if you are
using a Spool isometric drawing style
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.AdditionalAllowanceFormat
302
Suppress Branch Dimensions

Controls the display of branch dimensions on the isometric drawing.
Nominal Size
Specifies a branch bore limit to suppress dimensions.
Type a value in the range 0-999 to suppress the dimensions of branches having a bore equal to
or less than the defined value. Value is in 1/16th of an inch or mm, depending on the bore units.
For example, the branch in the example below has a pipe bore of less than the value stated in
Nominal Size. Consequently, it is not dimensioned.
To dimension all pipe, type 0.
Nominal Size works in conjunction with Component Count, if defined.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.BranchBoreLimit
303

Component Count
Controls the dimensioning of branches based on the number of components. Branches with a
specified number of components are un-dimensioned.
Type a value in the range 0-99 to suppress dimensions for branches having a number of
components equal to or less than the specified value. Gasket and bolt entries are counted as
components. For example, the branch in the example below has six components: a weldolet, a
weld neck flange, two gaskets, a valve and a blind flange. In this example, Component Count
has been set to 7, so the branch has not been dimensioned.
To dimension all branches, type 0.
Component Count works in conjunction with Nominal Size, if defined.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.BranchCPTLimit
304
Any branch containing pipe (100 record), fixed length pipe (101 record), or pipe block (103
record) does not have branch dimension suppression applied to it.
Branch dimension suppression using this property does not apply to tapped branches.
Nominal Size and Component Count work independently of each other or together,
depending upon your requirements.
Vertical Legs
Sets the representation of vertical pipe dimensions.
Style
Controls how vertical pipe positions are indicated on the isometric drawing.
Click Show
Normal - Display normal vertical pipe dimensions, with elevations at intersection points
when the level changes.
Suppressed - Suppress all vertical pipe dimensions, replaced by elevations in the form of
text messages at all positions where dimensions would normally be output.
305
Elevation - Display vertical dimensions and elevations at all normal dimensioning positions.
Defines:
Option Switch - 119
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.VertOption
306
Piping Components and Features

Defines the representation of component dimensions on the isometric drawing.
Topics
Valves and Instruments ................................................................. 307
Angle / 3 / 4 Way Valves ................................................................ 308
Supports......................................................................................... 309
Set on Tees.................................................................................... 311
Tap Branches ................................................................................ 312
Tap Headers .................................................................................. 314
Teed Bends and Elbows ................................................................ 315
Gaskets .......................................................................................... 316
Welds ............................................................................................. 318
Penetration Plates ......................................................................... 320
Jacketed Pipe ................................................................................ 321
Curved Pipe ................................................................................... 323
Valves and Instruments

Valves and straight through instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to
their center points rather than to their ends, using either string or composite dimensions.
Click Show
to display graphical representations of the options listed below, and then specify
the appropriate settings. Select the valve, and then use the left arrow (
) and right arrow (
) to move the selected valve between the To End or To Centre columns, depending on your
project requirements. In the example below, compression, socket weld, flanged, butt weld, and
plain end valves will be dimensioned to their ends. Hygienic and screwed end valves are
dimensioned to their center points.
307

Limit
Specifies the bore limit. Type a value in the range 0-999.
If you set Limit and the valve is above this limit, the software generates end dimensions.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.ValveLlimit
Angle / 3 / 4 Way Valves

Sets the representation of dimensions for angle, 3-way, and 4-way valves on the isometric
drawing.
Non Linear Valves

Produces arrowed dimensions for angle, 3-way, and 4-way valve, and instrument legs.
Otherwise, the software prints a message.
True - Dimension angle, 3-way, and 4-way valves and instruments normally.
False - Dimension angle, 3-way, and 4-way valves and instruments using a message.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.NonLinearValves
308
Supports
Sets the representation of dimensions for supports on the isometric drawing.
Support Dimension Options

Provides settings that specify how support dimensions are output on the isometric drawing.
Don't show support dimensions
Don't show supports or support dimensions
Dimension supports with other components
Dimension supports separately
The properties listed below display only when you select Dimension supports
separately.
Format
String - Dimension pipe supports in string format.
Overall - Dimension pipe supports in overall format.
309

As Pipe Dimensions
Controls on which side of the pipeline supports are drawn.
True - Draw support dimensions on the same side of pipe as the normal dimensions.
False - Draw support dimensions on the opposite side of the pipe to the normal dimensions.
When As Pipe Dimensions is set to False, the software ignores any distance set by
Standout.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.SuppDimAsDim
Standout
Specifies the support dimension standout.
Type a value in the range 0 and 99. To set no support dimension line stand-out distance, type 0
(the default setting). This software default is used for all support dimensions.
The software ignores this property when As Pipe Dimensions is set to False.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.SuppStandOut
310

To Centre
Controls whether support dimensioning obeys the same rules as centerline pipe dimensioning.
True - Obey the same rules as centerline pipe dimensioning.
False - Obey normal string/overall values.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.SuppDimToCentre
Options
Defines selective support dimensioning.
Click Show
All - Dimension all supports.
Fabrication - Dimension only fabrication supports.
Erection - Dimension only erection supports. The example below shows only one of two
supports dimensioned. The support that is dimensioned has its category set to Erection.
Offshore - Dimension only offshore supports.
Erection and Offshore - Dimension only erection and offshore supports.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.SuppOptions
311
Set on Tees
Sets the representation of dimensions for set-on tees and tapped branches on the isometric
drawing.

Click Show
Centreline- Originate dimensions from the centerlines of the main run.
TapAndSetOnStartPoint - Dimension to the edge of pipe
TapStartPoint - Define tap dimensions only.

Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.TapBranchDimension
312
Tap Branches
Sets the representation of dimensions for tapped branches on the isometric drawing.
Tap on Pipe
Controls the dimensioning of tapped branches on pipe-type components, such as elbows, tees,
and pipe.
Click Show
None - Turn off dimensions for tapped branch dimensions. This is the default setting.
Full - Turn on tapped branch dimensions.
Pipe Only - Turn off tapped branch dimensions except for those on pipe and pipe-type
components.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.TapOnPipe
313

Tap on Component
Controls the dimensioning of tapped branches on actual fitting components, such as valves and
flanges.
Click Show
None - Suppress the display of tapped branch dimensions.
Full - Display dimensions for tapped branches as set for the main pipeline.
Pipe Only - Display dimensions for pipes and pipe type components (elbows, tees,
reducers, and so forth) only.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.TapOnCpt
314
Tap Headers
Sets the representation of dimensions for tap headers on the isometric drawing.
Tap on Pipe Fittings

Controls the dimensioning of tapping points on pipe type components, such as elbows/teed
elbows, bends/teed bends, tees, and crosses.
None - Suppress dimensioning of tapped branches on pipe fittings.
Full - Dimension tapped branches on pipe fittings.

Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.TapOnPipeFittings
Teed Bends and Elbows

Sets the representation of dimensions for teed bends and elbows on the isometric drawing.
Teed Bend Branch

Controls the dimensioning of tee bend/elbows.
Connection - Dimension tee bend/elbows from connection point.
Centre-Line Intersection - Dimension tee bend/elbows from centerline intersection point.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.TeedBendBranchDimension
Sets the representation of dimensions for pulled bends on the isometric drawing.
315

Show Separate
Controls how bends are dimensioned.
True - Plot separate dimensions for the pipe and bend sections of pulled bends.
False - Plot combined dimensions for the pipe and bend sections of pulled bends. This is
the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.SeparatePulledBends
Gaskets
Sets the representation of dimensions for gaskets on the isometric drawing.
Show
Specifies gasket dimensions. You can choose to not show gasket dimensions, to include the
dimension with the component, or to treat the dimension separately.
Click Show
None - Suppress gasket dimensions.
Gasket thicknesses are not included. The component dimension is indicated by the
presence of two leader lines.
316
Included - Include gasket dimensions with the component.
Gasket thicknesses are included. The component dimension is indicated by the

presence of only single leader lines.
The length of the valve has now increased by the thickness of the gaskets (2 mm in this
case) either side.
Separate - Dimension gaskets separately.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.Gaskets
317

Precision
Controls precise dimensioning of gaskets.
1 mm - Output gasket dimensions to the nearest millimeters.
0.1 mm - Output gasket dimensions to the nearest 1/10th millimeter
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.GasketDimPrecision
318
Welds
Sets the representation of dimensions for welds on the isometric drawing.
Show
Controls the dimensioning of welds.
True - Dimension welds.
False - Suppress dimensioning of welds.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.WeldDimensioning
Accuracy
Allows welds to be dimensioned to the nearest 10th mm.
Nearest mm - Dimension welds to the nearest mm.
Nearest 10th mm - Dimension welds to the nearest 10th mm. If the decimal place value is
zero, the dimension is output in whole millimeters.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.WeldDimensionAccuracy
319

Fab Welds in Pipe
Controls dimensioning of fabrication welds in pipe.
Show dimensions - Display dimension to fabrication weld. To show dimension to the

fabrication weld, select the checkbox.
Suppress dimensions - Suppress dimension to fabrication weld. Clear the checkbox to

suppress dimensioning.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.FabWeldsInPipe
320
Penetration Plates
Sets the representation of dimensions for penetration plates on the isometric drawing.
Pipes
Controls the dimensioning of pipes passing through penetration plates.
Dimension From Adjacent Plate Face - Dimension pipes passing through penetration
plates from adjacent plate face.
Dimension From Same Plate Face - Dimension pipes passing through penetration plates
dimensioned from same plate face.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.PipesThroughPenetrationPlates
321
Jacketed Pipe
Sets the representation of dimensions for jacketed pipe on the isometric drawing.
Style
Controls the dimensioning used for jacketed pipework on the isometric drawing.
Full - Display full jacket dimensioning.
Minimal - Display minimal detail.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.JacketDimensioning
322
Curved Pipe
Sets the representation of dimensions for curved pipe on the isometric drawing.
Style
Controls the dimensioning of curved pipe.
Message - Output curved pipe dimensions as a message.
Standard - Output curved pipe dimensions as a standard dimension.
Suppress - Suppress curved pipe dimensions.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.CurvedPipeDimensioning
Threshold
Defines the minimum radius at which bends are output as curved pipe on the isometric drawing.
Type a value in the range 0-99.
Curved pipe can be drawn only in primary planes.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.CurveThreshold
Angle Style
Message - Output curved pipe angles as a message.
With dimension - Output curved pipe angles as part of dimensions.
Suppress - Suppress curved pipe angles.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.CurvedPipeAngleStyle
Radius Style
Message - Output curved pipe radii as a message.
Suppress - Suppress curved pipe radii.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.CurvedPipeRadiusStyle
323
Coordinates
Controls the representation of coordinate data on the isometric drawing.
Topics
Display ........................................................................................... 324
Bends and Branches (Coordinates) .............................................. 327
Supports......................................................................................... 329
Heat Tracing .................................................................................. 329
Display
Specifies where coordinate data is displayed on the isometric drawing.
Show at Open End

Controls the display of coordinate data at the open end of pipe work and ISO TEXT are shown
True - Display the coordinates. This is the default setting.
False - Suppress the display of the coordinates.
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for open end is - 240; The default value is
Blank.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowOpenEnd
Show at Closed End

Controls the display of coordinate data for closed end of pipe work and ISO TEXT are shown on
the isometric.
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for closed end is -241; The default value is
Blank.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowClosedEnd
324

Show at Vent
Controls the display of coordinate data at vent positions and ISO TEXT on the isometric.
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for connections to vent positions is -230; the
default value is VENT.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowAtVent
Show at Drain
Controls the display of coordinate data at drain positions and ISO TEXT are shown on the
isometric.
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for drain position is -239.The default value is
DRAIN.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowDrainPosition

Controls the output of coordinates at tapped branch connection points. That is, the point on the
True - Display the coordinates.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowTapBrnchCoords
325

Show at Misc Position
Controls the display of coordinate data at miscellaneous positions and ISO TEXT is shown on
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for miscellaneous positions is -242.The default
value is Blank.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowMiscPosition
Show at Nozzle
Controls the display of coordinate data at connection to equipment nozzles and ISO TEXT are
shown on the isometric drawing.
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for connections to equipment nozzles is -208.
The default value is CONN. TO.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowEquipConn
Show Coordinates at Split Points

Controls the display of the connections coordinates at split points and ISO TEXT on the
isometric drawing.
True - Display a full set of connection coordinates in both drawings when a user-defined
split point is used.
False - Suppress the display of connection coordinates at split points. This is the default
setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowCoordAtSplitPts
326

Show Coordinates at Reference Item
Controls the display of coordinate data for referenced items is shown on the isometric drawing.
False - Suppress the display of the coordinates. This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowCoordAtRefItem
Show at BIP
Controls the display of coordinate data for break-in points (BIPs) on the isometric drawing.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowBIP
Suppress Jacketed Connection

Controls the display of coordinate information for jacketed connections on the isometric drawing.
To suppress the display of coordinates for jacketed connections, select the checkbox. Clear the
checkbox to display the coordinates. This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.SuppressJacketedConnection
327
Bends and Branches (Coordinates)

Specifies the output and display of coordinate data at bends and branches.
Style
Controls the output type for supplementary coordinates, that is, coordinates at bends or at
branches. You can choose output with arrows or witness lines.
Arrowed - Output coordinates and elevations as arrowed-out message type. This is the
default setting.
Witness lines - Output coordinates and elevations along witness lines.
This property does not apply to end connection coordinates. It also does not apply when
Show at Bends and Elbows or Show at Branches is set to Full.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.CoordType
Show at Bends and Elbows

Controls the display of coordinates and elevations at bends and elbows.
Click Show
None - Display no elevations and coordinates on the isometric drawing.
Elev at changes - Output elevations when changed.
Elev and Coords at changes - Output elevations and coordinates that have changed.
Full - Output a full set of coordinates.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.CoordOutputBends
Show at Branches
Controls the display of coordinates at branch intersections.
Click Show
None - Display no elevations and coordinates on the isometric drawing.
Elev at changes - Output elevations when changed.
Elev and Coords at changes - Output elevations and coordinates that have changed.
Full - Output a full set of coordinates.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.CoordOutputBranches
328
Supports
Specifies for which type of pipe supports, if any, coordinate data is shown on the isometric
drawing.
Supports
Controls the output of coordinates at different types of pipe supports.
Click Show
None - Suppress display of coordinates on all pipe supports.
Fabrication - Display coordinates at Fabrication pipe supports only.
Erection - Display coordinates at Erection pipe supports only.
Offshore - Display coordinates at Offshore pipe supports only.
All - Display coordinates at all pipe supports.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.CoordSupports
329
Heat Tracing
Heat Tracing Components
Controls whether coordinates are output on heat traced components.
Off - Suppress coordinates on heat traced components.
On - Output coordinates on heat traced components.

Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.CoordOutputHTCpts
330
Display Format
Defines the display for metric and imperial dimensions and coordinates and angle data on the
isometric drawing.
Topics
Metric Coordinates ......................................................................... 331
Metric Dimensions ......................................................................... 332
Imperial Dimensions and Coordinates ........................................... 332
Angles ............................................................................................ 333
Metric Coordinates
Metric Coordinates
Sets the format used for metric coordinates.
mm - Plot coordinates in millimeters, for example 1234.
m - Plot coordinates in meters (M.mm), for example 1.234.
10th mm - Plot coordinates in 1/10 millimeters, for example 1234.5.
th
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.MetresCoordinates
331
Metric Dimensions
Metric Dimensions
Sets the format used for metric dimensions.
mm - Plot dimensions in millimeters, for example 1234.
m - Plot dimensions in meters (M.mm), for example 1.234.
10th mm - Plot dimensions in 1/10 millimeters, for example 1234.5.
th
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.MetresDimensions
Imperial Dimensions and Coordinates

Imperial Format
Controls the format of imperial measurements on the isometric drawing.
Standard - Output using standard ft/in format: 6' 10.3/4".
Standard dash - Add a dash between the feet and inches: 6'-10.3/4".
Space dash - Use a blank space instead of a period ( . ) between inches and fractions of an
inch: 6'-10 3/4".
Stacked fractions with dash - Output stacked fractions with a dash: 6'-10".
Stacked fractions without dash - Output stacked fractions without a dash: 6' 10".
1DecimalPlace - Output decimal inches to 1 decimal place.
2DecimalPlace - Output decimal inches to 2 decimal places.
The Stacked fractions options only apply to MicroStation .DGN output.
Two additional options are available for controlling the format of pipe dimensions:
Use inches only - Plots dimensions in inches only
Use feet and inches if above nn inches - Plots dimensions greater than the
user-specified value (nn) in feet and inches. This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.ImperialFormat
332
Angles
Controls the output and display of angle information on the isometric drawing.
Style
Controls the output of angle information for bends and elbows in the pipeline.
All - Output all angle information on the isometric (including angles that are exactly 90- and
180-degrees.)
All except 90/180 deg - Output all angle information on the isometric drawing except angles
that are within 0.5-degrees of 90- and 180-degrees.
All except within 10th degree of 90/180 deg - Output angle information on the isometric
drawing unless when rounded angles are within .1-degree of 90- and 180-degrees.
None - Suppress angle information on the isometric drawing.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.AngleStyle
Type
Controls whether the angles output for bends and elbows are the included or deflected angle.
Deflected
Included
333

If Type is set, AText -396 is combined with the angle information and displayed on the
isometric drawing.
If Type is not set (default), only the angle information is output.

Until Type is set, the supporting graphic appears as shown below:
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.AngleType
334

Accuracy
Controls the accuracy at which angle data is output on the isometric drawing.
Click Show
Default - Output all angles to the ISOGEN default accuracy of 0.1 degrees with no trailing
zeros. For example, 80.16 is output as 80.2 degrees, and 80.01 is output as 80 degrees.
Nearest Degree - Output angles to the nearest degree.
Nearest 10th Degree (1 decimal place) - Output angles to the nearest 0.1 degrees.
Nearest 100th Degree (2 decimal places) - Output angles to the nearest 0.01 degrees.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.AngleAccuracy
335
Alternative Texts
Inch Label
Denotes the inch sign indicator is used in imperial dimensions, coordinates, and nominal size
outputs. The default value is ".
AText ID:
-237
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Foot Label
Denotes the feet sign indicator is used in imperial dimensions and coordinates. The default
value is '.
AText ID:
-238
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Length Indicator
Used on the isometric drawing in conjunction with dimension text on curved pipe and teed
reducer branches.
336
AText ID:
-273
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Included Angle Label
The default setting is blank. If Option Switch 65 is set to 1 and the AText ? character is
substituted by angle valve and combined with INC ANGLE text to indicate that angles displayed
for elbows and bends on the isometric are included (not deflected angles). The default value is
?INC ANGLE.
AText ID:
-396
? Value:
Elbow or
Bend Angle
$ Supported:
Yes
Metric Dimension Units

Allows the dimensional units of metric dimensions to be output on the isometric drawing.
AText ID:
-437
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
337
Skews and Falls

Sets properties that define the display and format of dimensions for skews and falls.
Topics
Style ............................................................................................... 338
Dimensions .................................................................................... 340
Hatching ......................................................................................... 342
Falls and Slopes ............................................................................ 343
Callouts .......................................................................................... 344
Tolerances ..................................................................................... 346
Style
Sets the representation of skews on the isometric drawing.
Skew Representation
Controls the method used to depict sloping (falling) sections of a pipeline that are skewed in the
horizontal plane.
3D box - Show the full 3D box or triangle.
2D Skew + Fall - Show the 2D skew box or triangle plus fall indicator.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewRepresentation
Skew 3D and 2D Mixed

Controls the display of 3D skew boxes and 2D skew triangles.
True - For a mixture of skew indication types, 3D skews are indicated with boxes, and 2D
skews are indicated with triangles.
False - All skew indications similar, as defined by Style.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewMixed
338

Overall
Controls how skew pipe sections containing branch connections are depicted in terms of the
skew indication on the isometric drawing. Such skews may be shown as either a single, overall
enclosure or as a series of separate box or triangle enclosures.
Individual - Depict skews with a series of separate box or triangle enclosures, one
enclosure per branch.
Overall - Depict a single overall skew.
Defines:
Option Switch - 97
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewOverall
Component Count
Optionally permits simple skewed branch legs to have the normal skew box/triangle enclosure
suppressed and replaced by a single pipe length dimension and a text message giving the
branch orientation.
When used to suppress the normal box enclosure, the value set represents the maximum
number of fittings permitted in the branch. Branches found to contain more fittings than this are
drawn with the normal skew box/triangle enclosure.
Type a value in the range 0-99. If you type 0 (the default setting), all branches are drawn with
normal skew box/triangle depiction. If you type a value in the range 1-99, the software
suppresses the skew box/triangle depiction on branch legs whose number of components is less
than or equal to the value set, and output an orientation message.
This property is available only on straight through branches. Any change in direction along
the branch automatically causes the software to default to normal skew box/triangle output.
Defines:
Option Switch - 70
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewMinCpts
Vertical Branch Style

Controls the drawing depiction method used when a vertical branch connection is made to a
sloping (falling) pipeline using a special zero length bend component. This special bend (which
has no length) is used to carry the angle between the vertical branch and the sloping pipeline.
Two drawing methods are available. One shows a small 2D skew box section between the
branch and the main pipe, while the other does not.
Where olets are used in such cases, a text message indicates the orientation direction if the
branch is not developed.
True - Show the short tee branch leg section of pipe skewed. Olets have an orientation
message instead of a skewed section. Both are dimensioned separately to the connecting
pipe. This is the default setting.
339
False - For no separate skew sections, the vertical branch is connected straight into the
main pipe. Olets do not have an orientation message. Both are included in a single inclusive
dimension.
In both cases the angle between the vertical branch and the sloping (falling) pipeline is
indicated.
Defines:
Option Switch - 68
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewInVerticalBranch
Dimensions
Sets the output and format of skew dimensions and skew angles on the isometric drawing.
Style
Specifies how skewed pipe sections are drawn on the isometric, along with the form of skew
dimensioning to be used.
Box - normal standout - Depict skew box with normal dimensioning.
Triangle - normal standout - Depict skew triangle with normal dimensioning.
Triangle - skew standout - Depict skew triangle with normal dimensioning. Uses the value
set in Dimensions > Skews and Falls > Standout.
Triangle - alternative - Depict skew triangle with alternative dimensioning. Actual

dimensions are positioned close to the sides of triangle with no witness lines.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewDimStyle
Standout
Controls the dimension line standout distance used on boxed or triangle skew dimensions.
Type 0 to use the dimension line standout setting defined in Dimensions > Dimension Style >
Composite Standout, except when Style is set to Triangle - Alternative. In these cases, the
default dimension position is 4 mm. Alternatively, type the value (real number) used as an
alternative dimension line standout in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing
units. Used when Style is set to Triangle - Skew standout.
Defines:
Option Switch - 100
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewDimStandout
340

Angle Style
Controls the output of skew angles on skewed section of pipeline.
Click Show
Both Angles With Arrowheads - Display both skew angles with arrow heads on the arc
radius.
Both Angles Without Arrowheads - Display both skew angles without arrow heads on the
arc radius.
Not Shown - Suppress output of skew angles.
With Arrowheads - Display a single skew angle with arrow heads on the arc radius.
Without Arrowheads - Display a single skew angle without arrow heads on the arc radius.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewAngleStyle
Skewed Falling Lines

Controls the output of a right angle indicator on skew triangles.
True - Output right angle indicators on skew triangles.
False - Suppress output of right angle indicators on skew triangles.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewTriangleRightAngleIndication
341
Hatching
Controls the output and appearance of skew hatching.
Show
Controls skew hatching.
True - Turn on skew hatching.
False - Turn off skew hatching.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SketchHatching
Spacing
Controls the spacing of the hatching lines in 1/10 millimeters. Type a value (in the range 0-10)
that equals the alternative hatch line spacing.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SketchSpacing
Cut Off
Specifies the hatch line length cut-off in millimeters. Type a value in the range 0-99. For
example, type 25 for a 25 mm cut-off value. In this case, hatch lines in excess of 25 mm long
are not be plotted. This gives a partial hatched effect.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SketchHatchCutOff
Gap for Pipe

Controls the physical size of the unhatched gaps (white space) to be left local to the pipeline.
Specify the value in the range 0-10. The default setting is 2.5 mm.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SketchHatchPipeGap
Gap for Inline Components

Specifies the gap left unhatched for in-line components in 1/10 millimeters. Acceptable values
are in the range 0-99. The default setting is 2.5 mm.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewHatchCptGap
342

Gap for Text
Specifies the gap left unhatched for dimensions and text in 1/10 millimeters. The default setting
is 1.5 mm.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewHatchDimText
Falls and Slopes

Defines the representation of falls and slopes on the isometric drawing.
Fall Representation
Specifies how sections of falling pipelines (downward slopes) are indicated on the isometric
drawing. This property determines the method of how the fall value is indicated numerically on
Click Show
None - Suppress falling line indication.
D deg - Output angle to nearest degree.
D.d deg - Output angle to nearest 1/10th degree.
D.dd deg - Output angle to nearest 1/100th degree.
deg.min - Output angle in degrees and minutes.
G grad - Output gradient to nearest grad.
G.g grad - Output gradient to nearest 1/10th grad.
G.gg grad -Output gradient to nearest 1/100th grad.
Incline~1/16th"/ft - Output incline to nearest 16th of an inch per foot.
Incline~1/100"/ft - Output incline to nearest 100th of an inch per foot.
Incline~1mm/m - Output incline to nearest mm per meter.
Incline~5mm/m - Output incline to nearest 5 mm per meter.
Incline~10mm/m - Output incline to nearest 10 mm per meter.
P% - Output percentage to nearest whole value.
P.p% - Output percentage to nearest 1 decimal place.
P.pp% - Output percentage to nearest 2 decimal place.
Ratio~5 (>1:30) -Output ratio to nearest 5 when greater than 1:30.
Ratio~5 (>1:100) - Output ratio to nearest 5 when greater than 1:100.
Ratio~1 - Output ratio to nearest 1.
Ratio~25 (>1:500)~10(>1:100)~5(>1:50)~2(>1:30)~1 - Output ratio according to the

following:
343
Nearest 25 when greater than 1:500
Nearest 1 in all other circumstances.
Symbol Only - Show only the Fall indicator symbol. Suppress the output of associated text.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.FallRepresentation
Cut Off
Defines the minimum slope treated as a fall. Slopes steeper than the cut-off value are shown
with a 2D or 3D box or triangle skew indication as appropriate.
Type 0 to use a 5 angle cut-off or its equivalent depending upon the type of indication selected
by Fall Representation. This is the default setting. Alternatively, type a value that defines a
cut-off number to suit the type of indication selected by Fall Representation.
For fall cut off of 5 Degrees, type 5 or 0.
For fall cut off of 1:11 Ratio, type 11.
For fall cut off of 9 Percent, type 9.
For fall cut off of 5 Grads, type 5.
For fall cut off of 1" Per foot, type 1.
For fall cut off of 88 mm per meter, type 88.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.FallRepresentation
Always set Cut Off to 0 when sloping pipeline indication has been suppressed by Fall
Representation.
344
Callouts
Sets the insertion of orientation direction references and messages on the isometric drawing.
Skew Orientation Reference

Controls the output of skew orientation.
Previous position - Output the orientation direction message showing rotation relative to
previous position.
Primary direction - Output the orientation direction message showing rotation from primary
direction.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.OrientationFrom
345

Olet Branch Orientation Message
Controls the output of an orientation message on undeveloped olet branches that are in primary
directions.
No message - Suppress output of an orientation message on the isometric drawing.
Create orientation message - Output an orientation message on undeveloped olet

branches in a primary direction.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.AdditionalAllowanceFormat
Tolerances
Specifies how the software handles dimensional and angular deviations in the pipeline input
data.
Difference Limit
Controls how the software interprets and acts upon small dimensional deviations detected in the
input pipeline data file. These deviations can lead to small, unwanted skews being generated on
the isometric drawing. Use Difference Limit to define a dimensional cut-off value so that the
software ignores any offset coordinate numerically below this value.
Use the default setting ( 0 ) for no dimensional offset tolerance. To set a dimensional tolerance,
type a value. For example, type 1.0 mm or 0.04 inch.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.MinOffset
346

Angle Limit
Controls how the software interprets and acts upon small angular deviations detected in the
pipeline input data. These deviations can lead to small unwanted skews being generated on the
isometric. Use Angle Limit to define an angular cut-off value so that the software ignores any
skew that is found to have an angular deviation below this value rather than treating it as a
skew.
Use the default setting ( 0 ) for no angular offset tolerance. To set an angle tolerance, type a
value in the range 1-10, such as 0.5 for 0.5-degrees.
Defines:
Option Switch - 115
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.MinAngleOffset
Alternative Texts
Fall Label
Denotes a FALLing (sloped) line. Used in conjunction with the Fall symbol. You can use the ?
symbol to determine the format used for outputting the falling line messages. The default value
is FALL ?.
AText ID:
-222
? Value:
Slope angle
$ Supported:
Yes
347

Fall Label (Ratio)
Denotes falling lines specified with a ratio, such as 1:10.
AText ID:
-224
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Fall Label (Percent)

Produces a system-generated percent symbol ( % ) used on falling pipelines specified with a
percentage indication.
AText ID:
-225
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Fall Label (Gradient)

Indicates a falling line specified in gradients. The default value is GRAD.
AText ID:
-226
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Fall Label (Metric Incline)

Indicates a falling line specified as an incline in metric units, such as millimeters per meter. The
default value is PER M.
AText ID:
-227
Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Fall Label (Imperial Incline)

Indicates a falling line specified as an incline in imperial units, such as inches per foot. The
default value is PER FT.
348
AText ID:
-228
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Skewed Branch Label
Identifies skewed branches in cases where skew box indication has been suppressed. A
software-generated direction is appended to this text to form a complete message. The default
value is ORIENTATION DIRECTION.
AText ID:
-287
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Horizontal Label
Distinguishes horizontal skew angles from vertical skew angles on the isometric drawing.
AText ID:
-548
? Value:
Skew angle
$ Supported:
Yes
Vertical Skew Label

Distinguishes vertical skew angles from horizontal skew angles on the isometric drawing.
AText ID:
-549
? Value:
Skew angle
$ Supported:
Yes
349
Reference Dimensions
Defines the display of reference dimensions on the isometric drawing.
Topics
Settings .......................................................................................... 350
Settings
Defines settings for reference dimensions.
Show
Controls the output of reference dimensions on the isometric drawing. Select the checkbox to
output reference dimensions.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowReferenceDims
Show Coordinates at Reference Item

Controls the display of coordinate data for referenced Items on the isometric drawing.
False - Suppress the display of the coordinates. This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowCoordAtRefItem
Name Style
Controls the physical size of the characters that are used for dimensions, coordinates, and
message text on the 'picture section' of the isometric drawing.
350
Default (Along Reference Lines)
1 Character Circular Enclosure
2 Characters
3 Characters
4 Characters
5 Characters
6 Characters
7 Characters
8 Characters
9 Characters
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.ReferenceNameStyle
351
Alternative Texts
ATexts -460 to -469 are used for the identification of external reference items when using
the reference dimension facility. Any associated text elements are automatically prefixed or
appended, as appropriate, to the specified AText element. The dollar character ( $ ) causes a
new line to be plotted and the question mark character ( ? ) is where the software edits the
element name to derive the full text string.
Ref Beam Label

Identifies horizontal steel-work element (SKEY=HST*). The default value is BEAM$?.
AText ID:
-460
? Value:
Reference item tag
$ Supported:
Yes
Ref Column Label

Identifies vertical steel-work element (SKEY=VST*). The default value is COLUMN$?.
AText ID:
-461
? Value:
Reference item tag
$ Supported:
Yes
Ref Building Label

Identifies the centerline of a building (SKEY=BLD*). The default value is ?$BUILDING.
352
AText ID:
-462
? Value:
Reference item tag
$ Supported:
Yes

Ref Equipment Label
Identifies the centerline of equipment (SKEY=EQU*). The default value is CL EQUIPMENT$?.
AText ID:
-463
? Value:
Reference item tag
$ Supported:
Yes
Ref Pipeline Label

Identifies the centerline of pipeline (SKEY=PIP*). The default value is CL PIPELINE$?.
AText ID:
-464
? Value:
Reference item tag
$ Supported:
Yes
Ref Floor Label

Identifies the specified floor level (SKEY=FLR*). The default value is ?$FLOOR.
AText ID:
-465
? Value:
Reference item tag
$ Supported:
Yes
Ref Wall Label

Identifies the specified wall position (SKEY= WAL*). The default value is ?$WALL>
AText ID:
-466
? Value:
Reference item tag
$ Supported:
Yes
Ref Grid Label

Identifies the project grid line (SKEY=GRD*). The default value is GRID$?.
AText ID:
-467
? Value:
Reference item tag
$ Supported:
Yes
353

Ref Misc Label
Used for miscellaneous user-specified elements (SKEY=XXX*). The default ? character causes
any identification name associated with the miscellaneous reference to be used when no other
AText setting is made.
AText ID:
-468
? Value:
Reference item tag
$ Supported:
Yes
Reference Point Label

Identifies reference dimension item coordinates. The default value is REFERENCE POINT.
354
AText ID:
-469
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Reference Planes
Defines reference planes for the Reference Plane Definition file (RPDF). The Reference Planes
options provide the ability to reference grids for coordinate callouts on isometric drawings.
Reference Plane Definition Files (RPDF)

If you are using reference plane definition (Dimensions > Reference Planes > Settings),
you must also set Location (Dimensions > Reference Planes > Settings to specify the
reference plane definition file location
The RPDF is an input text file, not an output file. The text file enables you to specify the vertical
and horizontal positions from which location points can be related. Relative locations in the
vertical plane (Z-plane) can be from the nearest plane or from the plane below. To control which
option the software uses, you must add one of the following entries to the RPD file:
NEAREST-A-PLANE or LOWER-Z-PLANE.
If you select Enabled, you must specify the location of the input data file. We recommend
that the reference plane definition file be located on a network share so that it can be used
by multiple client computers. The extension of the file is not important, but for recognition
purposes, you may want to use the extension .rpd.
If reference planes are enabled but no file is specified, the relative coordinates cannot be
called out in the isometric drawing.
Topics
Settings .......................................................................................... 355
Settings
Defines reference planes. The Reference Planes properties provide the ability to reference grids
for coordinate callouts on isometric drawings.
Enabled
Controls processing of the reference plane data. Select the checkbox to enable processing of
the reference plane data.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.ReferencePlanes.Enabled
Path
Specifies the filename and full path location to the reference plane definition file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.ReferencePlanes.Path
355

Coordinate Style
Specifies the reference plane coordinate style to be used in the Reference Plane Definition
(RPDF) file.
None - Suppress the display of coordinates.
World Coordinates - Return coordinates with respect to the global coordinate system.
Relative Coordinates - Return coordinates (on the isometric drawing) with respect to the
volume referenced in the RPDF.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.ReferencePlanes.CoordStyle
Coordinate Style at Location Points

Specifies the coordinate style used for location points.
None - Suppress the display of coordinates at location points.
World Coordinates - Return location point coordinates with respect to the global coordinate
system.
Relative Coordinates - Return location point coordinates (on the isometric drawing) with
respect to the volume referenced in the reference plane definition file (RPDF).
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.ReferencePlanes.CoordStyleAtLocationPts
356

Location Point Style
Specifies the style used for location points on the isometric drawing.
Special Text Symbol (****) - Show a box containing ****.
Square Ended Box - Show a box containing the contents of AText nnn, such as AText
-471 LOCATION$POINT?
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.ReferencePlanes.LocationPtStyle
357
Alternative Texts
The reference plane ATexts output the relative directions associated with reference
planes. Where applicable, substitute the ^ character with the reference plane name. Substitute
the ? character with the distance from the reference plane.
Sub Volume Label

Controls the output of sub-volume names at coordinate positions on the isometric drawing. The
default value is VOL ?.
AText ID:
-398
? Value:
Sub-volume name
$ Supported:
Yes
X Relative Coordinate
Identifies the positive relative position in the E/W plane. The default value is ^+?.
AText ID:
-443
? Value:
Ref Plane/Coord
$ Supported:
Yes
-X Relative Coordinate
Identifies the negative relation position in the E/W plane. The default value is ^+?.
358
AText ID:
-444
? Value:
Ref Plane/Coord
$ Supported:
Yes

Y Relative Coordinate
Identifies the positive relative position in the N/S plane. The default value is ^+?.
AText ID:
-445
? Value:
Ref Plane/Coord
$ Supported:
Yes
-Y Relative Coordinate
Identifies the negative relative position in the N/S plane. The default value is ^+?.
AText ID:
-446
? Value:
Ref Plane/Coord
$ Supported:
Yes
Z Relative Coordinate
Identifies the positive relative position in the U/D plane. The default value is ^+?.
AText ID:
-447
? Value:
Ref Plane/Coord
$ Supported:
Yes
-Z Relative Coordinate
Identifies the negative relative position in the U/D plane. The default value is ^+?.
AText ID:
-448
? Value:
Ref Plane/Coord
$ Supported:
Yes
Reference Plane Delimiter

An AText record has been assigned to be output as a delimiter between the relative direction
and its relative position. AText set to blank only outputs the relative position. The default value is
^+?.
AText ID:
-449
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
359

Location Point Label
Indicates a location point position on the plotted isometric drawing. If more than one is included
on any single isometric, a simple ID number is generated and output in the position indicated by
the ? character. The default value is LOCATION-POINT?.
AText ID:
-471
? Value:
$ Supported:
Yes
Location Point Identifier

Outputs a location point ID number on the drawing frame. It is only output when multiple location
points are included on a single isometric drawing. The default value is No.?.
AText ID:
-472
? Value:
Location Point ID
$ Supported:
Yes
Location Point of Label

Used as part of a location point position on the drawing frame. The default value is OF.
AText ID:
-473
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Location Point Above Label

Used as part of a location point position on the drawing frame. The default value is ABOVE.
360
AText ID:
-474
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Drawing Border
Defines drawing frame properties. The Drawing Border category includes the style groups
listed below:
Attribute Display - Maps ISOGEN attributes to attributes in the software and specifies the
X- and Y-coordinates for attribute placement. For more information, see Attribute Display (on
page 361).
Table Display - Stores the definitions of text used on the drawing frame. For more
information, see Table Display (on page 364).
Title Texts for Fixed Material List - Specifies user-defined text strings for plotting on an
ISOGEN-generated drawing frame. For more information, see Title Texts for Fixed Material
List (on page 371).
Click
settings.

See Also
361
Attribute Display
Maps ISOGEN attributes to attributes in the software and specifies the X- and Y-coordinates for
attribute placement.
Topics
Definitions ...................................................................................... 362
Definitions
Specifies the drawing frame attributes that are output during drawing generation.
Attributes
Defines the attributes plotted on the drawing frame. Data is entered using a grid. To open the
grid, click Show .
Many of the drawing frame attributes originate from the pipe runs in the model. During an
extraction, the software obtains the values for pipe run attributes from the run with the largest
NPD.
Attribute - Specifies the name of the attribute being defined. Select an attribute in the list.
Text Height - Sets the character height of the attribute text. Type a value in millimeters.
X - Sets the X-coordinate location of the attribute text in the title block. Type a value in
millimeters.
Y - Sets the Y-coordinate location of the attribute text in the title block. Type a value in
millimeters.
Font - Defines the font to be used. Select the appropriate font in the Font list.
Barcode - Specifies the barcode standard. Type the number that corresponds to the
appropriate barcode.
362
1 - Barcode 39
2 - Barcode 25
3 - Barcode 25 Interleaved
Text Width - Sets the character width of the attribute text. Type a value in millimeters.
Justification - Sets the alignment of the text on the drawing frame. Specify Left, Right, or
Centre.
In many CAD or graphics packages, the standard behavior for text justification is within a
pseudo box requiring at least two points. The size of the pseudo box determines the location
of the text based on the Justification setting. In the example below, the pipe symbol ( | )
represents the left and right borders of the pseudo box.
However, the Justification setting in ISOGEN revolves around a single X,Y point. For each
scenario, ISOGEN uses the X,Y point as the focal point for text placement so that the actual
text string aligns accordingly. In the example below, the caret symbol ( ^ ) represents the
X.Y point.
Layer - Identifies the layer to which the definition is applied. Select the required number in
the list.
Colour - Type the number that represents the color number as defined in the output drawing
system (MicroStation or AutoCAD).
Rotation Angle - Defines the angle of rotation in degrees clockwise.
Text Weight - Controls the character thickness. Type a value between 1 and 9. Used only
for MicroStation.
The value that displays on the Attributes icon is a count of how many drawing frame
attributes have been defined. The example below indicates the 15 attributes are currently
defined.
Click Hide
to close the grid.
363
Table Display
Stores the definitions of text used on the drawing frame and the properties for symbol shape
positioning.
Topics
Attribute Table ............................................................................... 364
Symbol Table ................................................................................. 365
Attribute Table
Stores the definitions of text used on the drawing frame.
Table Attributes
Defines the text that appears in the drawing frame. Data is entered using a grid. To open the
grid, click Show .
364
Attribute - Specifies the name of the attribute being defined. Select the attribute in the list.
Text Height - Sets the character height of the table text. Type a value in millimeters.
X - Sets the X-coordinate location of the attribute text in the title block. Type a value in
millimeters.
Y - Sets the Y-coordinate location of the attribute text in the title block. Type a value in
millimeters.
Font - Defines the font to be used. Select the appropriate font in the Font list.
Barcode - Specifies the barcode standard. Type the number that corresponds to the
appropriate barcode.
1 - Barcode 39
2 - Barcode 25
3 - Barcode 25 Interleaved
Text Width - Sets the character width of the table text. Type a value in millimeters.
Justification - Sets the alignment of the text. Select Centre, Left, or Right.
Layer - Identifies the layer to which the definition is applied. Select a number in the list.
Colour - Type the number that represents the color number as defined in the output drawing
system (MicroStation or AutoCAD).
Rotation Angle - Defines the angle of rotation in degrees clockwise.
Text Weight - Controls the character thickness. Type a value between 1 and 9. Used for
MicroStation only.
Column Count - Specifies the number of columns in the table.
Direction - Controls the table layout. Select Horizontal or Vertical in the list.
Row Count - Sets the number of lines in the table.
X Spacing - Specifies the table offset dimension in the X (horizontal) direction. Type a value
in millimeters. You can enter a negative number.
Y Spacing - Specifies the table offset dimension in the Y (vertical) direction. Type a value in
millimeters. You can enter a negative number.
The value that displays on the Table Attributes icon is a count of how many table attributes
have been defined. The example below indicates the three attributes are currently defined.
Click Hide
to close the grid.
Symbol Table
Defines the properties for symbol shape frame positioning. These properties allow symbol
shapes, which could only be displayed on the standard drawing frame, to be positioned on to a
user-specified backing sheet.
Visible
Controls whether symbol shape frame positioning is used. Select the checkbox, to write the
definitions in the symbol table to the data definition (DDF) file, which switches on the facility.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.Visible
Drawing Layer
Sets the drawing layer for symbol shape positioning. Type a value in the range 1-50.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrames.SymbolTable.DrawingLayer
365

Layout
Controls whether the table is in a horizontal, vertical, or multiple style.
SingleVertical - Defines a single vertical table. Data items are output vertically under their
relevant heading.
SingleHorizontal - Defines a single horizontal table. Data items are output horizontally to
the right of their relevant headings.
MultipleVertical - Defines a multiple vertical table. Layout of data items is across and down.
MultipleHorizontal - Defines a multiple horizontal table. Layout of data items is down and
across.
The number of columns that are output is determined by the Max rows setting.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrames.SymbolTable.Layout
366

Start X
Defines the bottom left-hand X position of the first symbol shape. Type a value in millimeters or
inches (as a real number).
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.StartX
Start Y
Defines the bottom left-hand Y position of the first symbol shape. Type a value in millimeters or
inches (as a real number).
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.StartY
Horizontal Spacing
Sets the horizontal spacing required between each column of the symbol shape output when the
table is horizontally formatted or two dimensional. Type a value in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.HorizontalSpacing
Vertical Spacing
Sets the vertical spacing required between each row of the symbol shape output when the table
is vertically formatted or two dimensional. Type a value in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.VerticalSpacing
Maximum Columns
Defines the maximum number of columns before a new row is started when using multiple
tables or the maximum number of entries for a single horizontal table.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.MaxColumns
Maximum Rows
Defines the maximum number of rows before a new column is started when using multiple
tables or the maximum number of entries when the table is vertical.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.MaxRows
367

Symbol Scale
Specifies a single value for the percentage symbol scale factor. This property is used to control
the scaling of symbol shapes.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.SymbolScale
Symbol Selection
Controls whether to output all the symbols that are defined or only those that are used on the
drawing.
Fixed - All the symbols defined are output.
Dynamic - Only those symbols which are used on the drawing are output.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.SymbolSelect
368

Symbol List
Specifies the symbols and associated text to be output. Each line must contain the symbol name
and associated text separated by a space, as shown in the examples below:
O1HG Pipe Support
WS Site Weld
WW Workshop Weld
TRACING Tracing
LAGGING Lagging
Click Show
. The software updates the style and displays the specified text under Symbol List, as
shown below.
To close the text box, click Hide
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.SymbolList
Pipe Length
Specifies a single value for the length of pipe (including symbols) with a maximum value of 15
mm or 0.5 inches. A negative value ( -1 ) suppresses the output of pipe.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.PipeLength
369

Text Font
Specifies a font number that corresponds to a font entry in the font information file (FIF). Select
the font type in the Text Font list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.TextFont
Text Offset X
Specifies a single value for the horizontal movement from the symbol origin to the text origin.
Type a value (real number) in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.TextOffsetX
Text Offset Y
Specifies a single value for the vertical movement from the symbol origin to the text origin. Type
a value (real number) in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.TextOffsetY
Text Height
Specifies the text height to be used. Type a value (real number) in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.TextHeight
Text Width Factor

Specifies the text width as a percentage of the text height used for output of the cut list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.TextWidthFactory
Text Weight
Controls the character thickness. Specify a value between 1 and 9. Used only for MicroStation.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.TextWeight
370
Title Texts for Fixed Material List

Specifies user-defined text strings for plotting on an ISOGEN-generated drawing frame.
Topics
Title Texts ...................................................................................... 371
Title Texts
Specifies user-defined text strings for plotting on an ISOGEN-generated drawing frame
Headings
Defines the title text. Data is entered using a grid. To open the grid, click Show
Title Text - Contains the text for each title line.
The value that displays on the Headings icon is a count of how many text strings have been
defined. The example below indicates the three text strings are currently defined.
Click Hide
to close the grid.
371
Materials
Defines properties that control the position, format, and contents of the parts list. The Materials
category includes the style groups listed below:
372
Drawing Material List - Organizes a collection of properties that define the layout and
content of the three material list formats: user-defined, variable, and fixed. For more
information, see Drawing Material List (on page 373).
Part Numbers - Organizes a collection of properties that define the representation of part
numbers on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Part Numbers (on page 421).
Accumulation - Organizes a collection of properties that control the accumulation of

materials and components on the material list. For more information, see Accumulation (on
page 428).
Joints and Assemblies - Organizes a collection of properties that control the assignment of
identifiers to joints and the sequencing of end connection identifiers. For more information,
see Joints and Assemblies (on page 431).
Text - Organizes a collection of AText listings that control plotted material and cut pipe list
heading text. For more information, see Text (on page 437).
Reports - Organizes a collection of properties that define the content and format of the
material control file, printed material list, and the Neutral report. For more information, see
Reports (on page 448).
Click
settings.

Drawing Material List

Defines the content and format of the ISOGEN material list. Three material list formats are
available: user-defined, variable, and fixed.
Topics
Settings .......................................................................................... 373
User Defined .................................................................................. 382
User Defined Columns................................................................... 392
User Defined Remarks .................................................................. 392
User Defined Spool Table .............................................................. 394
Variable .......................................................................................... 398
Variable Columns .......................................................................... 403
Fixed .............................................................................................. 403
Material Group Transfers ............................................................... 407
SKEYS Defined as Instruments ..................................................... 408
Settings
Sets options for controlling the position, format, and contents of the parts list.
Material List
Controls the display of the material list.
Select the checkbox to plot the material list. To turn off all material list types, except the material
control file and cut list, clear the checkbox. The software controls these files separately.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.Visible
Active List
Defines which of the three available material list styles to output. If Drawing Manager >
Drawing Generation > Overview > Drawing Frame is not selected, you must set Active List
to Fixed.
Fixed - Output a fixed layout format. This is the default setting. For more information, see
Fixed (on page 403).
UserDefined - Output a user-defined format. For more information, see User Defined (on
page 382).
Variable - Output a variable layout format. For more information, see Variable (on page
398).
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.ActiveList
373

Text Font
Specifies a font corresponding to a font entry in the font information file. Select the appropriate
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.TextFont
Bolt Length
Controls the units used for bolt lengths.
As Drawing - Use the Drawing Manager > Drawing Generation > Units > Pipes and
Fittings setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.BoltLengthUnits
Bolt Diameter
Controls the units used for bolt diameters.
As Drawing - Use the Drawing Manager > Drawing Generation > Units > Pipes and
Fittings setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.BoltDiameterUnits
374

Display SmallxLarge NS
Specifies a table of record IDs and SKEYs, which are output with the nominal size in small x
large order.
Click Show
to open a free-form text box. Type the data in the text box using the required
format (Record identifier + optional SKEY). When finished, click
. The software updates
the style and displays the specified text under the Display SmallxLarge NS property label.
Click Hide
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.SmallxLargeNX
Material List Splitting

Controls the plotting of the material list when a pipeline splits onto two or more drawings.
Per Drawing - Plot the material list per isometric drawing.
Per Pipeline - Plot the material list per pipeline.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.MaterialListSplitting
375

Material List Overflow
Controls the overflow of the material list to subsequent drawings.
Same Sheet - Give automatic overflow onto secondary material list plotted alongside the
first. This creates a wider non-standard drawing size.
Continuation Sheet - Give a second "dummy" isometric containing the overflow material list
but no pipeline graphics. This isometric is allocated the next drawing (sheet) identifier in the
sequence.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.MaterialListOverflow
Sheet Number Format

Controls the number of characters output for the sheet number. If the sheet number output has
less than the requested number of characters, leading zero(s) are inserted where appropriate.
0 - No leading zeros
1 Character - Fixed number of characters
2 Characters
3 Characters
4 Characters
5 Characters
6 Characters
7 Characters
8 Characters
9 Characters
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.SheetNumberFormat
Overflow Sheet Numbering

Controls the numbering of overflow drawing sheets.
Next Identifier - The second isometric drawing has the next sheet number in the sequence.
Alpha suffix - The second isometric drawing has the same sheet number as the first one,
with a character suffix, for example, A, B, and so forth.
This property applies only when you set Material Sheet Overflow to Continuation
Sheet, in order to produce a second sheet displaying the material list continuation.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.OverflowDrawingID
376

Materials by Spool
Controls the splitting of fabrication materials by spool on the material list.
Select the checkbox to fabricate materials as normal under the Fabrication section of material
list. To group spool materials separately, with part numbering on a per spool basis, clear the
checkbox
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.MaterialsBySpool
Spools Match Full

Controls whether part numbers on a spool isometric drawing match those on the full isometric
drawing .
Select the checkbox to match spool isometric material part number to full isometric part
numbers. For spool isometric material part numbers to be independent of full isometric part
numbers, clear the checkbox.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.SpoolMatchFull
Linear Quantity Style

Specifies the style for linear quantities in the material list.
n. n M n. n ft - Output pipe length in the form or meters (M) or feet: 1 decimal place, as in
10.4 M or 10.4'.
n MM n ft n in - Output pipe length in the form of millimeters(MM) or feet and inches, as in

1040 MM or 10'5".
n. nnn M n. nnn ft - Output pipe length in the form meters or feet: 3 decimal places, as in
1.045 M or 10.375'.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.LinearQuantityStyle
Item Code Length

Sets the number of characters in the material list item code. Acceptable values are in the range
6-29.
The maximum number of item code characters is 29.
Changes in this property cause the material list to be correspondingly wider or narrower.
Defines:
Option Switch - 28
I-Configure - MaterialList.ItemCodeLength
377

Weight Style
Controls the output of component weights.
Total - Output each component weight as a total weight. Example: quantity x unit weight.
Individual - Output each component weight as the individual weight of the component type.
The quantity is not multiplied by the unit weight.
None - Suppress the output of component weight on material lists.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.WeightsStyle
Wastage Area 1
Controls any additional pipe quantity that needs to be added to the material list to allow for
wastage during fabrication.
The property is one of nine that holds a percentage factor that is used to calculate pipe wastage
allowances. Each of the nine properties is applicable to a particular model area, which can be
identified in the input pipeline data file.
0 - Use a percentage multiplication factor of zero. This setting allows you to obtain no
increase in pipe material quantity even though a value may have been included in the input
pipeline data file.
1 - Use a percentage multiplication factor of 1. This value does not increase the basic
wastage percentage that can be set in application records in the input pipeline data file. This
is the default setting
Value - Use the specified value as an additional factor that is multiplied by the basic
wastage factor (input on appropriate records in the pipeline data input file) to arrive at a final
wastage factor percentage. For example, a value of 2 gives a final percentage of twice the
value of any figure included in the input pipeline data file.
Defines:
Option Switch - 43
I-Configure - MaterialList.WastageArea1
Wastage Area 2
378
pipeline data file.
Defines:
Option Switch - 44
Wastage Area 3
pipeline data file.
Defines:
Option Switch - 45
Wastage Area 4
pipeline data file.
379
Defines:
Option Switch - 46
Wastage Area 5
pipeline data file.
Defines:
Option Switch - 47
Wastage Area 6
380
pipeline data file.
Defines:
Option Switch - 48
Wastage Area 7
pipeline data file.
Defines:
Option Switch - 49
Wastage Area 8
pipeline data file.
381
Defines:
Option Switch - 50
Wastage Area 9
pipeline data file.
Defines:
Option Switch - 51
382
User Defined
Sets options for the user-defined material list format. The user-defined material list offers more
flexibility than the other two material list styles.
This style of material list requires a backing sheet.
Type
Controls the type of material list.
Normal - The software does not create a special type of material list.
Special - Give every item a separate entry except gaskets and bolts, which are
accumulated. Pulled bends get U prefixes, and welds have W or B prefixes.
Normal with alpha pointers - The software does not create a special type of material list.
The software uses an alpha system of material list pointers (A, B, C...) instead of the default
numeric system.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.MLType
Active Section
Defines the number of sections in the material list.
1- Use the OneSection object properties for material list layout.
2 - Use the TwoSection object properties for material list layout.
3 - Use the ThreeSection object properties for material list layout.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.ActiveSection
Start X
Defines the bottom left X position of the first line of the material list. All X positions in the column
are relative to this point
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.StartX
Start Y
Defines the bottom left Y position of the first line of the material list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.StartY
383

Vertical Spacing
Specifies the vertical spacing (in millimeters) between the lines of data. The vertical spacing
applies to all sections in the material list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.VerticalSpacing
Show Group Headings

Specifies whether group headings are displayed. Select the checkbox to display group
headings.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.ShowGroupHeadings
Group Heading X
Defines the X position (in millimeters) for the Group heading.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.GroupHeadingX
Underline Group Headings

Controls whether group headings are underlined. Select the checkbox to underline the group
heading.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.GroupUnderline
Show Category Headings

Specifies whether or not the category headings appear. Select the checkbox to display group
category headings.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.ShowCategoryHeadings
Category Heading X
Defines the displacement in X from Start X for the category heading. Type a value in
millimeters.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.CategoryHeadingX
384

Underline Category Headings
Controls whether category headings are underlined. Select the checkbox to underline the
category heading.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.CategoryUnderline
Colour
Specifies a number that represents the color number as defined in the output drawing system.
Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.Colour
Drawing Layer
Sets the drawing layer for material list text. Type a value (integer) in the range 1-50.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.DrawingLayer
Show Remarks
Controls the appearance of a remarks list, as defined by the User Defined Remarks options. To
display the Remarks list, select the checkbox. For more information, see User Defined Remarks
(on page 392).
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.ShowRemarks
Unique Delimiter
Defines the character used as a delimiter when the file format is delimited. The possible
characters are:
Blank
Comma (,)
Semi-colon (;)
Colon (:)
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.UniqueDelimiter
385

Default Description Width
Defines the number of characters allocated for the width of the item description. Descriptions
exceeding this seize are wrapped to the following line.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefine.DefaultDescriptionWidth
Show Accumulated Pipe Data

Controls the plotting of accumulated pipe information in a material list containing
non-accumulated quantities. That is, for pipe only, it is possible to have both accumulated and
non-accumulated information in the same material list.
Select the checkbox to export the settings defined by Accumulated Pipe Position,
Accumulated Pipe Quantity, and Accumulated Pipe Description to the material list definition
(MLD) file. To suppress the export of the properties, clear the checkbox.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.ShowAccumulatedPipeData
Accumulated Pipe Position

Specifies the horizontal offset in millimeters or inches to the contents of Alternate Text 394.
The offset is from the material list Start X property.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.AccumulatedPipePosition
Accumulated Pipe Description

Specifies the horizontal offset in millimeters or inches to horizontal offset to accumulated pipe
description. The offset is from the material list Start X property.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.AccumulatedPipeDesc
Accumulated Pipe Quantity

Specifies the horizontal offset in millimeters or inches to horizontal offset to accumulated pipe
quantity. The offset is from the material list Start X property.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.AccumulatedPipeQuantity
386

Text Font
Specifies a font corresponding to a font entry in the font information (FIF) file. Select the font
type in the list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.TextFont
Text Height
Specifies the text height. The text height applies to all sections in the material list. Type a value
in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.TextHeight
Text Weight
Specifies the text weight. Type a value (integer) between 1 and 9. Used only for MicroStation.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.TextWeight
Text Width Factor

Defines the ratio of width to height of the text in the material list. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.TextWidthFactor
Content
Controls which category of components are listed on the material list.
Continuous - List all items in the material list. This is the default setting.
Fabrication - List fabrication components only.
Erection - List erection components only.
Offshore - List offshore components only.
Erection/Offshore - List erection/offshore components only.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MateriaList.UserDefined.OneSection.Content
387

Direction Down
Controls the direction in which the material list is printed with reference to Start X and Start Y.
Select the checkbox to plot the material list from top to bottom. This is the default setting.
For a three section material list, all sections must be in the same direction.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.OneSection.ListDown
Maximum Entries
Sets the maximum number of entries in the material list before an overflow sheet is generated.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.OneSection.MaxEntries
Section1 Content
Selects the category of data for the material list content in Section 1.
FABRICATION - List only fabrication components. This is the default setting.
ERECTION - List only erection components.
OFFSHORE - List only offshore components.
ERECTION/OFFSHORE - List only erection/offshore components.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.TwoSection.Section1Content
Section1 Down
Controls the direction in which the material list is printed with reference to Start X and Start Y.
Select the checkbox to plot data from the top down in Section1. To plot data from the bottom up,
clear the checkbox
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.TwoSection.Section1Down
Section1 Maximum Entries

Sets the maximum number of entries in Section 1 of the material list before an overflow sheet is
generated. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.TwoSection.Section1MaxEntries
388

Section2 Content
Selects the category of data for the material list content in Section 2. This property setting
cannot be same as Section1 Content.
FABRICATION - List only fabrication components.
ERECTION - List only erection components. This is the default setting.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.TwoSection.Section2Content
Section2 Direction Down

Controls the direction in which Section 2 of the material list is printed with reference to Section2
Y Offset.
Select the checkbox to plot data from the top down in Section 2. This is the default direction. To
plot data from the bottom up, clear the checkbox.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.TwoSection.Section2Down

Controls the maximum number of entries for Section 2 of the material list before an overflow
sheet is generated. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.TwoSection.Section2MaxEntries
Section2 Y Offset
Controls the Y offset for Section 2 of the material list with reference to Start X and Start Y Type
a real number in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.TwoSection.Section2YOffset
389

Direction Down
Controls the direction in which the material list is plotted with reference to Start X and Start Y.
Select the checkbox to plot data from the top down, select the checkbox. This is the default
setting. To plot data from the bottom up, clear the checkbox.
For a three section material list, all sections must be in the same direction.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MateriaList.UserDefined.ThreeSection.ListDown
Section1 Content
Selects the category of data for the material list content in Section 1.
FABRICATION - List only fabrication components. This is the default setting.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.ThreeSection.Section1Content

sheet is generated.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.ThreeSection.Section1MaxEntries

sheet is generated. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
390

Section2 Content
Selects the category of data for the material list content in Section 2. This property setting
cannot be same as Section1 content.
ERECTION - List only erection components. This is the default setting.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Section2 Y Offset
Controls the Y offset for Section 2 of the material list with reference to Start X and Start Y. Type
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialListUserDefinedThreeSection.Section2YOffset
Section3 Content
Selects the category of data for the material list content in Section 3 of the material list. The
default setting is OFFSHORE.
This property setting cannot be the same as Section1 Content or Section2 Content.
OFFSHORE - List only offshore components. This is the default setting.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A

Sets the maximum number of entries in Section 3 of the material list before an overflow sheet is
generated. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
391

Section3 Y Offset
Controls the Y offset for Section 3 of the material list with reference to Start X and Start Y. Type
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.ThreeSection.Section3YOffset
User Defined Columns

Specifies the data that is output for three user-definable lists: material, weld, and cut lists.
This must be used with a backing sheet, as the positions given are for the X coordinate
only.
Columns
Defines the columns that appear in the user-defined weld list. Data is entered using a grid. To
open the grid, click Show .
392
Attribute - Specifies the name of the attribute being defined. Select the required attribute in
the list.
Offset - Specifies the offset in millimeters from the Start X and Start Y settings. Type the
required value.
Maximum Chars - Sets the width of the column. Type a value of zero or greater.
Comment - Outputs a text comment for any definition contained in the previous columns. If
any text is entered in this field, it is output as a comment--preceded by a !--to the relevant
data or summary report file. In the example below, a text comment has been entered for the
part number, nominal size, item code, and quantity attributes.
The value that displays on the Columns icon is a count of how many columns have been
defined for the user-defined weld list. The example below indicates the 3 columns are
currently defined.
Click Hide
to close the grid.
User Defined Remarks

Contains the necessary data to define the position and properties of a Style3 Remarks box,
which is used to plot user-specified remarks attached to components.
Layer
Sets the drawing layer for material list text. Type a value in the range 1-50.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.RemarksBox.DrawingLayer
Start X
Specifies the X-coordinate of the starting position for the remarks box. Type a positive real
number in millimeters.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.RemarksBox.StartX
Start Y
Specifies the Y-coordinate of the starting position for the remarks box. Type a positive real
number in millimeters.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.RemarksBox.StartY
Maximum Entries
Controls the maximum number of lines of text that can fit in the available space used for the
Remarks box. When the maximum is reached, ISOGEN does not output any additional lines,
and a warning message is output to the Message file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.RemarksBox.MaxEntries
Maximum Characters
Sets the maximum number of characters allowed on each output line in the Remarks box. The
maximum number should include the RemarkIDType a value (positive integer).
When the maximum is reached, ISOGEN does not output additional lines, and a warning
message is output to the Message file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.RemarksBox.MaxCharacters
393

Vertical Spacing
Sets the text height used in the Remarks box. Type a positive value in millimeters.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.RemarksBox.VerticalSpacing
Text Height
Sets the text height to be used for the Remarks box in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.RemarksBox.TextHeight
Text Weight
Controls the character thickness. Type a value between 1 and 9. Used for MicroStation only.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.RemarksBox.TextWeight
User Defined Spool Table

Defines the settings for the spool table quantities, which can be output as part of a user-defined
material list.
Enabled
Controls whether the spool table settings are written to the material list definition (MLD) file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable
394

Data Offset X
Sets the X offset to the first spool quantities position in millimeters or inches, depending on the
setting of the drawing units.
All positions are to the bottom left of the first character.

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.DataOffsetX
Data Offset Y
Sets the Y offset to the first spool quantities position in millimeters or inches, depending on the
setting of the drawing units.

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.DataOffsetY
Column Offset
Controls the horizontal offset between each column of spool quantities on the material list. Type
a value in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.ColumnOffset
395

Header Offset X
Sets the X offset to the spool identifier position in millimeters or inches.

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.HeaderOffsetX
Header Offset Y
Sets the Y offset to the spool identifier position in millimeters or inches.

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.HeaderOffsetY
Layer
Sets the drawing layer for the spool table text. Type a value in the range 1-50.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.DrawingLayer
396

Maximum Columns
Sets the maximum number of spool quantity columns that can fit on the backing sheet.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.MaxColumns
Overflow
Indicates if automatic spool table overflow on to a second sheet is allowed. Select the checkbox
to allow overflow.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.TableOverflow
Output Lines for Pipe Length

Controls the number of lines used for output of pipe lengths. Used in conjunction with AText
-537.
The form of length output on the material list is controlled by the Linear Quantity Style setting.
However, in order to save space, it is possible to have a two line format. By default, Output
Lines for Pipe Length is set to 1, which uses the default Linear Quantity Style setting. If
AText -537 is being used, then Output Lines for Pipe Length must be set to 2.
AText -537 is used to indicate the new line by using the $ and the setting for the units
indication to be output, as shown in the example below:
-537$m
13.5
m
-537$mm
13500
mm
mm
-537$FT
19.5
Ft
Ft
-537$FT
13.5
Ft (instead of 13.5')
Ft (instead of 13.5')
Do not use AText -537 if pipe quantities are requested in Ft-Ins (13'-5") units.
If set, this AText takes over control of the units indication output on all styles of material list,
as well as allowing a new line indicator to force two line output. If it is not set, then normal
defaults apply.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.OutputLinesTube
397

Text Height
Sets the text height to be used. Type a positive number in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.TextHeight
Text Height Multiple

Sets the height of the text to be output in multiple line form on the material list. Type a positive
number in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.TextHeightMultiple
Text Weight
Controls the character thickness. Type a value between 1 and 9. Used for MicroStation only.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.TextWeight
398
Variable
Defines settings for the variable layout material list format. This format includes options to define
column headers. You can use either a user-defined drawing frame or the standard ISOGEN
drawing frame.
Type
Normal - Create a special type of material list.
accumulated. Give pulled bends a U prefix and welds a W or B prefix.
Normal with alpha pointers - Suppress creation of a special type of material list. The
software uses an alpha system of material list pointers (A, B, C.) instead of the default
numeric system.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.MLType
Layout
Specifies the material list layout pattern.
Standard - Produce the standard sectionalized type with group headings and component
sub-group headings.
Continuous - Produce a layout without headings and sub-headings.
This type of list is partitioned with horizontal dividing lines between the logical groups,
such as pipe, flanges, and fittings. If required, you can switch off the dividing lines using Show
Dividing Lines.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.Layout
Plot on Right
Sets the position of the material list.
Select the checkbox to print the material list on the right side of the drawing. To print the
material list on the left side of the drawing, clear the checkbox.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.RightSide
399

Show Dividing Lines
Specifies lines in the material list. This property provides a way to separate the different groups
in the material list when the list does not have headings and sub-headings.
Select the checkbox to display dividing lines between groups, such as PIPES, FLANGES, or
FITTINGS. For no dividing lines, clear the checkbox.
Show Dividing Lines works only when Layout is set to Continuous and Type is set to
Special.
Defines:
Option Switch - 23, Position 5
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.ShowDividingLines
Default Description Width

Defines the number of characters allocated for the width of the Item Description column.
Descriptions that exceed the limit are wrapped to the following line.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.DefaultDescriptionWidth
Line Spacing
Controls the line spacing distance on a plotted material list. This value is a ratio that applies to
standard line spacing. For example, a value of 90 reduces the line spacing, while a value of 110
increases it.
Type a value in the range 75-125. The default setting is 100.
Defines:
Option Switch - 29
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.LineSpacing
Insert Blank Lines

Sets whether the software inserts blank lines.
Select the checkbox to insert blank lines after single line entries in the material list. When the
checkbox is cleared, blank lines are not inserted following single line entries. This provides the
possibility of the material list being shorter.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.InsertBlankLines
400

Header Text
Specifies a text string for the column header.
Click Show
. The software updates the style and displays the text under the Header Text property
label.
Use the forward slash symbol ( \ ) to start a new line. To produce a vertical break, use the
pipe symbol ( | ).
Width is defined by the length of the last line, terminated with the pipe character (|). The
length of the last line should be at least as long as the total width of data to be displayed
below it.
Column description text in the Header Text text box must lie in the column bounds as
defined.
Do not put text in columns that are not within the specified range of column.
You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the material list
definition (MLD) file.
You can use the @ symbol instead of a space when you create headings for variable layout
bills of materials. ISOGEN interprets the @ symbol as a null character. It is easier to count
the number of spaces between the individual headers if you use the @ symbol instead of
using spaces.
Click Hide
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.HeaderLines
401

Text Size
Controls the material list text size.
Small - Output characters 2.1 mm high.
Medium - Output characters 2.4 mm high. This is the default setting.
Large - Output characters 2.8 mm high.
XLarge - Output characters 3.5 mm high.
XXLarge - Output characters 4.2 mm high.
XXXLarge - Output characters 4.9 mm high.
User - Output characters with a height defined by Custom Text Size.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.TextSize
Custom Text Size

Specifies a user-defined text size for the material list. Type a value in millimeters. This property
is applicable only if Text Size is set to User.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.UserTextSize
Text Width
Specifies the character width if you are using a fixed-width font. Type a value (real number) in
the range 10-99 in 1/20 millimeters.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.TextWidth
Text Weight
Specifies the thickness of the text. Type a value in the range 0-9.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.TextWeight
402

Unique Delimiter
Defines the character used as a delimiter when the file format is delimited. The possible
characters are listed below:
Blank
Comma ( , )
Semi-colon ( ; )
Colon ( : )
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.UniqueDelimiter
Variable Columns
Defines the columns that appear in the variable layout material list.
Columns
Data is entered using a grid. To open the grid, click Show
Attribute - Specifies the name of the attribute to appear on the material list. Select the
required attribute in the Attribute list.
Justification - Sets the alignment of text in the column. Select Left, Numeric, or Right.
Start - Specifies the starting point of the column. Type a value in the range 1-999.
Maximum Characters - Sets the width of the column. Type a value of zero or greater.
defined for the variable layout material list. The example below indicates the 3 columns are
currently defined.
Click Hide
close the grid.
403
Fixed
Defines settings for the fixed layout material list format. This format produces a simple material
list. You can use a user-defined drawing frame or the standard ISOGEN drawing frame.
Active List must be set to Fixed. For more information, see the Settings (on page
373).
Type
Normal - The software does not create a special type of material list
accumulated. Pulled bends get U prefixes, and welds have W or B prefixes.
Normal with alpha pointers - The software does not create a special type of material list.
The software uses an alpha system of material list pointers (A, B, C...) instead of the default
numeric system.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.MLType
Layout
Specifies the material list layout pattern.
Standard - Produce the standard sectionalized type with group headings and component
sub-group headings.
Continuous - Produce a layout without headings and sub-headings.
This type of list is partitioned with horizontal dividing lines between the logical groups,
such as pipe, flanges, and fittings. If required, you can switch off the dividing lines using Show
Dividing Lines.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.Layout
Plot on Right
Sets the position of the material list.
Select the checkbox to print the material list on the right side of the drawing. To print on the left
side, clear the checkbox.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.RightSide
404

Show Dividing Lines
Specifies lines in the material list. Show Dividing Lines provides a way to separate the different
groups in the material list when the list does not have headings and sub-headings.
Select the checkbox to display dividing lines between groups, such as PIPES, FLANGES, or
FITTINGS. To display no horizontal dividing lines between logical groups, clear the checkbox.
Setting this property works only when Layout is set to Continuous and Type is set to
Special.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.ShowDividingLines
Show Item Descriptions

Controls whether item descriptions are printed on the material list. When item descriptions are
suppressed, the material list becomes narrower. Select the checkbox to print item descriptions
on the material list.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.ShowItemDescriptions
Line Spacing
Controls the line spacing distance on a plotted material list. This value is a ratio that applies to
the default setting of 100.
Set a value less than 100 to reduce the line spacing. Set a value greater than 100 to increase
the line spacing. For example, a value of 90 reduces the line spacing, whereas a value of 110
increases it.
Defines:
Option Switch - 29
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.LineSpacing
Insert Blank Lines

Specifies whether the software inserts blank lines.
Select the checkbox to insert blank lines after single line entries in the material list. When this
checkbox is cleared, blank lines are not inserted following single line entries. This provides the
possibility of the material list being shorter.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialLlist.FixedLayout.InsertBlankLines
405

Text Size
Controls the user-defined material list text size. Use this property only when Custom Text Size
is set to User.
Small - Output characters 2.1 mm high.
Medium - Output characters 2.4 mm high. This is the default setting.
Large - Output characters 2.8 mm high.
XLarge - Output characters 3.5 mm high.
XXLarge - Output characters 4.2 mm high.
XXXLarge - Output characters 4.9 mm high.
User - Output characters with a height defined by Custom Text Size.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.TextSize
Custom Text Size

Specifies a user-defined size in 1/10 millimeters for text output in the fixed material list. Type a
value (integer) in the range 10-99.
Only set this property if Text Size is set to User.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.UserTextSize
Text Width
Defines the character width in a fixed-width font. Type a value in the range 0-99.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialLlist.FixedLayout.TextWidth
Text Weight
Specifies the thickness of the text. Type a value in the range 0-9.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.TextWeight
406

Show Title Block
Controls whether the title block appears on the drawing.
Select the checkbox to display the title block as defined by the Title Block Position setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.TitleBlockVisible
Title Block Position

Controls the position of the title block.
Pipeline - Position the title block at the bottom right corner of pipeline drawing area. This is
the default position.
MatList - Position the title block at the bottom of material list.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.TitleBlockPos
407
Material Group Transfers

Stores the information that allows you to move a component from one sort group to another on
the material list. For example, a blank flange can be moved to the FLAN sort group.
Transfers
Specifies the list of components to be transferred from one sort group to another. Data is
entered using a grid. To display the grid, click Show .
IDF Record Identifier - Specifies the record ID of the component type. This is the
intermediate data file (IDF) record number for the component, such as 107 for a blank flange
or 90 for a control valve. Valid IDs are integers in the range 0-999. For more information, see
Appendix: Record Identification Numbers (on page 551).
New Group - Specifies a new group for the component type. Available sort groups include:
PIPE (pipe)
VALV (valves and inline items)
FITT (fittings)
INST (instruments)
FLAN (flanges)
SUPP (supports)
GASK (gaskets)
MISC (miscellaneous)
BOLT (bolts)
WELD (welds)
SKEY - Transfers a record ID to a component group based on a user-defined SKEY. In the

example below, record ID 90 (instrument) is transferred to the valve group (VALV) but only
instruments that have an SKEY of CV** (refers to a control valve with any end preparation).
RecordID Group SKEY
90
VALV CV**
408
The value that displays on the Transfers icon is a count of how many columns have been
currently defined.
Click Hide
to close the grid.
SKEYS Defined as Instruments

Specifies user-defined symbol keys.
Instrument SKEYS
Contains a list of SKEYs that ISOGEN treats as instruments. This property holds one SKEY
from that list. Data is entered using a grid. To open the grid, click Show .
Classify SKEY as Instrument - Specifies a symbol key text string.
The value that displays on the Instrument SKEYS icon is a count of how many symbol keys
have been defined. The example below indicates that three are currently defined.
Click Hide
close the grid.
409
Alternative Texts
Title Block Date

Fixed material list only: The date is taken from the DATE type record in the pipeline input data
file and automatically appended in the required format (UK, EUR, or USA) to the AText. The
default value is DATE.
AText ID:
-250
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Title Block Project

Fixed material list only: Used in the title block area if the project number is set in a
PROJECT-IDENTIFIER type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is
appended to the AText to form a composite message. The default value is PROJECT NO.
AText ID:
-251
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Title Block Batch

Fixed material list only: Used in the title block area if a batch reference is set in a BATCH type
record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form
a composite record. The default value is BATCH REF.
410
AText ID:
-252
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Title Block Spec
Fixed material list only: Used in the title block area is a piping specification is set in a
PIPING-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is appended
to the AText to form a composite record. The default value is PIPING SPEC.
AText ID:
-253
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Title Block Revision

Fixed material list only: Used in the title block area if an issue (also known as a revision)
identifier is set in a REVISION type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this
record is appended to the AText to form a composite message. The default value is ISS.
AText ID:
-254
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Spool Drawing Label

Fixed material list only: Used on spool isometric drawings for the identification of individual spool
pieces. A software-generated spool number is appended to the AText to form a composite
message. This AText is not used if a spool prefix (SPOOL-PREFIX type record) or spool
identifier (SPOOL-IDENTIFIER type record) is included in the pipeline input data file. The default
value is SPL.
AText ID:
-257
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
January
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is JAN.
AText ID:
-258
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
411

February
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is FEB.
AText ID:
-259
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
March
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is MAR.
AText ID:
-260
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
April
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is APR.
AText ID:
-261
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
May
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is MAY.
AText ID:
-262
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
June
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is JUN.
412
AText ID:
-263
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

July
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is JUL.
AText ID:
-264
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
August
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is AUG.
AText ID:
-265
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
September
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is SEP.
AText ID:
-266
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
October
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is OCT.
AText ID:
-267
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
November
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is NOV.
AText ID:
-268
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
413

December
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is DEC.
AText ID:
-269
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Title Block Insulation Spec

Fixed material list only: Used in the title block area if an insulation specification identifier is set in
an INSULATION-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is
appended to the AText to form a composite message. The default value is INSULATION SPEC.
AText ID:
-270
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Title Block Tracing Spec

Fixed material list only: Used in the title block area if a tracing specification identifier is set in a
TRACING-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is
appended to the AText to form a composite message. The default value is TRACING SPEC.
AText ID:
-271
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Fab Material Heading

Specifies the category heading under which components required for SHOP Fabrication are
listed. The default value is FABRICATION MATERIALS.
414
AText ID:
-300
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Part Heading
Specifies the part number heading used in conjunction with AText -302 (Number Heading) to
form a composite message. The default value is PT.
AText ID:
-301
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Number Heading
Used in conjunction with AText -301 (Part Heading) to form a composite message. The default
value is NO.
AText ID:
-302
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Description Heading
Specifies the heading in the material listing under which components are described according to
their catalog component description. The default value is COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.
AText ID:
-303
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Nominal Size Heading

Specifies the heading under which the nominal size of each item is listed. Used in conjunction
with AText -330 (NS Inch Indicator) or AText -331 (NS MM Indicator) to form a composite
message. The default value is N.S.
AText ID:
-304
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
415

Item Code Heading
Specifies the heading under which component identification codes are listed. The default value
is ITEM-CODE.
AText ID:
-305
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Quantity Heading
Specifies the heading under which the required quantities are listed. The default value is QTY.
AText ID:
-306
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Pipe Sub-Heading
Specifies the group sub-header under which pipe is listed. The default value is PIPE.
AText ID:
-307
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Fittings Sub-Heading
Specifies the group sub-header under which pipe fittings are listed, such as elbows and tees.
The default value is FITTINGS.
AText ID:
-308
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Flanges Sub-Heading
Specifies the group sub-header under which all flanges are listed. The default value is
FLANGES.
416
AText ID:
-309
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Erection Material Heading
Specifies the category header under which components required for SITE erection, or
construction, are listed. The default value is ERECTION MATERIALS.
AText ID:
-310
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Gaskets Sub-Heading
Specifies the group sub-heading under which all gaskets are listed. The default value is
GASKETS.
AText ID:
-311
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Bolts Sub-Heading
Specifies the group sub-heading under which all bolts are listed. The default value is BOLTS.
AText ID:
-312
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Valves and Inline Sub-Heading

Specifies the group sub-heading under which all valves and in-line items are listed. The default
value is VALVES / IN-LINE ITEMS.
AText ID:
-313
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
417

Instruments Sub-Heading
Specifies the group sub-heading under which all instruments are listed. The default value is
INSTRUMENTS.
AText ID:
-314
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Supports Sub-Heading
Specifies the group sub-heading under which all supports are listed. The default value is
SUPPORTS.
AText ID:
-315
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Spools Sub-Heading
Specifies the group sub-heading under which all spool numbers are listed. The default value is
PIPE SPOOLS.
AText ID:
-316
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Piping NS Summary Heading

Used in conjunction with AText -318 (Pipe CL Summary Heading) to which the total centerline
length per bore is automatically computed and listed. Also uses AText -330 (NS Inch Indicator)
or AText -331 (NS MM Indicator) to indicate units. For more information, see Alternative Texts
(on page 438) in Materials > Text. The default value is PIPE NS.
418
AText ID:
-317
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Pipe CL Summary Heading
Used in conjunctions with AText -317 (Pipe NS Summary Heading). Also uses AText -329
(Metre Indicator) or AText -361, depending on the units being used. The default value is CL
LENGTH.
AText ID:
-318
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Cut length Sub-Heading

Specifies the heading under which all the cut pipe lengths are listed. The default value is CUT
PIPE LENGTH.
AText ID:
-319
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Piece Sub-Heading
Specifies the sub-heading to AText -319 (Cut Length Sub-Heading) under which the cut pipe
piece numbers are listed. This AText is used in conjunction with AText -321 (Piece No
Sub-Heading) to form a composite message. The default value is PIECE.
AText ID:
-320
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Piece No. Sub-Heading

Used in conjunction with AText -320 (Piece Sub-Heading) to form a composite message. The
default value is NO.
AText ID:
-321
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
419

Cut Sub-Heading
Specifies the sub-heading to AText -319 (Cut Length Sub-Heading) under which the actual cut
pipe lengths are listed. This AText is used in conjunction with AText -323 (CutLength
Sub-Heading) to form a composite heading. The default value is CUT.
AText ID:
-322
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
CutLength Sub-Heading
Used in conjunction with AText -322 (Cut Sub-Heading) to form a composite message. The
default value is LENGTH.
AText ID:
-323
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Remarks Sub-Heading
Specifies the sub-heading to AText -319 (Cut Length Sub-Heading) under which one of the
ATexts -326, -327, -328, or -500, if applicable, is listed. The default value is REMARKS.
AText ID:
-324
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Spool Number Separator

Specifies a spool number separator on the material list.
420
AText ID:
-325
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Spool ID Heading
Indicates a header or column identifier on the following printed output whenever spool identifiers
are listed. The default value is SPOOL ID.
Printed material list (Fixed or Variable)
Printed material control file
Printed weld summary

AText ID:
-503
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
421
Part Numbers
Controls the representation of part numbers on the isometric drawing.
Topics
Format............................................................................................ 422
Enclosure ....................................................................................... 423
Traceability Table .......................................................................... 426
Traceability Columns ..................................................................... 428
Format
Defines the representation of part numbers on the isometric drawing.
Show
Suppresses the plotting of part numbers and associated enclosure boxes on the drawing. Select
the checkbox to display part numbers and their enclosure boxes.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.Visible
Length
Sets a fixed length for part numbers (1-9 characters or variable). Select the value or Variable in
the list.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.PartNoLength
Number of Spaces
Controls the number of spaces for a Type 1, 2, or 3 enclosure.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.PartNoSpaces
422

Unique Part Number
Controls the type of suffix used for the unique part number and whether unique part numbers
are used.
Alpha - Use an alphabetic suffix.
Numeric - Use a numeric suffix.
Off - Turn off all unique part number facilities.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.UniquePartNumber
Part Number Suffix

Controls sequencing of the identifier suffix used for part numbering on the isometric drawing.
Continuous - Generate unique part number suffixes as a continuous sequence across all
output drawings, such as 6.1 to 6.6 on Drg 1 of 2 and 6.7 to 6.11 on Drg 2 of 2, and so on.
PerDrawing - Generate unique part number suffixes with a new sequence for each drawing,
such as 6.1 to 6.6 on Drg 1 of 2 and 6.1 to 6.5 on Drg 2 of 2, and so on.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.IdentifierSuffix
Unique Gasket Numbers

Controls output of unique part numbers on bolts. Select the checkbox to output unique part
numbers on bolts.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.UniqueNosGaskets
Unique Bolt Numbers

Controls output of unique part numbers on gaskets. Select the checkbox to output unique part
numbers on gaskets.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.UniqueNosBolts
423
Enclosure
Defines how enclosures for part numbers appear on the isometric drawing.
Style
Specifies the shape of the part number enclosure.
Click Show
None - No enclosure box. Only plots part numbers.
Square Ends
Round Ends
Diamond Ends
Circle
Double Circle
Ellipse
The size at which the circle, double circle, and ellipse is drawn is controlled by the Size
setting (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the enclosure. If there are
more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to accommodate.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.PartNoEnclosureStyle
424

Size
Controls the number of characters used for the size of circle, double circle, and eclipse
enclosure style.
The default setting is 2. The example below shows the default setting used for the circle
enclosure style:
The number of characters defines the minimum size at which the circle, double circle, and
ellipse is drawn. If there are more characters than the value that is defined, the enclosure
dynamically adjusts to suit. The Variable size setting allows the circle, double circle, or ellipse to
be smaller than the 2 character default setting and also dynamically adjust to suit the number of
characters.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.PartNoEnclSize
425
Traceability Table
Defines a unique part numbers table that can be output on the isometric drawing and the
traceability output file.
Maximum Entries
Controls the maximum number of entries before an overflow drawing is created if you have
selected the Overflow checkbox.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.MaxEntries
Enabled
Controls the creation of the traceability file. Select the checkbox to create the file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.Enabled
Path
Defines the output location of the traceability file. Type the full path and filename in the box.
, and navigate to the file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.Path
Show
Controls whether the unique part numbers table is plotted. Select the checkbox to plot the table.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.PlotUniquePtNoTable
Start X
Defines the starting X position of the list in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.StartX
426

Start Y
Defines the starting Y position of the list in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.StartY
Layer
Sets the drawing layer for the unique part number table. Type a value in the range 1-50.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.DrawingLayer
Continuous Down
Controls the direction of the unique part numbers table.
Select the checkbox to set the table direction so that it is down. To set the table direction so it is
down, clear the checkbox.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.ContinuousDown
Vertical Spacing
Sets the vertical spacing between each horizontal line in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.VerticalSpacing
Overflow
Controls whether an overflow drawing is created when the Maximum Entries setting is
exceeded. Select the checkbox to create an overflow drawing.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.TableOverflow
Text Height
Sets the text height to be used. Type a value (real number) in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.TextHeight
427
Traceability Columns
Controls the attribute data that is output to the traceability file.
Columns
Defines the columns that appear in the traceability file. Data is entered using a grid. To display
the grid, click Show .
428
Attribute - Specifies the name of the attribute being defined. Select the attribute in the list.
Justification - Sets the alignment of the text. Specify Left, Right, or Numeric.
Start - Specifies the starting point of the column. The valid range is 1-999.
Maximum Characters - Defines the maximum number of characters allowed in the column.
defined for the traceability file. The example below indicates the 3 columns are currently
defined.
Click Hide
to close the grid.
Accumulation
Defines settings for the accumulation of materials and components on the material list.
Topics
Settings .......................................................................................... 429
Settings
Controls the accumulation of materials and components on the material list.
The isometric drawing properties listed below do not apply to the user-defined material list
or when Type for the Fixed or Variable styles is set to Special:
Bolts
Gaskets
Offshore Items
Erection Items
Fab Items
Fab Items
Controls the accumulation of fabrication materials.
All Except Pipe - Suppress accumulation of all fabrication materials (excluding pipe).
None - Suppress accumulation of fabrication materials but list them separately in the
material list.
Normal - Accumulate fabrication materials normally. This is the default setting.
Pipe Only - Accumulate only pipe.
Suppress - Suppress the display of fabrication items in the material list.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FabAccumulation
Erection Items
Controls the accumulation of erection materials.
All Except Pipe - Suppress accumulation of all erection materials (excluding pipe).
None - Suppress accumulation of erection materials (including pipe).
Normal - Accumulate erection materials normally. This is the default setting.
Pipe Only - Accumulate only piping
Suppress - Suppress display of erection materials in the material list.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.ErectAccumulation
429

Offshore Items
Controls the accumulation of offshore materials.
All Except Pipe - Suppress accumulation of all offshore materials (excluding pipe).
None - Suppress accumulation of offshore materials (including pipe).
Normal - Accumulate offshore materials normally. This is the default setting.
Pipe Only - Accumulate only piping.
Suppress - Suppress display of offshore materials in the material list at all.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.OffshoreAccumulation
Fixed Pipe
Controls the accumulation of fixed pipe materials. ISOGEN considers fixed pipe to be a
component and accumulates materials by quantity. Using Fixed Pipe you can specify that
ISOGEN accumulate fixed pipe materials by length for output to Material List and Material
Control files.
By Quantity - Accumulate fixed pipe by quantity.
By Length - Accumulate fixed pipe by length.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedPipeAccumulation
Gaskets
Controls the accumulation of gaskets.
Normal - Accumulate gaskets normally.
None - Non-accumulation of gaskets.
Suppress - Suppress accumulation of all gaskets.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.GasketAccumulation
Bolts
Controls how bolt components are included on or excluded from the material list.
None - Each occurrence of an item results in an individual entry on the material list
Normal - Accumulate bolts normally.
Suppress - Suppress accumulation of all bolts.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.BoltAccumulation
430

Welds
Controls the accumulation of welds.
Normal - Accumulate welds normally.
None - Suppress accumulation of weld items but list them separately in the material list.
Suppress - Suppress accumulation of welds in the material list.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.WeldAccumulation
Supports with Matching Tags

Controls the accumulation of support with matching tags.
Non-Accumulate - Suppress accumulation of supports with matching names (tags).
Accumulate - Accumulate supports with matching names (tags).
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.SupportsWithMatchingNamesAccumulation
431
Joints and Assemblies

Defines settings that control the assignment of identifiers to joints and how end connection
identifiers are sequenced.
Topics
Accumulation ................................................................................. 432
Numbering ..................................................................................... 433
Accumulation
Sets the accumulation of end connections.
Connection ID Category
Controls which category of end connections is assigned an identifier.
All - Assign an identifier to all end connections.
Fabrication - Assign an identifier only to Fabrication end connections.
Erection - Assign an identifier only to Erection end connections.
Offshore - Assign an identifier only to Offshore end connections.
Erection and Offshore - Assign an identifier only to Erection and Offshore end
connections.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.ConnectionIDCategory
432
Numbering
Sets properties that define the sequencing and the types of enclosures that appear on the
isometric drawing for user-defined end connection identifiers.
User Defined End Connections

Defines end connection identifiers. Data is entered using a grid. To open the grid, click Show
SKEY - Identifies the SKEY for the end connection. Select one of the following:
SW - Socket Weld
SC- Screwed
CP - Compression
FL- Flanged
PL - Plain End
BW - Butt Weld
CL - Clamped
GL - Glued
FA - Flared
PF - Push Fit
Group - Controls which group of end connections are assigned identifiers on the isometric
drawing.
Individual - Assign end connection identifiers to each individual occurrence of the

specified end connection.
Assembly - Assign end connection identifiers to assemblies.
Weld - Assign end connection identifiers to welds.
Fab Group - Controls which group of Fabrication category end connections are assigned
identifiers on the isometric drawing.
Individual - Assign end connection identifiers to each individual Fabrication occurrence

of the specified end connection.
Assembly - Assign identifiers to Fabrication assemblies.
Weld - Assign identifiers to Fabrication welds.
Erection Group - Controls which group of Erection category end connections are assigned
Individual - Assign end connection identifiers to each individual Erection occurrence of

the specified end connection.
Assembly - Assign identifiers to Erection assemblies.
Weld - Assign identifiers to Erection welds.
433
Offshore Group - Controls which group of Offshore category end connections are assigned
Individual - Assign end connection identifiers to each individual Offshore occurrence of

the specified end connection.
Assembly - Assign identifiers to Offshore assemblies.
Weld - Assign identifiers to Offshore welds.
Format - Controls the format of end connection identifiers that are output on the isometric
drawing.
Numeric - Assign numeric values to end connection identifiers.
Alphabetic - Assign alphabetic characters to end connection identifiers.

This setting is relevant only if Group is set to Individual.
Prefix - Controls the prefix used when outputting end connection identifiers on the isometric
drawing.
Fab Prefix - Controls the prefix used when outputting Fabrication end connection identifiers
Erection Prefix - Controls the prefix used when outputting Erection category end
connection identifiers on the isometric drawing.
Offshore Prefix - Controls the prefix used when outputting Offshore end connection
Origin - Controls the origin of sequencing of end connection identifiers.
Pipeline - Sequence end connection identifiers on a per pipeline basis. This is the
default setting.
Drawing - Sequence end connection identifiers on a per drawing basis.

Accumulation - Controls how end connection identifiers are sequenced.
Combined - Sequence end connection identifiers as combined. This is the default

setting.
Category - Sequence end connection identifiers on a category basis.

434
Enclosure - Controls the type of enclosure that is used for end connection identifiers output
Circle - Display end connection identifiers inside a circular enclosure.
Circle Double - Display end connection identifiers inside a circular-shaped enclosure

inside another circle.
Diamond Double - Display end connection identifiers inside a diamond-shaped

enclosure inside another diamond-shaped enclosure.
Diamond Ended - Display end connection identifiers inside a diamond-ended box

enclosure.
Diamond Ended Double - Display end connection identifiers inside a diamond-ended

box enclosure inside another diamond-ended enclosure.
Ellipse - Display end connection identifiers inside an elliptical-shaped enclosure.
Ellipse Double - Display end connection identifiers inside an elliptical-shaped enclosure

inside another ellipse.
Round Double - Display end connection identifiers inside a round-ended box enclosure
inside another round-ended enclosure.
Round Ended - Display end connection identifiers inside a round-ended box enclosure.
Square Ended - Display end connection identifiers inside a square-ended box

enclosure.
Square Ended Double - Display end connection identifiers inside a square-ended box
enclosure inside another square-ended enclosure.
Suppressed - Suppress the display of an enclosure.
Triangle - Display end connection identifiers inside a triangular-shaped enclosure.
Triangle Double - Display end connection identifiers inside a triangular-shaped

enclosure inside another triangle.
Unboxed - Display end connection identifiers as unboxed.
Fab Style - Controls the type of enclosure that is used for Fabrication end connection
identifiers output on the isometric drawing.



enclosure.



enclosure.
435
436

Unboxed - Display Fabrication end connection identifiers as unboxed.
Erection Style - Controls the type of enclosure that is used for Erection end connection



enclosure.



enclosure.

Unboxed - Display Erection end connection identifiers as unboxed.
Offshore Style - Controls the type of enclosure that is used for Offshore end connection



enclosure.



enclosure.

Unboxed - Display Offshore end connection identifiers as unboxed.
The value that displays on the User Defined End Connections icon is a count of how end
connection identifiers have been defined. The example below indicates the three columns
are currently defined.
Click Hide
close the grid.
437
Text
Controls plotted material and cut pipe list heading texts.
Topics
Alternative Texts
Metre Indicator
Denotes lengths of pipe are in meters. Also used to indicate unit type meters in centerline length
summary. The default value is M.
AText ID:
-329
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
NS Inch Indicator
Denotes nominal sizes are in inches. Also used in conjunction with AText -304 (Nominal Size
Heading) and AText -317 (Piping NS Summary Heading). The default value is INS.
For more information, see Alternative Texts (on page 409) in Materials > Drawing
Material List.
438
AText ID:
-330
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

NS MM Indicator
Denotes the nominal sizes are in millimeters. Also used in conjunction with AText -304
(Nominal Size Heading) and AText -317 (Piping NS Summary Heading). The default value is
MM.
For more information, see Alternative Texts (on page 409) in Materials > Drawing
Material List.
AText ID:
-331
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Page Label
Indicates the page number in the printed material list. The page number is automatically
appended. The default value is PAGE.
AText ID:
-332
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Line Reference Label

Indicates the pipeline reference in a printed material list. The pipeline reference is automatically
appended, The default value is PIPELINE REF.
AText ID:
-333
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Item Code Suffix Fixed Pipe

Used only on fixed length piping. The contents of this AText are appended to the item code to
form a composite code when one or more ends of the fixed length spool has a special flange.
The default value is S.
AText ID:
-334
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
439

Description Suffix Fixed Pipe
Used only on fixed length piping. The contents of this AText are appended to the item
description to form a composite message. This AText is used whenever AText -334 (Item Code
Suffix Fixed Pipe) is used. The default value is WITH SPECIAL RATING FLANGE(S) (SEE
ISO).
AText ID:
-335
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Miscellaneous Sub-Heading
Specifies the group sub-heading under which all non-categorized components are listed. The
default value is MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS.
AText ID:
-339
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Induction Bend Remark

Identifies pipe required in the fabrication of induction bends. The induction bend tag is appended
to the AText to form a complete text string. The default value is INDUCTION BEND ID.
AText ID:
-340
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Equipment Trim Sub-Heading

Specifies the sub-heading under which all equipment trim materials are listed. The default value
is EQUIPMENT TRIM MATERIALS.
AText ID:
440
-341
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Nozzle Ref Sub-Heading
Specifies the sub-heading under which all materials associated with an individual nozzle are
listed. The content of the related NOZZLE-REFERENCE is appended to the AText to form a
complete text string. Used on equipment trim drawings only. The default value is NOZZLE REF.
AText ID:
-342
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Continued Text
Identifies situations where the listing of components for a nozzle is being continued from a
previous drawing. Used with AText -342 (Nozzle Ref Sub-Heading) on equipment trim
drawings only. The default value is CONTINUED.
AText ID:
-343
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Hygienic Connector Sub-Heading

Specifies the group sub-heading under which all materials for end connections for hygienic type
piping are listed (liners, nuts, clamps, and so on). The default value is END CONNECTORS.
AText ID:
-344
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
And Text
Used with AText -342 (Nozzle Ref Sub-Heading) to form a sub-heading under which all
components associated with interconnected nozzles are output on the material list for an
equipment trim drawing. The format of the resulting nozzle heading is NOZZLE REF - N22 and
N23.
AText ID:
-345
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
441

Alternate Bottom Overflow Label
Denotes an alternative to the AText used when generating a material list overflow message at
the bottom of the master drawing material list. This is a combination of AText -209 (Pipeline
Connection) and AText -255 (Drawing Label).
For more information, see Alternative Texts (on page 256) in Drawing Area > Content
and Alternative Texts (on page 283) in Drawing Area > Text, respectively.
AText ID:
-347
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Alternate Top Overflow Label

Functions as an alternative to the AText used when generating a material list overflow message
at the top of overflow material list drawing. This is a combination of AText -276 (Continued
From) and AText -255 (Drawing Label).
For more information, see Alternative Texts (on page 256) in Drawing Area > Content
and Alternative Texts (on page 283) in Drawing Area > Text, respectively.
AText ID:
-348
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
End One Heading

Denotes the column heading on the cut pipe list. Also appears in the isometric drawing area
section when it is necessary to identify a specific end of a cut piece. The default value is
END$ONE.
AText ID:
-362
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
End Two Heading

Denotes the column heading on the cut pipe list. The default value is END$TWO.
442
AText ID:
-363
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Item Code Heading
Denotes the last heading on the cut pipe list when item code heading is required. See also
AText -365 (Alternate Last Heading). The default value is ITEM$CODE.
AText ID:
-364
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Alternate Last Heading

Denotes the an alternative last column heading on the cut pipe list. See also AText -364 (Item
Code Heading). If the part number is required on the cut list instead of the item code, set AText
-364 to blank and AText -365 to the required alternative heading, such as part number.
AText ID:
-365
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Square Cut Label

Denotes square cut in the End Condition columns on the cut pipe list. The default value is
SQ.CUT.
AText ID:
-366
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Bevel Label
Denotes bevel in the End Condition columns on the cut pipe list. The default value is BEVEL.
AText ID:
-367
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
443

Screwed Label
Denotes screwed in the End Condition columns on the cut pipe list. The default value is
SCREWED.
AText ID:
-368
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Shaped Label
Denotes shaped in the End Condition columns on the cut pipe list. The default value is
SHAPED.
AText ID:
-369
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Mitred Label
Denotes mitred in the End Condition columns on the cut pipe list. The default value is MITRED.
AText ID:
-370
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Angle Label
Used on special type pulled bends where angle information is appended to the item description
field on the material list. The default value is ANGLE.
444
AText ID:
-374
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Fab Label
Identifies Fabrication material when Category is used as a data item on a variable or
user-defined material list. The default value is FAB.
AText ID:
-376
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Erect Label
Identifies Erection material when Category is used as a data item on a variable or user-defined
material list. The default value is EREC.
AText ID:
-377
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Offshore Label
Identifies Offshore material when Category is used as a data item on a variable or user-defined
material list. The default value is OFF.
AText ID:
-378
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Multiple Values Label

Indicates that multiple component attributes are present for a particular material entry. The
default value is MULTIPLE.
AText ID:
-392
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
445

Additional Material indicator
Used on the cut list in conjunction with additional length added to the cut piece. The default
value is ADD MATERIAL.
AText ID:
-393
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Grooved Identifier
Indicates a grooved end preparation for Victaulic pipe connections on the cut pipe list/report.
The default value is GROOVED.
AText ID:
-426
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Flared Identifier
Indicates a flared end preparation on the cut pipe list/report. The default value is FLARED.
AText ID:
-427
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Screwed Female Identifier

Indicates a female screwed end preparation on the cut pipe list/report. The default value is
SCREWED.
446
AText ID:
-428
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Socket Female Identifier
Indicates a female socket weld/compression/glued/push fit end preparation on the cut pipe
list/report. The default value is SOCKET.
AText ID:
-431
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Alternate Units Label

Offers an alternative units indication on any length output on any style of material list.
AText ID:
-537
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Alternate Bolt Units Label

Offers an alternative form of bolt diameter/length output on any style of material list.
AText ID:
-538
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Bolt Diameter Heading

Offers an optional column heading for bolt diameter where the bolt units are different to the
normal pipeline units.
AText ID:
-540
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Scalar Quantities Suffix

Outputs text to supplement scalar quantities that appear in the material list on the drawing and
material control file.
AText ID:
-554
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
447

Spool Sub-Heading
Identifies materials belonging to spools on the material list. The default value is SPOOL.
AText ID:
-555
? Value:
Spool Number
$ Supported:
Yes
Reports
Defines the content and format of the material control file, printed material list, and the Neutral
report. The collection of properties and attributes that appear in Materials > Reports is only a
subset of Drawing Manager > Reports, which includes all of the available ISOGEN reports and
applicable properties and attributes. For more information, see Reports (on page 136).
448
Welds
Sets properties related to welds. The Welds category includes the style groups listed below:
Implied Weld Rules - Organizes a collection of properties that define settings for implied
welds. For more information, see Implied Weld Rules (on page 450).
Appearance - Organizes a collection of properties that define the representation of welds

on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Appearance (on page 452).
Drawing Weld List - Organizes a collection of properties that define the layout and content
of the three weld list formats: user-defined, variable, and fixed. For more information, see
Drawing Weld List (on page 465).
Reports - Organizes a collection of properties that define the titles and column headers in a
user-defined weld summary file or a site weld file. Also contains properties that define the
columns of data contained in the weld summary file and the site weld file. For more
information, see Reports (on page 448).
Click
settings.

See Also
449
Implied Weld Rules

Defines settings for implied welds.
Topics
Settings .......................................................................................... 450
Settings
Sets properties that control how ISOGEN handles implied welds.
Slip-on Flange Welds

Controls the quantity of weld numbers generated at slip-on flanges. You can generate one or
two weld numbers at slip-on flanges.
1 - Generate one weld number.
2 - Generate two weld numbers. This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - WeldList.SlipOnFlangeWelds
Reinforcement Pad Welds

Controls the quantity of extra weld numbers generated at reinforcement pads.
0 - Generate no extra weld numbers.
1 - Generate one extra weld number.
2 - Generate two extra weld numbers.
These are extra weld numbers because they are created in addition to the normal single
and double branch connection weld numbers that are generated at set-on tee and cross
positions.
Defines:
I-Configure - WeldList.ExtraRPadWelds
450

Clamp Welds
Controls the number of weld numbers allocated to victaulic welded/gorged ring type clamps
(CLVR). Type a value in the range 1-9.
If set to 0 (the default value), two weld numbers are allocated.
Defines:
I-Configure - WeldList.ClampWelds
Y Type Welds
Controls the allocation of weld numbers on the fabricated Y-type components.
1 - Allocate one weld number.
2 - Allocate two weld numbers.
Defines:
I-Configure - WeldList.YTypeWelds
Tack Welds
Controls the allocation of weld numbers on tack welds.
True - Allocate weld numbers.
False - Suppress the allocation of weld numbers.
Defines:
I-Configure - WeldList.TackWeldNumbers
451
Appearance
Controls the representation of welds on the isometric drawing.
Topics
Controls.......................................................................................... 452
Sequences ..................................................................................... 455
Numbers ........................................................................................ 457
Identifier Table ............................................................................... 459
Enclosures ..................................................................................... 459
Rarely Used ................................................................................... 463
Controls
Sets properties that control how welds and weld numbers appear on the isometric drawing. You
can turn on and off the display of welds, generate or suppress the creation of implied welds, and
define the format of weld numbers. You can also specify whether message callouts to welds
have arrowheads.
Show Welds
Controls the display of welds and weld numbers on the isometric drawing.
True - Display welds on the isometric drawing.
False - Suppress the display of welds on the isometric drawing.
Welds > Appearance > Numbers allows a separate control on the different categories of
weld that can be output. For more information, see Appendix: Weld Logic (on page 555).
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.ShowWelds
Show Numbers
Turns on and off the display of the weld numbers on the isometric drawing.
True - Turn on the display of weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
False - Turn off the display of weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.ShowWeldNumbers
452

Generate Welds
Controls the creation of implied welds, such as those welds that are not explicitly defined in the
PCF or IDF.
Generate - Create implied welds.
Suppress - Suppress the creation of implied welds.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.ImpliedWelds
Length
Controls the number of characters output for a weld number. For numeric weld numbers, leading
zeros are output; for alphabetic weld numbers, spaces are output.
Variable - Output the weld number without leading zeros or spaces.
1 to 9 - Set the number of characters to be output. For example, 3 outputs 001 through to
999 for numeric weld numbers.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.WeldNumberLength
Size
Controls the size of plotted weld numbers, if welds appear.
Small - Plot small weld numbers (1.5 mm).
Medium - Plot medium-sized weld numbers (1.8 mm).
Large - Plot large weld numbers (2.1 mm).
These size values are only valid for the original circular style enclosure. If one of the
alternative enclosure styles is being used, then Text Size is used.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.WeldNumberSize
Type
Controls whether weld numbers are numeric or alphabetic.
Numeric - Numeric weld identifiers.
Alphabetic - Alphabetic weld identifiers. Generates A to Z, and then starts AA, AB, AC, and
so on.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.WeldNumberType
453

Callout Arrowheads
Controls whether messages to welds (including weld numbers and attributes) have arrowheads
attached to message leader lines.
On - Show arrowheads on message leader lines.
Off - Suppress arrowheads on message leader lines.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.MessageArrowheads
454
Sequences
Sets properties for the weld number sequence.
Weld Series
Sets the weld series.
One series for all welds.
One series for pipe welds, and another series for support welds.
Three series for pipe welds, and another series for support welds.
Three series for pipe welds, and another three series for supports welds.
Welds Start Number

Specifies the start number for the weld sequence. Type a value in the box.
Fab Prefix
Sets the prefix used for fabrication type welds. In the example below, the prefix is set to F.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.FabPrefix
Erection Prefix
Sets the prefix used for erection type welds. In the example below, the prefix is set to E.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.ErectPrefix
455

Offshore Prefix
Sets the prefix used for offshore type welds. In the example below, the prefix is set to O.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.OffShorePrefix
Fab Support Prefix

Sets the prefix used for fabrication support welds. In the example below, the prefix is set to FS.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.FabSupportPrefix
Erect Support Prefix

Sets the prefix used for erection support welds. In the example below, the prefix is set to ES.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.ErectSupportPrefix
Offshore Support Prefix

Sets the prefix used for offshore support welds. In the example below, the prefix is set to OS.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.OffShoreSupportPrefix
456

Sequence
Controls how weld numbers are sequenced.
Continuous - Continue current weld number sequence on each new drawing.
Per drawing - Restart weld number sequence on each new drawing.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.WeldNumberSequence
Support Weld Sequence

Controls whether the support weld numbers continue across drawings or start again on each
new drawing.
Per Drawing - Re-start support weld numbering sequence on each drawing.
Continuous - Continue support weld numbering sequence across drawings.
The numbers used depend on the settings defined by Support Weld Type Numbers.
If you select Support Weld Numbers, Support Weld Sequence controls weld numbering,
similar to the behavior of Sequence.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.SupporWeldSeq
Spool Matches Pipe

Controls whether the weld numbers on the spool isometric match those on the full isometric
drawing.
Select the checkbox for spool weld numbers to match pipe weld numbers. If you clear the
checkbox, spool isometric weld numbers are done separately.
For spool weld numbers to match the full isometric numbers, the properties that affect the
number of welds and the sequence used must be the same for both spool and full styles.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.SpoolMatchesPipe
457
Numbers
Sets properties that control weld numbering.
Generate Missing Weld Numbers

Controls the generation of weld numbers for any welds that do not have weld numbers defined
in the Piping Component File (PCF) or Intermediate Data File (IDF).
Generate - Generate missing weld numbers.
Suppress - Suppress the generation of missing weld numbers.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.WeldNumbers
Weld Types
Controls which types of welds are numbered/plotted.
All - Number/plot all welds.
Fabrication Only - Number/plot only fabrication welds.
Erection Only - Number plot only erection welds.
Offshore Only - Number/plot only offshore welds.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.WeldTypes
Show Offshore Weld Numbers

Controls the displays of offshore weld numbers on the isometric drawing. To show the weld
numbers, select the checkbox.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.ShowOffshoreWeldNumbers
Show Offshore Weld Numbers Only

Controls whether only offshore weld numbers are shown. To limit the weld number display to
offshore welds only, select the checkbox.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.ShowOffShoreWeldNumbersOnly
458
Identifier Table
Weld Type Identifiers
Defines the text output to the weld definition (WDF) file for weld type identifiers.
Click Show
to open a free-form text box. In the text box, type the data as follows:
1. Piping specification
2. Minimum nominal size
3. Maximum nominal size
4. Weld type (replacement for BW welds)
5. Wall thickness/Schedule (optional)
. The software updates the style and displays the specified data
under the Weld Type Identifiers property label.
The WELD-TYPE-IDENTIFIER heading is output by the software, and only the data records
are required in the text file.
The nominal size units are assumed to be those specified by the Units setting (Option
Switch 41). For more information, see Units in Drawing Generation (on page 105). This is
only used when the weld type is output on the weld operation list or welds report, and
replaces the BW weld type identifier. If using the Wall Thickness/Schedule column, and the
BW type is not being changed, then you must enter BW on the line.
Click Hide
459
Enclosures
Defines the assignment of weld enclosures. You can define up to six enclosure definitions, each
of which can apply to one or more of the six weld types. You can also use the Enclosure Editor
to modify the style, shape, and label length of an existing weld enclosure definition. The editor
can also be used to define additional enclosure assignments.
Section 1
Specifies which of the six weld types are shown on the isometric drawing. This section also
defines which enclosure definitions are shown in the summary and can be edited. Weld
enclosure assignments are specified by selecting and clearing the checkboxes.
All welds - Assigns the enclosure definition to pipe and support welds across all categories
(Fabrication, Erection, and Offshore).
Pipe welds - Assigns the enclosure definition to pipe welds only across all categories. To
exclude a category, clear its checkbox. In the example below, Offshore pipe welds are excluded
from the enclosure assignment.
Support welds - Assigns the enclosure definition to support welds only across all categories. To
exclude a category, clear its checkbox. In the example below, only Fabrication support welds
are assigned a weld enclosure.
460

Section 2
Shows a preview of all currently defined weld enclosures (1) and includes a summary of the
selected weld types to which each enclosure applies (2).
Section 2 also provides access to the Enclosure Editor.
Enclosure Editor
Provides options for modifying an existing enclosure definition and for creating a new definition.
Click Edit enclosure definitions to open the Enclosure Editor.
Set additional enclosures - Opens an enclosure panel so that you can define a new weld
enclosure.
Enclosure style - Specifies the weld enclosure type. The available types are simple, extended,
or one of the four special extended types.
Simple Enclosure - Represents an enclosure with a single field that shows the weld
number and prefix, if set.
Extended Enclosure - A segmented enclosure. Each segment contains a weld

attribute. An extended enclosure can have up to 10 segments.
Special Extended Enclosure - An enclosure with two, three, or four segments. Each
segment contains a weld attribute. Available segment arrangements are shown below:
Enclosure shape - Specifies the shape of the enclosure. Available shapes depend on the
selected enclosure type.
461

Label length - Controls the number of characters used for a simple enclosure. Valid entries are
from 1 to 8 characters and Variable size, which dynamically sizes the enclosure. The default
setting is 2. This property appears only when a simple enclosure type is select for Enclosure
style.
Attribute - Specifies the attribute that appears in the enclosure. This property appears only
when an extended or special extended enclosure type is selected for Enclosure style.
Width - Controls the number of characters displayed in each segment. Select a number in the
list. This property appears only when an extended or special extended enclosure type is
selected for Enclosure style.
Force all welds as special - Only applies to objects with Enclosure style set to one of the
special extended enclosure types.
Select the checkbox to force all welds to adopt the special layout for their enclosure. This
property appears only when an extended enclosure type is selected for Enclosure style.
To allow the generation of an enclosure containing only the weld number, when the data for all
the other fields in an enclosure are missing, clear the checkbox.
Add a segment - Adds a segment to the enclosure and displays an additional Attribute and
Width list so that you can define the content to appear in the segment. This property displays
only when the non-special extended enclosure is selected in the Enclosure style list.
Apply enclosure to - Displays a summary of the welds selected in Section 1.
Click Hide
462
to close the Enclosure Editor.
Rarely Used
Special Site Weld Category
Assigns special site welds to a specific category. Select Erection Type or Fabrication Type.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.SpecialSiteWeldCategory
Special Status Weld Identifiers

Controls the generation of weld numbers on special status welds.
True - Generate weld numbers on special status welds.
False - Suppress generation of weld numbers on special status welds.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.SpecialStatusWeldIdentifiers
General Start Number

Sets a general start weld number in the weld definition file (WDF). Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.GeneralWeldStartNo
General Prefix
Sets the general weld prefix used when none of the separate weld prefixes are set.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.GeneralPrefix
Use Additional
Controls the special part number box for welds. Select the checkbox to display a special part
number box for welds.
Welds must have part numbers and descriptions, and Type must be set to Special. For
more information, see Fixed (on page 474).
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.AdditionalWeldEnclosure
463

Additional Spaces
Sets the number of spaces used when Use Additional is selected.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces
Alternative Texts
Field Fit Weld Callout

Plats a distinguishing message that points to a field fit weld. The default value is FFW.
AText ID:
-221
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Seal Weld Label

Indicates the weld type for seal welds on the isometric drawing. The default value is SEAL
WELD.
464
AText ID:
-425
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Mitre Weld Label
Identifies mitre welds. The software edits the mitre angle into the text string at the ? position,
which can be positioned anywhere in the string. The default value is MITRE ?.
AText ID:
-457
? Value:
Mitre Angle
$ Supported:
Yes
Site Weld Label

Points to a site weld. The value must be defined.
AText ID:
-498
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Shop Text Weld Label

Point to a site weld or a field fit weld that requires a shop test weld be performed at the same
location. Applies to welds with the symbol key WSST or WFST. The default value is SHOP
TEST WELD.
AText ID:
-499
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Offshore Weld Label

Points to an offshore weld if user-specified.
AText ID:
-501
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
465
Drawing Weld List

Defines the layout and content of the ISOGEN weld list. Three weld list formats are available:
user-defined, variable, and fixed.
The weld list is the report that appears on the drawing, while the weld summary file is the
weld data formatted in a text file. For information about the weld summary file, see Reports (on
page 448).
Topics
Settings .......................................................................................... 466
User Defined .................................................................................. 467
User Defined Columns................................................................... 470
Variable .......................................................................................... 471
Variable Columns .......................................................................... 472
Fixed .............................................................................................. 474
Alternative Text .............................................................................. 474
Settings
Controls the display of the weld list on the drawing and the style used to display weld list data.
Weld List
Turns on or off the display of the weld or operations summary on the isometric drawing. You can
only modify this setting using ISOGEN Configuration. To plot the weld list, select the checkbox.
Defines:
I-Configure - WeldList.Visible
Active List
Defines which of the three weld list styles is used.
Click Show
to display graphical representations of the layout styles listed below, and then
select the appropriate setting.
Fixed
UserDefined
Variable
Defines:
I-Configure - WeldList.ActiveList
466
User Defined
Sets options for the user-defined weld list format. The user-defined weld list offers more
flexibility than the two weld list styles.
Start X
Defines the bottom left X position of the first line of the weld list. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.StartX
Start Y
Defines the bottom left Y position of the first line of the weld list. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.StartY
Direction Down
Sets the plotting of the weld list.
Select the checkbox to plot the material list from the top down. To plot the material list from the
bottom up, clear the checkbox.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.ListDown
467

Layout
Controls the order in which the weld list table is organized.
Horizontal - Plot data from left to right.
Vertical - Plot data from top to bottom.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.TableLayout
Maximum Columns
tables or the maximum number of entries when the table is horizontal. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.MaxCols
468

Maximum Entries
Sets the maximum number of entries for the weld list. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.MaxEntries
Maximum Rows
tables or the maximum number of entries when the table is vertical. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.MaxRows
Horizontal Spacing
Sets the horizontal spacing required between each column of the weld list output when the table
is horizontally formatted or two dimensional. Type the required value in millimeters or inches,
depending on the setting of the drawing units.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.HorizontalSpacing
Vertical Spacing
Specifies the vertical spacing between each horizontal line. Type a value in millimeters or
inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.VerticalSpacing
Colour
Specifies a number that represents the color number as defined in the output drawing system.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.DrawingColour
Layer
Sets the drawing layer for weld list text. Type a value in the range 1-50.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.DrawingLayer
469

Text Font
Specifies a font number corresponding to a font entry in the font information (FIF) file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.TextFont
Text Height
Specifies the text height in millimeters. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.TextHeight
Text Width Factor

Specifies the text width as a percentage of the text height to be used for output of the weld list
on the isometric. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.TextWidthFactor
Text Weight
Specifies the character thickness in millimeters.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.TextWeight
470
User Defined Columns

Specifies which data is output in the user-defined weld list.
Columns
Defines the columns that appear in a user-defined weld list. This must be used with a backing
sheet, as the positions given are for the X coordinate only.
Data is entered using a grid. To open the grid, click Show
the list.
Offset - Specifies the offset in millimeters from the Start X and Start Y settings.
currently defined.
Click Hide
to close the grid.
471
Variable
Sets options for the variable layout weld list format. This format includes options to define
column headers. You can use either a user-defined drawing frame or the standard ISOGEN
drawing frame.
Header Text
Controls the column header text in the weld list.
Click Show
. The software updates the style and displays the text under the Header Text property.
472
Use the forward slash symbol ( \ ) to start a new line. To produce a vertical break, use the
pipe symbol ( | ).
Width is defined by the length of the last line, terminated with the bar character ( | ). The
length of the last line should be at least as long as the total width of data to be displayed
below it.
Column description text in the Header Text text box must lie in the column bounds as
defined.
The column headers must match the column positions set in the report file.
Do not put text in columns that are not within the specified range of columns.
Click Hide
Variable Columns
Controls the attribute data output in the variable layout weld list
Columns
Defines the columns that appear in the variable layout weld list. Data is entered using a grid. To
open the grid, click Show .
the list.
Justification - Sets the alignment of the text. Specify Left, Right, or Numeric.
Start - Specifies the starting point of the column. The valid range is 1-999.
defined for the weld list. The example below indicates the 3 columns are currently defined.
Click Hide
to close the grid.
473
Fixed
Sets options for the fixed layout weld list format. This format produces a simple weld list. You
can use a user-defined drawing frame or the standard ISOGEN drawing frame.
The Active List property must be set to Fixed. For more information, see Settings (on
page 466).
Show Operations Box

Controls whether the weld operations box is shown.
Select the checkbox to display the weld operations box. This operations box replaces the
original weld list if the Weld List checkbox is also selected. To suppress the display of the box,
clear the checkbox. In this case, the original weld list is plotted if the Weld List checkbox is also
selected. For more information about the Weld List drawing property, see Settings (on page
466).
Defines:
I-Configure - WeldList.FixedLayout.ShowOperationsBox
474
Alternative Text
Weld Box Header 1

Denotes text appearing in line 1 of the fixed-format weld summary. Note that columns 1 and 2
are reserved for weld number and category. The default value is
WELD|SHOP|WELD|WELDER|VISUAL|NDT|HARD|S.R.|FAB.QA
AText ID:
-412
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Weld Box Header 2

Denotes text appearing in line 2 of the fixed-format weld summary. Note that columns 1 and 2
are reserved for weld number and category. The default value is NO|/FLD|PROC| ID
|ACCEPT|NO | NO | |ACCEPT.
AText ID:
-413
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Shop Weld Prefix

Denotes weld category identification Shop. The default value is S.
AText ID:
-414
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
475

Field Weld Prefix
Denotes weld category identification Field / Erection. The default value is F.
AText ID:
-415
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Offshore Weld Prefix

Denotes weld category identification Offshore. The default value is O.
AText ID:
-416
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Butt Weld Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for butt welds. The default value is BW.
AText ID:
-417
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Socket Weld Identifier

Identifies weld type in the the User-Defined Weld Summary for socket welds. The default value
is SW.
AText ID:
-418
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Mitre Weld Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for mitre welds. The default value is
MW.
476
AText ID:
-419
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Lug Weld Identifier
Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for lug welds. The default value is LUG.
AText ID:
-420
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Slip On Flange Weld Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for slip on flange welds. The default
value is SOP.
AText ID:
-421
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Olet Weld Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for olet, latrolet, or half coupling welds.
The default value is LET.
AText ID:
-423
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Seal Weld Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for seal welds. The default value is
SLW.
AText ID:
-424
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
477

Seam Weld Identifier
Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for seam welds. The default value is
SEAM.
AText ID:
-438
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Field Fit Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for field fit welds.
AText ID:
-504
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
RPAD Weld Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary, for reinforcing weld when a single weld
is present. The default value is RPD.
AText ID:
-507
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
RPAD Weld 1 Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for reinforcing weld when two welds are
present. The default value is LF.
478
AText ID:
-508
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

RPAD Weld 2 Identifier
Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for second reinforcing weld when two
welds are present. The default value is L4.
AText ID:
-509
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Location Separator
If set, used as a delimiter between the two material list identifiers in the Location column of the
weld summary box.
AText ID:
-510
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
RPAD Part Identifier

Denotes a part identifier in the Location column of the operations box when a reinforcement pad
has not been included on the material list. The default value is PAD.
AText ID:
-511
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Tack Weld Label

Plots a distinguishing message that points to a user-positioned tack weld. The default value is
TACK WELD.
AText ID:
-512
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
479

Tack Weld Identifier
Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for tack welds. The default value is TW.
AText ID:
-513
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
RPAD Item Code

Denotes the item code for a reinforcement pad whenever automatic item code generation is
requested. The default value is REINFPAD.
AText ID:
-514
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
RPAD Description
Denotes the first part of a description for a reinforcement pad when automatic description
generation is requested. The second part of the pad description is the description of the main
pipeline tube to which the pad is welded. The default value is REINFORCEMENT PAD FOR @.
AText ID:
-515
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Trunnion Weld Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for trunnion (support) welds. The default
value is TRN.
480
AText ID:
-516
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Manual Weld Indicator
Denotes weld action identification for a manual weld on the operations list. The default value is
5.
AText ID:
-517
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Automatic Weld Indicator

Denotes weld action identification for an automatic weld on the operations list. The default value
is 1.
AText ID:
-518
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Pulled Bend Indicator

Denotes pulled bend identification on the operations list. The default value is EB.
AText ID:
-519
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Random Length Indicator

Denotes random length identification on the operations list. The default value is RL.
AText ID:
-520
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Fillet Weld Indicator

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for fillet (support) welds. The default
value is FW.
AText ID:
-521
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
481

Reinforcement Weld Indicator 1
Denotes an alternative to AText -422 (Set On Branch Weld Identifier) to identify branch
connection welds for a reinforced tee or cross.
AText ID:
-522
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Angled Reinforcement Weld Indicator

connection welds for an angled (not 90) reinforced tees.
AText ID:
-523
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Angled Branch Weld Indicator

connection welds for an angled (not 90) reinforced tee or cross.
AText ID:
-524
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Coupling Weld Indicator

Denotes the weld type identifier of any olet type component with a symbol key of HCSC or
HCSW.
482
AText ID:
-525
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Angled RPAD Weld 1 Identifier
Denotes the weld type identifier of a reinforcement pad to a main pipeline weld on an angled
branch when two extra weld numbers are requested. Used with AText -527 (Angled RPAD
Weld 2 Identifier).
AText ID:
-526
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Angled RPAD Weld 2 Identifier

Denotes the weld type identifier of a reinforcement pad to branch weld on an angled branch
when two extra weld numbers are requested. Used with AText -526 (Angled RPAD Weld 1
Identifier).
AText ID:
-527
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Elbow Trunnion Weld Identifier

Denotes the weld type identifier of a trunnion to elbow / bend connection.
AText ID:
-528
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
90-deg Pipe Trunnion Weld Identifier

Denotes the weld type identifier of a 90 non-reinforced trunnion to the main pipeline weld.
AText ID:
-529
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
483

Angled Pipe Trunnion Weld Identifier
Denotes the weld type identifier of an angled non-reinforced trunnion to the main pipeline weld.
AText ID:
-530
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
90-deg Reinforced Pipe Trunnion Weld Identifier

Denotes the weld type identifier of a 90 reinforced trunnion to the main pipeline weld.
AText ID:
-531
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Angled Reinforced Pipe Trunnion Weld Identifier

Denotes the weld type identifier of an angled reinforced trunnion to main pipeline weld.
AText ID:
-532
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Field Items Indicator

Identifies field items on an erection type isometric when a new style operations box is requested
(Option Switch 53, Position 2 set to 2). The default value is FI.
AText ID:
-533
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Random Length Indicator

Identifies a random length on an erection type isometric when a new style operations box is
requested (Option Switch 53, Position 2 set to 2). The default value is RL.
484
AText ID:
-534
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Support Indicator
Identifies a pipe support on an erection type isometric when a new style operations box is
requested (Option Switch 53, Position 2 set to 2. The default value is SU.
AText ID:
-535
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Valve Indicator
Identifies a valve on an erection type isometric whenever a new style operations box is
requested (Option Switch 53, Position 2 set to 2. The default value is VL.
AText ID:
-536
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Reports
Defines the content and format of the site weld information file and the weld summary file. The
collection of properties and attributes that appear in Welds > Reports is only a subset of
Drawing Manager > Reports, which includes all of the available ISOGEN reports and
485
Spools
Defines the data required for the output of spool attributes data on the isometric drawing and to
summary report files. The Spools category also contains a collection of properties used to
control the assignment of enclosure styles to spool attributes used to plot the on the isometric.
This category also contains properties that define the data to be output to the spool information
file. The Spools category includes the style groups listed below:
Settings - Organizes a collection of properties that define spool attribute data and the
assignment of enclosure styles on spool isometric drawing. For more information, see
Settings (on page 487).
Flat Spools - Organizes properties that define settings for flat spool drawings. For more
information, see Flat Spools (on page 492).
Attributes - Organizes a collection of properties that control the creation of spool attributes
and the assignment of enclosures. For more information, see Attributes (on page 496).
Reports - Organizes a collection of properties that define the content of the spool
information file. For more information, see Reports.
Click
settings.

See Also
486
Settings
Defines spool attribute data and controls the assignment of enclosure styles on the spool
isometric drawing.
Topics
Spool Breaks ................................................................................. 487
Spool Identifiers ............................................................................. 487
Enclosures ..................................................................................... 491
Spool Breaks
Controls the creation of spools and the assignment of site welds.
Break at Unions
Controls separation of fabrication unions into different spools.
If you select the checkbox, a fabrication union connecting fabrication components does not
create separate spools. Clear the checkbox to create separate spools.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SeparateSpoolUnion
Site Welds are Not Assigned to Spools

Controls site weld assignment to adjoining spools. By default, site welds are assigned to spools
if they are adjoining.
Select the checkbox to suppress the assignment of site welds to adjoining spools. To assign site
welds to adjoining spools, clear the checkbox.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SiteWeldsNotAssignedToSpools
487
Spool Identifiers
Sets properties for spool identifiers.
Spool Drawing Name Rule

Controls the spool drawing identifier used on spool isometrics.
Default - The default, which is the pipeline name followed by the spool identifier (set by
AText -257 to default of SPL) followed by the spool number. If the the spool has been
named, only the spool name is used.
Without spool name:
With spool name:
User- Pipeline name followed by the user-specified spool name.
If the spool is not named, then the spool drawing identifier is the same as the default.
Auto Pipeline Ref - Pipeline name followed by spool number. If the the spool has been
named, only the spool name is used.
Without spool name:
With spool name:
488
Auto Pipeline Filename - Pipeline filename followed by spool number.If the the spool has
been named, only the spool name is used.
Without spool name:
With spool name:
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SpoolDrawingID
Size
styles.
The default setting is 2. The example below shows the default setting used for a circle
enclosure.
The number of characters defines the minimum size at which the circle, double circle, or
ellipse is drawn. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically
adjusts to suit. The Variable size setting allows the circle, double circle, and ellipse to be
smaller than the default of 2 characters, but again dynamically adjust to suit the number of
characters.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SpoolIDSize
489

Type
Turns on and off the display of spool identifiers.
Click Show
None - Turn off the display of spool identifiers to be suppressed. This is the default setting.
Numeric - Include model spool numbers on the isometric drawing.
Alphabetic - As for value 0 but using an alphabetic system of A, B, C, and so on.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SpoolIDType
Length
Sets a fixed (1-9 characters) or variable length for the spool ID length. Select from 1-9 to set the
number of characters or set as variable.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SpoolIDLength
Allocation
Controls allocation of spool numbers for lone fabrication components
No Lone IDs - Do not allocate spool numbers for lone fabrication components.
Allocate Lone IDs - Allocate spool numbers for lone fabrication components.
User Spools Only - User controlled pipe spools only--no automatically generated spools.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SpoolIDAllocation
Sequence
Controls the spool identifier sequence.
Select the checkbox to continue the current spool identifier sequence on each new drawing. For
spool identifiers to restart at 1 on each new drawing, clear the checkbox.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SpoolIDContinuation
490

Prefix
Sets a spool prefix that is output to the data definition (DDF) file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SpoolPrefix
Enclosures
Sets properties for spool ID enclosures.
Style
Specifies the enclosure shape for the spool identifiers.
Click Show
None - Use no enclosure.
Square Brackets - Enclose spool identifiers in the standard square brackets or a double
box enclosure.
Diamond Ends - Enclose spool identifiers in a diamond-ended box.
Round - Enclose spool identifiers in a round-ended box.
Triangular - Enclose spool identifiers in a triangle-shaped box.
Diamond Box - Enclose spool identifiers in a diamond-shaped box.
Square Box - Enclose spool identifiers in a square-ended box.
Circle - Enclose spool identifiers in a circle.
Double Circle - Enclose spool identifiers in a double circle.
Ellipse - Enclose spool identifiers in an ellipse.
The size at which the circle, double circle, and ellipse are drawn is controlled by the Size
setting, which defines the minimum size for the enclosure. If there are more characters than the
value set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit. For more information, see Spool Identifiers
(on page 487).
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SpoolIDEnclosure
491

Layout
Controls the size of the spool ID enclosure.
This is achieved by specifying a mixture of new line and blank character indicators that are used
by the software to pad-out the Style record to effectively increase the size of the enclosure. The
size of the text (set by Text Size) displayed within any increased size enclosure is not increased
in size. The data string associated with each identifier consists of a combination of @, $ and ?
characters.
The ? character indicates where the actual data from the declared record should be located
in the 'padded-out' record.
Setting the value to the text string @$@@?@@$@ increases the Style with the diamond-end
enclosure as shown in the example below:
Use the increase in size with care as it affects the isometric representation considerably.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SpoolIDEnclosureStyle
492
Flat Spools
Defines settings for flat spool drawings.
Topics
Settings .......................................................................................... 493
Settings
Defines settings for flat spool drawings.
Display Up Direction
Allows the Up direction to be displayed on the isometric drawing. The Up direction shown is
relevant to the longest leg length output in the horizontal plane (bottom left to top right) of the
isometric drawing.
Select the checkbox to display the Up direction on longest leg of flat spool. This setting is only
applicable when Orientation Control is set to Longest Leg in E/W plant, Second Longest in
N/S plane. The example below shows the Up direction rotated 90-degrees counter clockwise:
To display the North arrow on all drawings except flat spool isometric drawings, clear the
checkbox.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.FlatSpoolArrow
Orientation Control
Controls placement of the longest pipe in a flat spool drawing.
Maximum Legs Flat
Parallel Legs Flat
Longest Leg in E/W plant, Second Longest in N/S plane

Setting Orientation Control to Parallel Legs Flat is not recommended.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.FlatSpoolOrientation
493
Alternative Texts
Flat Spool Offset Callout

Shows the offset on flat spools. The default value is OFFSET DIRECTION.
AText ID:
-435
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
ATexts -481 to -486 are used in DIRECTION records in the pipeline input data file when
indicating compound directions for some components in skewed pipelines. They are also used
when ISOGEN is generating ORIENTATION and CONNECTION DIRECTION messages on flat
spools.
X Direction
Shows the direction component in positive X. The default value is E.
AText ID:
-481
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Y Direction
Shows the direction component in positive Y. The default value is N.
494
AText ID:
-482
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

-X Direction
Shows the direction component in negative X. The default value is W.
AText ID:
-483
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
-Y Direction
Shows the direction component in negative Y. The default value is S.
AText ID:
-484
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Z Direction
Shows the direction component in positive Z. The default value is U.
AText ID:
-485
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
-Z Direction
Shows the direction component in negative Z. The default ix D.
AText ID:
-486
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Flat Spool Flat Direction

Points to 2D and 3D skew enclosure triangles at eccentric reducers to indicate a flat direction on
flat spools. The default value is FLAT DIRECTION.
AText ID:
-492
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
495

Flat Spool Support Direction
Points to 2D and 3D skew enclosure triangles located at supports on flat spools. The default
value is SUPPORT DIRECTION.
AText ID:
-494
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Flat Spool Branch Direction

Points to 2D and 3D skew enclosure triangles located at undeveloped set-on branches or single
olets on flat spools. The default value is BRANCH DIRECTION.
AText ID:
-495
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Flat Spool Window Direction

Points to 2D and 3D skew enclosure triangles located at sight glasses on flat spools. The default
value is WINDOW LOCATION.
496
AText ID:
-496
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Attributes
Controls the creation of spool attributes and the assignment of enclosures.
Topics
Data Files ....................................................................................... 497
Enclosures ..................................................................................... 497
Data Files
Defines the data required for the output of spool attributes data on the isometric drawing.
Enabled
Controls the creation of spool attributes. Select the checkbox to create the attributes.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.SpoolAttributes.Enabled
Path
Specifies the filename and full path location to the spool attribute file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.SpoolAttributes.Path
Reference ID Location
Sets the spool record as the key to map spool attributes.
Select the spool record for mapping to the spool attribute file in the list. An example of the typical
input in the data definition file is shown below:
SPOOL-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION
RECORD-ID -28
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.SpoolAttributes.ReferenceIDLocation
497
Enclosures
Controls the assignment of enclosure styles to spool attributes used to plot them on the
isometric.
Spool Attribute Enclosures

Defines the enclosure types. Data is entered using a grid. To open the grid, click Show
Type - Specifies the name of the enclosure type. Select the required enclosure in the Type
list.
the Attribute list.
The value that displays on the Spool Attribute Enclosures icon is a count of how many
enclosure assignments have been set. The example below indicates the 3 enclosures are
currently set for spool attributes.
Click Hide
to close the grid and re-display the Preview panel.
Reports
Defines the content and format of the spool information file. The collection of properties and
attributes that appear in Spools > Reports is only a subset of Drawing Manager > Reports,
which includes all of the available ISOGEN reports and applicable properties and attributes. For
more information, see Reports (on page 136).
498
Cut Pieces
Defines properties for the cut list, which provides a list of pipes that are cut into smaller lengths
during construction. You can also define the layout of the fixed and user-defined cut list formats
and set options for the cut list summary file. Properties are also available for controlling cut
length calculations. The Cut Pieces category includes the style groups listed below:
Cut Length Calculations - Organizes a collection of properties that control cut length
calculations, such as setting the amount of extra pipe added for shop purposes or setting the
amount of extra pipe added at loose flange and field weld positions for onshore and offshore
piping. Properties are also available for calculating branch cut length and controlling the use
of weld data. For more information, see Cut Length Calculations (on page 500).
Drawing Cut List - Organizes a collection of properties that define the content and format of
the fixed and user-defined layouts of the cut list. For more information, see Drawing Cut List
(on page 502).
Reports - Organizes a collection of properties that control the generation and content of the
cut list summary file. For more information see Reports (on page 448).
Click
settings.

See Also
499
Cut Length Calculations

Controls cut length calculations, such as setting the amount of extra pipe added for shop
purposes or setting the amount of extra pipe added at loose flange and field weld positions for
onshore and offshore piping. Properties are also available for calculating branch cut length and
controlling the use of weld data.
Topics
Weld Allowances ........................................................................... 500
Branches ........................................................................................ 501
Data ............................................................................................... 501
Weld Allowances
Sets properties for performing cut length calculations, such as setting the amount of extra pipe
added for shop purposes or setting the amount of extra pipe added at loose flange and field
weld positions for onshore and offshore piping.
Shop Test Allowance

Sets the amount of extra pipe that is added for shop test purposes where certain welds are
cut-off together with a short length of pipe after testing.
Type 0 to obtain zero allowance, or type a value (in the range 0-999) of an alternative
allowance.
Shop Test Allowance is applied only to shop test welds.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.ShopWeldAllowance
Field Fit Onshore Allowance

Sets the amount of extra pipe that is added at loose flange and field fit weld (FFW) positions for
onshore piping. Extra pipe is added both to cut pipe length dimensions and to pipe quantities on
allowance.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.OnShoreAllowance
500

Field Fit Offshore Allowance
Sets the amount of extra pipe that is added at loose flange and field fit weld (FFW) positions for
offshore piping. Extra pipe is added both to cut pipe length dimensions and to pipe quantities on
allowance.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.OffShoreAllowance
Branches
Sets properties for calculating branch cut length.
Length to Centre Line and Length to Branch Point are mutually exclusive.
Length to Centre Line

Specifies the calculation of branch cut length. You can specify that the length be measured to
the actual branch connection point or to the run centerline.
Select the checkbox to calculate to the centerline of the main pipeline in all situations. To
calculate the cut length to whatever the branch point position implies, clear the checkbox. No
adjustment to cut length is made.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.LengthToCL
Length to Branch Point

Controls the calculation of branch cut length to the branch point position.
Select the checkbox to calculate the cut length to whatever the branch point position implies,
that is, no adjustment to cut length is made. To calculate to the centerline of the main pipeline in
all situations, clear the checkbox.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.LengthToBranchPoint
501
Data
Sets properties for using weld gap data and data stored in the Elbow Conversion property
when performing cut length calculations.
Use Weld Gap Data

Controls the use of weld gap data. If you select this property, the data stored in the Weld Gaps
property at the project level is written to the welding definition (WDF) file. This data is then used
for setting the weld gaps.
When you import a style, if the WDF contains a WELD-GAPS entry, the Weld Gap and the Use
Weld Gap Data properties are both activated by the import process.
For more information about Weld Gap settings, see Isometric Project Properties in the
I-Configure User's Guide.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UseWeldGapData
Use Tangent Data

When you select the checkbox, the data stored in the Elbow Conversion property at the project
level is written to the drawing definition (DDF) file. This data is then is used for cut list
calculations when elbows have been converted to bends.
When you import a style, if the DDF contains a STANDARD-BEND-LENGTHS entry, the Elbow
Conversion and the Use Tangent Data properties are both activated by the import process.
If there is data in the Elbow Conversion property, then you must also select Use
Tangent Data. Otherwise, any cut lengths can be wrong.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UseTangentData
502
Drawing Cut List

Defines the content and format of the fixed and user-defined layouts of the cut list.
Topics
Settings .......................................................................................... 503
Identifiers ....................................................................................... 504
User-Defined .................................................................................. 504
User-Defined Columns .................................................................. 509
Fixed .............................................................................................. 510
Settings
Controls the creation and generation of the cut list.
Cut List
Turns on and off the display of the cut piece list and cut piece identifiers. The cut list is a report
on the cut pieces that ISOGEN has determined to be in the pipeline. Select the checkbox to
show the cut piece list and numbers on the isometric drawing.
The Active List setting controls whether the cut list report is fixed or user-defined.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.Visible
Active List
Controls the format of the cut list.
Fixed - Use the settings defined by the Fixed (on page 510) properties.
UserDefined - Use the settings defined by the User-Defined (on page 504) properties.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.ActiveList
Include Additional Material

Controls how additional material is handled in the cut list.
None - No entry to cut list for additional material.
Pipe Only - Add entry to cut list for additional material (PIPE).
Misc Only - Add entry to cut list for additional material (MISC).
Pipe and Misc - Add entry to cut list for additional material (PIPE and MISC).
Defines:
I-Configure - CutLlist.IncludeAdditionalMaterial
503

Decimal Inch Output
Specifies the output of cut piece lengths in decimal inches for imperial units used. This property
only applies when imperial units are used.
Select the checkbox to output supplementary cut lengths in decimal inches format in the
REMARKS column of the new style cut piece list. To output standard cut lengths only, clear the
checkbox.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.DecimalInchOutput
Identifiers
Sets properties for cut piece identifiers.
Type
Specifies the cut piece identifier type at the appropriate positions along pipelines.
Numeric - Display cut piece identifiers that are numeric.
Alphabetic - Display cut piece identifiers that are alphabetic.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.CutPieceID
Length
Sets a fixed (1-9 characters or variable) length for part numbers. Select the required number of
characters from the list.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.CutPieceNoLength
Sequence
Specifies whether cut piece numbers increase across drawings.
Continuous - Increase cut piece numbers across drawings.
Per drawing - Start cut piece numbers at 1 (one) or A on each drawing, depending on the
setting of Type.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.CutPieceSequence
504
User-Defined
Sets properties for a user-defined cut list. You can define the X,Y position of the first line and the
table layout, such as the number of rows and columns and the amount of spacing in between.
Start X
Defines the bottom left X position of the first line of the cut list. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.StartX
Start Y
Defines the bottom left Y position of the first line of the cut list. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.StartY
Layout
Controls whether the table is horizontal, vertical, or multiple style. The number of columns that
are output is dependent on the Max Rows setting.
SingleVertical - Output same data items vertically under their relevant heading.
SingleHorizontal - Output same data items horizontally under their relevant heading.
505
MultipleVertical (Across/Down) - Layout of data items is Across > Down.
MultipleVertical (Down/Across) - Layout of data items is Down > Across.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.Layout
Max Rows
tables or the maximum number of entries when the table is vertical. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.MaxRows
Max Columns
tables or the maximum number of entries for a single horizontal table. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.MaxColumns
Horizontal Direction
Sets the horizontal direction for the cut list.
Right - Set the cut list is to the right.
Left - Set the cut list is to the left.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.HorizontalDirection
506

Horizontal Spacing
Sets the horizontal spacing required between each column of the cut pipe list output when the
table is horizontally formatted or two-dimensional. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.HorizontalSpacing
Vertical Direction
Sets the vertical direction for the cut list.
Up - Cut list goes up.
Down - Cut list goes down.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.VerticalDirection
Vertical Spacing
Sets the vertical spacing required between each row of the cut pipe list output when the table is
vertically formatted or two-dimensional. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.VerticalSpacing
Layer
Sets the drawing layer for the cut list text. Type a value in the range 1-50.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.DrawingLayer
Allow Overflow Drawings

Controls whether the cut list causes an overflow drawing.
Select the checkbox to allow the cut list to cause an overflow drawing. When Allows Overflow
Drawings is not selected, and there is no overflow drawing created for any other reason, then
the cut list overflow data is lost.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.AllowOverflowDrawings
507

Show Enclosure
Controls whether cut list enclosures are shown. To display cut list enclosures, select the
checkbox.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.ShowEnclosure
Text Font
Specifies a font corresponding to a font entry in the .fif file. Select an appropriate font from the
list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.TextFont
Text Height
Sets the height of the text in the cut list. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.TextHeight
Text Width Factor

Defines the ratio of width to height of the text in the cut list. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.TextWidthFactor
Text Weight
Sets the character thickness in millimeters. Define a value between 1 and 9. Only used for
MicroStation.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.TextWeight
508
User-Defined Columns
Controls the data that is output in the user-defined cut list.
Columns
Defines the data contained in the user-defined cut list. Data is entered using a grid. To open the
grid, click Show .
the list.
Offset - Specifies the offset in millimeters from the Start X and Start Y. Type a value.
Maximum Characters - Sets the width of the column.
The next example illustrates how the text comment is output to the relevant file.
The value that displays on the Columns icon is a count of how many attributes have been
defined for output in the user-defined cut list. The example below indicates that three
Click Hide
to close the grid.
509
Fixed
Controls the style of the cut list.
Content
Specifies a limited or full cut list.
Standard - Use the old style cut list with limited information.
Extended - Use the new style cut list with full information.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.FixedLayout.Content
510
Alternative Texts
Pulled Bend Remark

Denotes a pulled bend remark, which is listed under AText -324 (REMARKS HEADING) if a cut
pipe length contains a pulled bend. The default value is PLD BEND.
AText ID:
-326
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Loose Flange Remark

Denotes a remark which is listed under AText -324 (REMARKS HEADING) if a cut pipe length
has a loose flange requirement. The default value is LOOSE FLG.
AText ID:
-327
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Field Fit Remark

Denotes the field fit weld remark that is listed under AText -324 (REMARKS HEADING) if a cut
pipe length contains a field fit weld. The default value is FFWELD.
AText ID:
-328
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
511

Pulled Bend Label
Identifies fabricated bends when listed as separate items on the material list. The default value
is FABRICATED (PULLED) BENDS.
AText ID:
-351
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Weight Heading
Denotes the column heading for weight. The default value is WEIGHT.
AText ID:
-352
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
KGS Indicator
Denotes a units indicator for kilogram weights. Used as part of the Weight column heading and
in the pipeline weight summary area at the bottom of the material list. The default value is KGS.
AText ID:
-353
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
LBS Indicator
Denotes a units indicator for pound weights. Used as part of the Weight column heading and in
the pipeline weight summary area at the bottom of the material list. The default value is LBS.
512
AText ID:
-354
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Total Weight Label
Denotes identification text for total pipeline weight in the Weight column and in the weight
summary area at the bottom of the material list. The default value is TOTAL WEIGHT - THIS
DRG.
AText ID:
-355
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Erection Weld Label

Identifies special type erection welds. It is used on the material list and on the isometric area as
a prefix to the part number. The default value is B.
AText ID:
-357
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Fab Weld Label

Identifies special type fabrication welds. It is used in the material list and on the isometric area
as a prefix to the part number. The default value is W.
AText ID:
-358
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Bolt Unit Subheading

Denotes the bolts sub-heading. ISOGEN outputs in DIA x LENGTH sequence.
AText ID:
-359
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
513

Offshore Material Heading
Denotes the category heading under which components required for OFFSHORE erection are
listed. The default value is OFFSHORE MATERIALS.
AText ID:
-371
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
General Remarks Heading

Denotes the Remarks region heading at the bottom of the material list where remarks text is
collectively listed. The default value is REMARKS.
AText ID:
-372
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Remark Number Heading

Denotes the Remarks column heading in the material list. Remark reference numbers are listed
in this column. The default value is REM.
AText ID:
-373
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Welds Sub-Heading
Denotes the group sub-heading under which all welds are listed. The default value is WELDS.
514
AText ID:
-375
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Total Fab Weight Label
Denotes identification text for total fabrication weight in the Weight column and in the weight
summary area at the bottom of the material list. The default value is TOTAL FABRICATION
WEIGHT.
AText ID:
-379
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Total Erect Weight Label

Denotes identification weight for total erection weight in the Weight column and in the weight
summary area at the bottom of the material list. The default value is TOTAL ERECTION
WEIGHT.
AText ID:
-380
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Total Offshore Weight Label

Denotes identification text for total erection weight in the Weight column and in the weight
summary area at the bottom of the material list. The default value is TOTAL OFFSHORE
WEIGHT.
AText ID:
-381
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Total Unlisted Weight Label

Denotes identification text for the total weight of unlisted items in the Weight column and in the
weight summary area at the bottom of the material list. The default value is TOTAL WEIGHT
UNLISTED ITEMS.
AText ID:
-382
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
515

Missing Weight Identifier
Denotes a missing weight indicator. The asterisk character ( * ) is a special marker used on both
weight and CoG outputs to indicate that components with zero weight were encountered. The
default value is *.
AText ID:
-383
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Additional Material - Tangent

Indicates where additional material has been added to a cut piece length to provide a minimum
tangent length for a start or finish bend leg. Used in the cut list Remarks column. The default
value is TANGENT +.
AText ID:
-384
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Additional Material - Cut/Weld

Indicates cut pieces that have additional material added between adjacent bends. Used in the
cut piece remarks section. The default value is CUT/WELD.
AText ID:
-385
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Accumulated Pipe Indicator

Distinguishes an accumulated pipe sub-total from an individual pipe entry. The default value is
TOT.
516
AText ID:
-394
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No

Jacket Spec Identifier
Indicates that a jacket specification identifier is set in a JACKET-SPEC type record in the
pipeline input data file. Appears in the title block. The record content is appended to the AText to
form a composite message. The default value is JACKET SPEC.
AText ID:
-436
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Shop Test Identifier

Identifies cut pieces that need an additional shop test allowance. Used on the cut list. Applies to
welds with SKEY WSST or WFST. The default value is SHOP TEST.
AText ID:
-500
? Value:
None
$ Supported:
No
Reports
Defines the content and format of the fixed and user-defined layouts of the cut list. The
collection of properties and attributes that appear in Cut Pieces > Reports is only a subset of
Drawing Manager > Reports, which includes all of the available ISOGEN reports and
517
APPENDIX B
Appendix: ISOGEN Files

In This Appendix
ASCII-SYMBOLS ........................................................................... 519
BINARY-SYMBOLS ....................................................................... 519
BOLT-INFORMATION-FILE .......................................................... 520
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE ............................................ 520
FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE ...................................................... 521
HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE ...................................................... 540
INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE ......................................................... 540
OPTION-SWITCH-OVERRIDE...................................................... 541
PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE......................................................... 542
PROJECT-MATERIAL-DATA ........................................................ 543
PROJECT-MATERIAL-MANAGER ............................................... 544
PROJECT-PIPELINE ..................................................................... 545
REFERENCE-PLANE-DEFINITION .............................................. 546
REMARKS ..................................................................................... 548
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY ..................................................................... 548
ASCII-SYMBOLS
Contains definitions of the user-defined ISOGEN symbols, such as new and re-defined SKEYS.
Information in this file is used to override default ISOGEN behavior when plotting shapes in the
isometric drawing to represent components in the pipeline.
This item points to the ASCII (human-readable) form of the symbol data. It can be created using
the ISOGEN Symbol Editor software.
BINARY-SYMBOLS
Contains definitions of the user-defined ISOGEN symbols, such as new and re-defined SKEYs.
Information in this file is used to override default ISOGEN behavior when plotting shapes in the
Isometric drawing to represent components in the pipeline.
This item points to the BINARY (computer-readable) form of the symbol data. It can be created
using the ISOGEN Symbol editor software.
519
BOLT-INFORMATION-FILE
Contains the look-up data to allow ISOGEN to produce reports on the bolted connections in the
pipeline. For a description of the contents of this file, see BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT Section (on
page 523).
Contains the information listed below for each component entry:
Design contractor item code (the item code in the input piping data file)
Main and secondary component bores
Main and secondary thickness/rating.
Fabricator item code
Fabricator material description
Component weight
This is the maximum amount of information that can be held for each component. The
information that appears depends upon what facilities are being used.
The structure and layout of the COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE is defined by the

COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE section of the FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE (FDF).
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE (CIF) rules summary

1. Weight data in the CIF takes precedence over weights in the piping data file.
2. If the CoG facility is to be used, then component weight information must be available in
either the CIF or the piping data input files.
3. Several ITEM-CODE-IDENTIFIER entries can be made in the CIF to cater to a variety of
different design contractor or fabricator item codes. The ones used are specified in the
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION section (on page 529) of the
FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE.
4. To handle projects with metric bore piping data files and imperial bore piping data files, two
sets of N.S. and N.S.SEC information can be included in the CIF, with both projects sharing
the one CIF. However, two separate FDFs are required to specify the required N.S. to be
used on a particular project.
520

Item codes in the CIF
Item codes for components in the CIF can be constructed (and specified) in two different ways,
as outlined below.
1. In the form of unique codes with built-in bore information:
E-90-CS1-40:3 - This is an elbow of 3" bore.
E-90-CS1-40:4 - This is the same elbow, but of 4" bore.
R-C-CS1-40:4X3 - This is a concentric reducer of bore 4" X 3".
This type of Item code does not need N.S. and N.S.SEC data fields to specify the bore
information because it is built-in to the item code.
2. Codes having separate bores:
E-90-CS1-40
R-C-CS1-40
This type of Item code does need N.S. and N.S.SEC data fields to completely identify the
component.
There are no rules as to whom should use which of the two types of item code construction.
Some design contractors use the first type.
521
Provides the following functions:
1. Defines the units for:
Lengths
Weights
Nominal sizes
2. Defines the content and structure of other files that form part of the component information
facilities, namely:
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE (on page 520)
INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE (on page 540)
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY (on page 548)
3. Uses a system of cross-reference pointers in the

COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION Section (on page 529). The FDF defines the
functions of the various columns of data in the COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE (on
page 520) .
4. Provides bend radius identification. For more information, see MISC-DEFINITIONS Section
(on page 530).
5. Specifies the format of the Weight and CoG summary file. For more information, see
WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARY-FILE Section (on page 536).
6. Defines of IDF changes, where nominated IDF record types can have their normal use
either changed or deleted. For more information, see IDF-REVISIONS Section (on page
529).
7. Controls the format of the:
Bolting output. For more information, see BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT Section (on page
523).
PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE (on page 542)
HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE (on page 540)
SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT (on page 532)
SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE (on page 535)
The FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE includes the sections listed below. Each section has a
keyword identifier and its own list of data inputs.
522
UNITS-DEFINITION Section (on page 535)
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE (on page 526)
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION Section (on page 529)
INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE Section (on page 530)
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE Section (on page 531)
MISC-DEFINITIONS Section (on page 530)
WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARY-FILE Section (on page 536)
IDF-REVISIONS Section (on page 529)
BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT Section (on page 523)
PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE (on page 542)
HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE (on page 540)
SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT (on page 532)
SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE (on page 535)
BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT Section
Defines the output format for bolted connections on the erection operations list. The
BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT section heading is followed by the three sub-section headings listed
below, each of which has its own data items:
BOLTING-INFO-CONTROLS
List - Controls the form of list to be output. Specify CONTINUOUS-DOWN or

CONTINUOUS UP. This is a mandatory setting.
Start Position - Identifies the start position for the output of the bolting Information, where X
pos and Y pos are input in millimeters, either real (one decimal place) or integer, such as
225, or 225.0, or 225.5). This is a mandatory setting.
START-POSITION X pos Y pos
Vertical Spacing - Specifies the vertical spacing required between each horizontal line of
text on the bolting information list, where the value is input in millimeters, either real (one
decimal place) or integer, such as 6, 6.0, or 6.2). This is a mandatory setting.
VERTICAL-SPACING value
Max Number of Lines - Specifies the maximum number of output lines that can fit on the
backing sheet, where the value is an integer number. This is a mandatory setting
MAXIMUM-ENTRIES value
Text Height - Specifies the height of the characters in the text to be output on the bolting
information list, where value is real (one decimal place) or integer, such as 2, 2.0, or 2.3).
This is a mandatory setting.
TEXT-HEIGHT value (in mm)
Drawing Layer - Identifies the drawing layer for outputting the text on to (where value is an
integer number that is valid for the graphics system being used). This is an optional setting.
DRAWING-LAYER value
Text Thickness (Weight) - Identifies the text thickness (weight) for all output text to the
bolting information list, where the value is an integer number that is valid for the graphics
system being used. This is an optional setting.
TEXT-THICKNESS value
523

An example of the BOLTING-INFO-CONTROL section is shown below:
BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT - - - - - - BOLTING-INFO-CONTROL
CONTINUOUS-DOWN
START-POSITION
VERTICAL-SPACING
TEXT-HEIGHT
MAXIMUM-ENTRIES
DRAWING-LAYER
TEXT-THICKNESS
450.0
4.0
2.5
12
16
2
Section Header
106.0
BOLTING-DATA-ITEMS
BOLT-SET NO - Displays the bolted connection number. This is a system-generated

number.
N.S. - Specifies the nominal size at bolted connection. Output in this format: - 4" = 040.
BOLT-UP-TYPE - One of these values from the related piping specification entry in the
bolting information file (-146 type).
HT HW MW NW
BOLT-DIA - Specifies the diameter of the bolts used for the flanged connection. Taken from
the 115 bolt record in the IDF. Output in this format: - " = 050 " = 007 1" = 010.
BOLT-QUANTITY - Specifies the number of bolts required for the flanged connection.
Taken (two digits) from the 115 bolt record in the IDF.
Each of the previous is followed by the X position for location on the drawing frame.
TENSION-A: Any value set in the BIF (-146) file against the relevant piping specification
/ size combination.
TENSION-B: Any value found to go into relevant column on the operations list.
TORQUE-SETTING
An example of the BOLTING-DATA-ITEMS section is shown below:

BOLTING-INFO-DATA-ITEMS
'BOLT-SET-NO'
450.0
'N.S.'
463.0
'BOLT-UP-TYPE'
486.0
'BOLT-DIA'
504.0
'BOLT-QUANTITY'
522.0
'TENSION-A'
540.0
'TENSION-B'
558.0
'TORQUE-SETTING
576.0
524

BOLTING-INFO-FILE
'PIPINGSPEC
Start Col
End Col
MINN.S.
Start Col
End Col
MAXN.S.
Start Col
End Col
BOLTUPTYPE
Start Col
End Col
TENSIONA
Start Col
End Col
TENSIONB
Start Col
End Col
TORQUESETTING
Start Col
End Col
Where Start Col and End Col indicate the extremities of each data column in the file.
MINN.S. and MAX-N.S. - Must be stated in the units specified at the top of the FDF file.
BOLTUPTYPE - Must be one of the following:
HT = Hydraulic Tensioner
HW = Hydraulic Wrench
MW = Manual Torque Wrench
NW = Non Mandatory (Hand Tightening)
TENSION-A, TENSIONB or TORQUESETTING -
All entries on the list are triggered by the presence of a Bolt Record (-115 type) in the IDF
or the attribute BOLT in a PCF.
525

Each bolted connection is indicated on the isometric drawing using the Drawing Area > Piping
Features > Assemblies properties listed below. For more information, see Assemblies (on
page 200).
Site Assembly Identifier
Site Assembly Size
Site Assembly Identifiers Per Drawing
Site Assembly Style
The site assembly uses the AText -478 default value (J) to prefix the flange assembly
identification (J1 or JA).
An example of the BOLTING-INFO-FILE section is shown below.

BOLTINGINFOFILE
PIPINGSPEC
MINN.S.
MAXN.S.
BOLTUPTYPE
TENSIONA
TENSIONB
TORQUESETTING
1
15
23
32
35
50
65
12
20
29
33
45
60
75
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE Section
Provides a cross-reference to entries in the Component Information File (CIF) by defining the
layout and content of that file.
The section heading COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE is followed by the following identifiers
and associated data.
ITEM-CODE-IDENTIFIER
N.S.
N.S.SEC
N.S.THIRD
N.S.THICKNESS/RATING
N.S.SEC.THICKNESS/RATING
N.S.WALL-THICKNESS
N.S.SEC.WALL-THICKNESS
DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT-WEIGHT
COMPONENT-CONTENT-WEIGHT
EQUIVILANT-INSULATION-LENGTH
N.S.CONVERSION-CODE
RADIUS-DIAMETERS
RADIUS-MM
RADIUS-INCH
DETAILED-SKETCH
INFORMATION-NOTE
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 to COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10 (-190 tom -199)
MATERIAL-ATTRIBUTE1 to MATERIAL-ATTRIBUTE10 (-80 to -89)
User Defined Names matching those used in the PCF file
526

DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE (on page 520).
Each of the following is followed by either start-col. end-col. or position in file, depending on
whether a delimiter character is set.
FDF Identifier
Used For
Used For
ITEM-CODE-IDENTIFIER
1) Design contractors item code.
2) Fabricator's item code.
2) Fabricator's item code.

N.S.
The main bore of a component.

Specified in accordance with the
UNITS-BORE identifier in the
UNITS-DEFINITION section of the
FDF.
The main bore of a component. Specified in

accordance with the UNITS-BORE identifier in
the UNITS-DEFINITION section of the FDF.
N.S.SEC
The secondary bore of a

component. Specified in
accordance with the UNITS-BORE
identifier in the UNITS-DEFINITION
section of the FDF.
The secondary bore of a component. Specified

in accordance with the UNITS-BORE identifier in
N.S.THIRD
A third bore of a component.

Specified in accordance with the
UNITS-BORE identifier in the
FDF.
A third bore of a component. Specified in

accordance with the UNITS-BORE identifier in
N.S.THICKNESS/RATING
Thickness/Rating for the main bore

of a component.
Thickness/Rating for the main bore of a

component.
N.S.SEC.THICKNESS/RATIN
G
Thickness/Rating for the secondary

bore of a component.
Thickness/Rating for the secondary bore of a

component.
N.S.OUTSIDE-DIAMETER
The outside diameter of the main

bore of the component.
The outside diameter of the main bore of the

component.
N.S.SEC.OUTSIDE-DIAMETE
R
The outside diameter of the

secondary bore of the component.
The outside diameter of the secondary bore of

the component.
N.S.WALL-THICKNESS
The wall thickness of the main bore

of the component.
The wall thickness of the main bore of the

component.
N.S.SEC.WALL-THICKNESS
The wall thickness of the secondary

bore of the component.
The wall thickness of the secondary bore of the

component.
DESCRIPTION
Fabricator's material descriptions.
Fabricator's material descriptions.
COMPONENT-WEIGHT
The weight of a component - in the

weight units specified in accordance
with the UNITS-WEIGHT identifier
in the UNITS-DEFINITION section
of the FDF.
The weight of a component - in the weight units

specified in accordance with the
UNITS-WEIGHT identifier in the
UNITS-DEFINITION section of the FDF.
527
FDF Identifier
Used For
Used For
COMPONENT-CONTENTWEIGHT
The weight of the components

water volume specified in
accordance with the
UNITS-WEIGHT identifier in the
UNITS- DEFINITION section of the
FDF. For PIPE, the weight specified
heres the weight per unit length for
the length units specified in the
UNITS-LENGTH Identifier in the
FDF.
The weight of the components water volume

specified in accordance with the
UNITS-WEIGHT Identifier in the UNITSDEFINITION section of the FDF. For PIPE the
weight specified heres the weight per unit length
for the length units specified in the
UNITS-LENGTH identifier in the
EQUIVILANT-INSULATIONLENGTH
Used to equate the component

insulation weight to a length based
weight. Values here are the
equivalent length of insulation in
accordance with the weight and
length units in the UNITS- LENGTH
and UNITS-WEIGHT identifiers in
the UNITS-DEFINITION section of
the FDF.
Used to equate the component insulation weight

to a length based weight. Values here are the
equivalent length of insulation in accordance
with the weight and length units in the UNITSLENGTH and UNITS-WEIGHT identifiers in the
N.S.CONVERSION-CODE
This is used where the N.S. and

N.S. Header output on the Weld list
and Weld summary outputs is to be
replaced by a user supplied code.
This is used where the N.S. and N.S. Header

output on the Weld list and Weld summary
outputs is to be replaced by a user supplied
code.
RADIUS-DIAMETERS
Bend radius specified as a number

of diameters.
Bend radius specified as a number of diameters.
RADIUS-MM
Bend radius specified in mm.
RADIUS-INCH
DETAILED-SKETCH
Detail sketch file name.
Detail sketch file name.
INFORMATION-NOTE
Information note name.
Information note name.
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1
to
Data for Component attributes.
Data for Component attributes.
MATERIAL-ATTRIBUTE1 to
MATERIAL- ATTRIBUTE10
Data for Material attributes.
Data for Material attributes.
User-defined names matching

those used in the PCF file.
Data for user-defined names.
Data for user-defined names.
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10
528
The actual number of these data items present will depend upon which of the available
facilities are being used.
The maximum width of the file is 500 characters and any characters outside this limit are
ignored.
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION Section
Provides a link between the design contractor's item code that appears in the Piping data file
and the location of the corresponding entry for that component in the
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE (on page 520).
This FDF section defines:
Design contractor's item code
Alternative item code
Alternative description
The section heading COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION is followed by the identifiers

listed:
ITEM-CODE-INPUT data
ITEM-CODE-OUTPUT data
DESCRIPTION data
Where data is either a start column or file position, depending on whether the component
information file is a delimited file. The minimum requirement in this section is the input item
code:
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION
ITEM-CODE-INPUT 1
(section identifier)
Alternatively, if item code transposition and material description substitution are being used, the
file resembles the example below:
ITEM-CODE-INPUT 1
ITEM-CODE-OUTPUT 51
DESCRIPTION 76
Or for a delimited file:

ITEM-CODE-INPUT
1
ITEM-CODE-OUTPUT
7
DESCRIPTION
10
529
IDF-REVISIONS Section
Allows you to delete or change the meaning of the numeric record identifiers that are present in
all IDFs in order to make them fully compatible with ISOGEN. This facility is particularly useful to
those customers who use the component information facility, but who are handling non-standard
Alias IDFs, such as IDFs generated by PDMS.
The IDF-REVISIONS section heading is followed by one or several of the entries listed below,
depending on what manipulation of records needs to be performed:
DELETE-RECORD data - Where data is any invalid record number that is to be ignored.
CHANGE-RECORD data1 data2 - Where data1 is any invalid record number, and data2 is
the replacement record number for data1.
REDEFINED-SKEY data1 data2 - Where data1 is the SKEY in the IDF file and data2 is the
SKEY to be used instead.
The previous examples are for illustrative purposes only. If you need assistance,
contact Intergraph Support.
IDF-REVISIONS
DELETE-RECORD -900
CHANGE-RECORD 707 877
REDEFINED-SKEY LWWN FLWN
INSULTATION-WEIGHT-FILE Section
Provides a cross-reference to entries in the insulation weight file (IWF) by defining the layout
and content of that file.
The INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE section heading can be followed by the identifiers and
associated data listed below:
DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the insulation
weight file, as shown in the following example:
DELIMITER-CHARACTER :
INSULATION-SPECIFICATION 1
N.S. 2
INSULATION-WEIGHT 3
Start-col. End-col. - Position in the file dependent upon whether a delimiter character is set,
as shown in the following example:
INSULATION-SPECIFICATION 1 14
N.S. 15 24
INSULATION-WEIGHT 25 34
530
MISC-DEFINITIONS Section
Supports facilities that do not warrant an individual section. Currently, this section is only used to
define bend radius values.
The input structure in this FDF section is a section heading:
MISC-DEFINITIONS
followed by the bend radius definition:
BEND-RADIUS data units
where
data = the pipe bend radius.
units = inches or millimeters, when RADIUS is a value, and D when the radius is a number
of pipe diameters.
Consider the following:

MISC-DEFINITIONS
BEND-RADIUS 5 D
Other typical data inputs are:
BEND-RADIUS 3 D
BEND-RADIUS 5.5 D
BEND-RADIUS 12 INCH
BEND-RADIUS 18.5 INCH
BEND-RADIUS 220 MM
BEND-RADIUS 1250 MM
Bend radius information is used by both the CoG and weights facilities.
531
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE Section
Provides a cross-reference to entries in the specific gravity file (SGF) by defining the layout and
content of that file.
The SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE section heading is followed by the identifiers and associated
data listed below:
DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the specific
gravity file .
PIPELINE-REFERENCE - Followed by either start-col. end-col. or position in file, depending

on whether a delimiter character is used.
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY - Followed by either start-col. end-col. or position in file, depending on

whether a delimiter character is used.
Start col. end col. Example
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE
PIPELINE-REFERENCE
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY
1 20
21 30
Delimiter Example
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE
DELIMITER-CHARACTER :
PIPELINE-REFERENCE
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY
532
1
2
SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT
Defines the output format of the site assembly report.
The section heading SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT is followed by two sub-section headings:
SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT-COLUMN-HEADINGS - The column headings are arranged

and spaced out exactly as they are required to appear in the output report file, as shown in
the following example:
SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT
SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT-COLUMN-HEADINGS
LINEREF DRG ASSY NS BOLT NO ASSY
NO NO DIA OFF ATT1
The column headings look out of line in the example as the space character is
narrower than an actual character.
SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT-DATA-ITEMS - Permissible data items are listed below:

Unique Name
IDF Record Number
PIPELINE-REFERENCE
-6
DRG
REVISION
-8
BATCH
-10
AREA
-10
PROJECT-IDENTIFIER
-9
PIPING-SPEC
-11
NOMINAL-CLASS
-12
NOMINAL-RATING
-12
DATE-DMY
-14
INSULATION-SPEC
-15
TRACING-SPEC
-16
PAINTING-SPEC
-17
PIPELINE-TEMP
-19
MISC-SPEC1
-41
MISC-SPEC2
-42
533

Unique Name
IDF Record Number
MISC-SPEC3
-43
MISC-SPEC4
-44
MISC-SPEC5
-45
BOLT-SET-NO
N.S.
BOLT-UP-TYPE
BOLT-DIA
BOLT-QUANTITY
TENSION-A
TENSION-B
TORQUE-SETTING
ATTRIBUTE0 to ATTRIBUTE99
-600 to -699
ATTRIBUTE100 to
ATTRIBUTE199
-900 to -999
ASSEMBLY-ATTRIBUTE1 to
ASSEMBLY- ATTRIBUTE10
-190 to -199
Consider the following example:

SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT-DATA-ITEMS
'PIPELINE-REFERENCE' 1 L
'DRG'
10 L
'BOLT-SET-NO'
15 L
'N.S.'
21 L
'BOLT-DIA'
26 L
'BOLT-QUANTITY'
36 L
'ASSEMBLY-ATTRIBUTE1' 45 L
All the above is carried out in ISOGEN Configuration, the Assembly attribute is set in the
software by selecting each bolt and then setting the value for the Assembly attribute on that
bolt.
The data items BOLT-UP-TYPE, TENSION-A, TENSION-B and TORQUE-SETTING
require the bolting info file (BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT section of FDF).
See Also
BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT Section (on page 523)
534
SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE
Defines the format of the spool attribute file, which must be defined in Drawing Manager >
Reports (on page 136). The SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE section heading is followed by the
following identifiers and associated data.
DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the spool
attribute file. (Optional).
IGNORE_CHARACTER data - Where data is any character that should be ignored when
the program is extracting data for the Spool attribute file if it is a delimited file. (Optional).
The data items are -28, -91, -170 to -179, followed by either start-col. end-col. or position in file,
depending on whether a delimiter character is set. This can be followed by the ! character as a
comment for user information.
SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE
DELIMITER-CHARACTER ;
IGNORE-CHARACTER
-28
1
!
Spool Name
-170 2
!
Spool Attribute 1
-171 3
!
Spool Attribute 2
UNITS-DEFINITION Section
Defines the following units for data items listed in the COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE
(CIF):
Unit length
Weight
Nominal size (N.S.)
The section heading UNITS-DEFINITION is followed by the identifiers and associated data listed
below:
UNITS-BORE data, where data equals inch or millimeter.
UNITS-LENGTH data, where data equals foot (Weights / Foot) or meter (Weights / Meter).
UNITS-WEIGHT data, where data equals Kgs. or Lbs.

UNITS-DEFINITION
UNITS-BORE INCH
UNITS-LENGTH METER
UNITS-WEIGHT KGS
535

Input data formats
inch bores - You can type 1/2, 0.1/2, 0.5, 1, 1.0, 1.1/2, 1.5, 2, 10 (1 1/2 is also permitted for
1)
mm bores - You can type 50 or 50.0
weights - You can type 25 or 25.0
Units selection process

It is expected that the units' settings in OS 41 and the FDF match. However, if they do not
match, the sequence below is followed:
Units for weights and lengths - The units specified in OS 41 are regarded as the master
units. For example, if OS 41 specifies weights in LBS, but the weights in the CIF are kgs,
then all kilogram values are converted to pounds on output. A similar procedure is applied to
length units.
Units for N.S. - The unit settings in the FDF and Piping data file must be the same. A check
is performed between the N.S. units as defined by O.S. 41 and the UNITS-BORE attribute in
the FDF. If they differ, the run is terminated with Error Code 35:1126.
WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARY-FILE Section
Defines the required content and layout structure of the weight and center -of-gravity printed
output summary file.
The input definition for this section is in three separate parts:
SUMMARY-FILES-TITLES
The section heading SUMMARY-FILE-TITLES is followed by the title data. There are two
different types of title data information items:
1. Variable user-defined descriptive title text, such as PROJECT NO. or AREA REF.
2. Fixed data items. These are standard keywords or equivalent I/D numbers that are used to
describe a required data field. They are written inside single quotation marks ( ' ' ) to
distinguish them from the variable user-defined title text.
The two types are used together to make-up the required file heading.
The following rules apply to the title data section SUMMARY-FILE-TITLES text:
536
Both user-defined descriptive title text and fixed keyword text are positioned in the output file
on the exact line and in the column position at which they are input.
User-defined descriptive title text can be written in upper- or lower- case characters and is
re-produced as specified in this respect.
Fixed data items can be defined either as keywords written in upper-case characters and
enclosed in single quotes, or can be represented by their standard text record numbers
(inside single quotes).
Empty lines for spacing purposes are created by the instruction Blank.
Use the characters ' ' in conjunction with the word PAGE to obtain page numbers. For
example, PAGE ' ' automatically produces PAGE 1, PAGE 2, and so on, at the top of each
printed output page.
SUMMARY-FILE-COLUMN-HEADINGS
The section heading SUMMARY-FILE-COLUMN-HEADINGS is followed by the column
headings data (this section is optional).
All column headings data are reported in the output file exactly as it is specified in the FDF. The
text should be positioned to suit the data items layout that follows it.
SUMMARY-FILE-DATA-ITEMS
The section heading SUMMARY-FILE-DATA-ITEMS is followed by the data item entries. Each
data item entry in this part of the FDF is input using either two, three, or five parameters,
depending on the type of data item being specified.
C of G with a vertical layout uses three parameters.
C of G with a horizontal layout uses five parameters.
All others including weight output use two parameters.
The first part is a keyword that must be enclosed in single quotes ( ' ' ).
Typical entries appear as shown in the example below:
Most keywords have an equivalent numeric identifier which can be used as an alternative to the
text. For example, the numeric equivalent of PIPELINE-REFERENCE is -6.
Numbers, when used, must also be enclosed by single quotes ' '.
Character justification letters:
L - Left
R - Right
N - Number (the column position in this case is the decimal)
V - Vertical output
537

For example:
E3252
N1020
EL -1566
H - Horizontal output
For example:
E3252 N1020 EL -1566
V and H parameters are only used on C of G output data because this type of data has three
output values, not one, and their output layout direction must be specified. The V parameter
gives an automatic Vertical layout but where Horizontal justification is specified, extra starting
column information must be given one for each C of G output value, as shown in the following
example:
'COFG-POSITION-DRY' 44 58 72 L H
Data items available for output in the WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARYFILE.
Key Name
Equivalent I/D
Number
Equivalent I/D Number
AREA or BATCH
-10
-10
COFG-POSITION-DRY
-714
-714
COFG-POSITION-DRY+INSU
-715
-715
COFG-POSITION-WET
-716
-716
COFG-POSITION-WET+INSU
-717
-717
DATE
-14
-14
ERECTION-WEIGHT-DRG
-706
-706
ERECTION-WEIGHT-PIPELINE
-719
-719
FABRICATION-WEIGHT-DRG
-705
-705
FABRICATION-WEIGHT-PIPELINE -718
-718
INSULATION-SPEC
-15
-15
OFFSHORE-WEIGHT-DRG
-707
-707
OFFSHORE-WEIGHT-PIPELINE
-720
-720
PIPELINE-REFERENCE
-6
-6
PIPING-SPEC
-11
-11
DRG
538

Key Name
Equivalent I/D
Number
Equivalent I/D Number
PROJECT-IDENTIFIER
-9
-9
REVISION
-8
-8
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY
-18
-18
SYSTEM-REFERENCE
-25
-25
TOTAL-DRY-WEIGHT-DRG
-704
-704
TOTAL-DRY-WEIGHT-PIPELINE
-711
-711
TOTAL-INSULATION-WEIGHT
-713
-713
TOTAL-WET-WEIGHT
-712
-712
If a -143 Specific Gravity File (SGF) is present, then values from that file will be used in
preference to any specific gravity value found in an IDF -18 record (see table above).
The name of the output C of G summary file is specified in Drawing Manager > Reports.
For more information, see Reports (on page 136).
Also, the Drawing Manager > Drawing Generation > Centre of Gravity properties control
the data generated for center of gravity. For more information, see Centre of Gravity (on
page 115).
539
HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE
Defines the format of the HeatTreatment/NDE file, which must be defined by Drawing Manager
> Input Files > Heat Treatment. For more information, see Heat Treatment (on page 133).
The section heading HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE is followed by the identifiers and associated
data listed below:
DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Specifies the delimiter used in the HeatTreatment/NDE

IGNORE_CHARACTER data - Specifies any character that should be ignored when the
software is extracting data for the HeatTreatment/NDE attribute file if it is a delimited file.
(Optional).
Data Items - The data items are the -900 to -999 series text type record identifiers, followed
by either start-col,. end-col,. or position in file dependent upon whether a delimiter character
is set. The data after the ! character is a comment for user information, as shown in the
following example:
HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE
DELIMITER-CHARACTER ,
-950 2 ! PWHT N.S. RANGE
-951 3 ! PWHT TEMPERATURE
-952 4 ! PREHEAT N.S RANGE
-953 5 ! PREHEAT TEMPERATURE
-954 6 ! % RT
-955 7 ! % MT
-956 8 ! % PT
-957 9 ! % BHN
540
Contains weights of insulation on a bore/unit length basis for each insulation specification. This
is needed if insulation weights are to be calculated and output.
Insulation Specification
Bore Size
Insulation Weight
CAL199
1/2
1.04
CAL199
3/4
1.04
CAL199
1.04
CAL199
1.1/4
1.04
CAL199
1.1/2
1.19
CAL199
1.49
CAL199
2.1/2
1.63
541
OPTION-SWITCH-OVERRIDE
Specifies an OPTION-SWITCH-OVERRIDE file, which can contain specific values for particular
option switches:
130 6
139 12
The switches in the previous example override any value output by the software. Alternatively,
switch positions can be specified using the asterisk character ( * ) to indicate an unchanged
switch position. For example, to set Option Switch 1, Position 3 to 4, type the following in the file:
1 4**
Likewise, to set Option Switch 10, Position 5 to 1, and position 2 to 3, type the following:
10 1**3*
542
PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE
Defines the format of the pipeline attributes file. The PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE section
heading is followed by the identifiers and associated data listed below:
DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the pipeline
IGNORE_CHARACTER data - Where data is any character that should be ignored when
the application is extracting data for the pipeline attribute file if it is a delimited file.
(Optional).
The data items are the -900 to -999 series text type record identifiers, followed by either
start-col. end-col. or position in file dependent upon whether a delimiter character is set. The
data after the ! character is a comment for user information.
PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE
DELIMITER-CHARACTER ,
-900 1 ! LINE REF.
-901 2 ! P-ID FROM
-902 3 ! P-ID TO
-903 4 ! UNIT NO.
-904 5 ! SERVICE CODE
-905 6 ! PAINT CODE
-906 7 ! OPERATING TEMP.
-907 8 ! DESIGN TEMP.
-908 9 ! OPERATING PRESSURE
-909 10 ! DESIGN PRESSURE
-910 11 ! TEST PRESSURE
-911 12 ! TEST TYPE
-912 13 ! INSULATION THKS.
-913 14 ! HEAT TRACING
-914 15 ! INSULATION CODE
-915 16 ! DESIGN CODE
-916 17 ! MATERIAL
If the pipeline attribute mechanism is being used, do not add the same record to the
project defaults. Doing so overwrites the data when the isometric is being created by the data in
the pipeline attributes file.
543
PROJECT-MATERIAL-DATA
Contains data to add to or override the information in the SystemMaterialData.xml file. This
defines the available component types, SKEYs, PCF data and groups (and the mapping
between them) for use in other software.
This item only needs to be set on one of the mandatory I-Configure import styles, such as
SGImport or ISImport, if such a file has been created for use on a particular project.
544
PROJECT-MATERIAL-MANAGER
Contains data that adds to or overrides the information in the SystemMaterialManager.xml file.
This defines the attributes available for materials used in other software. This item only needs to
be set on one of the mandatory import styles, such as SGImport or ISImport, if such a file has
been created for use on a particular project.
545
PROJECT-PIPELINE
Contains data that adds to or overrides the information in the SystemPOD.xml file. This defines
the attributes available for different objects, such as pipelines, components, and welds, that are
used in other products.
By default, this item is set on the mandatory SGImport and ISImport styles
delivered with SmartPlant Isometrics and SmartPlant Spoolgen, respectively. This setting should
not normally be changed.
546
REFERENCE-PLANE-DEFINITION
ISOGEN can be configured to display the coordinates of nominated points in the pipeline
relative to a reference plane, rather than as absolute values. The nominated points are indicated
by the presence of LOCATION-POINT entries in the PCF. The reference plane can be a set of
steel columns and floor levels in a process plant, or it can be a set of decks and bulkheads in a
ship.
The reference planes are defined in a file and properties of this object are used to control how
ISOGEN behaves when plotting the location points. A location point table can be defined and
plotted on the isometric drawing. Optionally, location points can be shown with coordinates.
Six AlternateText numbers have been assigned to output relative directions.
-443 ^ + ? (used for positive relative position in e/w plane).
-444 ^ - ? (used for negative relative position in e/w plane).
-445 ^ + ? (used for positive relative position in n/s plane).
-446 ^ - ? (used for negative relative position in n/s plane).
-447 ^ + ? (used for positive relative position in u/d plane).
-448 ^ - ? (used for negative relative position in u/d plane).
^ is substituted with the reference plane name.
? is substituted with the distance from the reference plane.
An AText record has been assigned to be output as a delimiter text between the relative
direction and its relative position.
-449 = (default setting)
Setting AText 449 to blank only outputs the relative position.
547
REMARKS
Contains a set of texts (remarks) that can be associated with components in the pipeline by
setting the Remark property. The file content uses the format shown below:
Remark# Remark
1 Remark1
2 Remark2
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY
Contains the specific gravity values for pipeline fluid or gas contents. Each pipeline in the project
must have an entry in this file if the weight of full, or wet weight, pipelines is required to be
output.
4"-DDE-4325
4"-ARR-6000
6"-ASC-6900
548
1.1
1.0
1.2
549
APPENDIX C
Appendix: Record Identification

Numbers
Spool and In-Line Fitting Records
Spool/Fitting
Type
In Leg
First
Branch
Leg
Second
Branch
Leg
Out Leg
Bend
30
31
Elbow
35
36
Olet
40
41
42
Plus a 0 record
Tee
45
46
47
Plus a 0 record
Cross
50
51
52
53
Plus a 0 record
Reducer
(Con/Ecc)
55
Plus a 0 record
Tee Reducer
(Con/Ecc)
60
61
62
Plus a 0 record
Reducing Flange
65
Plus a 0 record
Tee Bend/Elbow
70
71
72
Plus a 0 record
Angle Valve
75
76
Plus a 0 record
3 Way Valve
80
81
82
Plus a 0 record
4 Way Valve
85
86
87
88
Plus a 0 record
Instrument
90
91
92
93
A straight through
type instrument has
only 90 and 93
record ID numbers.
Instrument dials have
only a 90 record.
96
Pcom (Misc. Pipe 95

Component)
Remarks
551
Appendix: Record Identification Numbers

Pipe (Tube)
100
Fixed Length
Pipe
101
Pipe Block (Fixed 102

Length)
Pipe Block
(Variable Length)
103
Flange
105
Lap Joint Stub

End
106
Blank Flange
(Blind)
107
Gasket
110
Bolt
115
Weld
120
Cap
125
Coupling
126
Union
127
Valve
130
Trap
132
Vent
134
Filter
136
User Positioned
Comment
149
Pipe
Hanger/Support
150
180 to 199 inclusive
Bore Record
552
Used to define
position
Reserved for internal

ISODAT processing.

End of File
Marker
999
See Also
Material Group Transfers (on page 407)
553
554
APPENDIX D
Appendix: Weld Logic

Weld logic is used to control welds. The Welds > Appearance > Controls > Show Welds,
Welds > Appearance > Controls > Show Weld Numbers, Welds > Appearance > Numbers
> Weld Types, and Welds > Appearance > Controls > Weld Number Size properties control
ISOGEN behavior regarding welds and weld numbers.
In the example below, FALSE indicates that the checkbox is not selected, whereas TRUE
indicates that the checkbox is selected.
If Show Welds is FALSE:
All weld numbering options are suppressed.
That is, Show Weld Numbers, Weld Types and Weld Number Size are ignored.
OS 53.1 = 0 (all weld numbers are suppressed)
OS 54 = 1 (all welds are suppressed)
else (Show Welds is TRUE)
If Show Weld Numbers is TRUE
Weld Types and Weld Number Size are used to control setting of Option Switch 53
Position 1, Option Switch 53 Position 4, and Option Switch 54, as shown in the table below
Weld Types
Weld Number Size
OS 53 Pos 1
OS 53 Pos 4
OS 54
All
Small
Medium
Large
Small
Medium
Large
Small
Medium
Large
Small
Medium
Large
Fabrication Only
Erection Only
OffShore Only
555
Appendix: Weld Logic

All - Implied Erection as
Fabrication
Small
Medium
Large
else (Show Weld Numbers = FALSE)

Weld Types and Weld Number Size properties are ignored
OS 53.1 = 0 (Weld numbers are suppressed)
OS 53.4 = 2 (Offshore weld numbers are suppressed)
556
Index
A
Accumulation 429, 432
Actions 121
Add/Remove Attributes Dialog Box 102
Additional 246
Additional Allowance 302
Alternative Text 475
Alternative Texts 165, 181, 212, 256, 275,
284, 336, 347, 352, 358, 410, 438, 464,
494, 511
Angle / 3 / 4 Way Valves 308
Angles 333
Appearance 452
Appendix
ISOGEN Files 519
Isometric Drawing Properties 103
Record Identification Numbers 551
Weld Logic 555
ASCII-SYMBOLS 519
Assemblies 200
Assign unique part numbers 53
AText Reference Data 12
Attribute Display 362
Attribute Table 364
Attributes 497
Attributes Page 100
B
Basic Setup Page 85
Bends 175
Bends and Branches (Coordinates) 328
BINARY-SYMBOLS 519
BOLT-INFORMATION-FILE 520
BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT Section 523
Branches 196, 501
C
Callouts 345
Centre of Gravity 116
Centreline Lengths 121
Component Attributes 153, 220
Component Tags 221
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE 520
Section 526
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTIO
N Section 529
Configuration View 23
Configure a detail sketch 63
Configure Drawing and Report Settings 49
Content 247
Continuations 247
Controls 452
Coordinates 324
Curved Pipe 323
Customize isometric style options 50
Customize report settings 78
Cut Length Calculations 500
Cut List Page 97
Cut Pieces 231, 499
D
Data 502
Data Files 497
Dates 120
Define drawing frame attributes 83
Define drawing margins and report layout
76
Define the report layout 59
Definitions 240, 362
Detail Sketch Manager 66
Detail Sketches 267
Diagnostics 119
Dimension Location 301
Dimension Style 294
Dimensions 292, 340
Display 324
Display Format 331
Documentation Comments 9
Drawing Area 166
Drawing Area Size 123
Drawing Areas Page 87
Drawing Border 361
Drawing Configuration Tools 65
Drawing Cut List 503
Drawing File 122
Drawing Generation 105
Drawing Manager 104
Drawing Material List 373
Drawing Preview Panel 26
Drawing Setup Tool 71
Drawing Splitting 111
Drawing Weld List 466
557
Index
Dual Units 301
Dynamic Fonts 282
E
Edit the North arrow on isometric drawings
50
Elbows 176
Enable revision clouds 52
Enclosure 424
Enclosures 216, 460, 491, 498
Examples 14
F
Falls and Slopes 343
File Formatting 140
Fit all drawing objects 28
Fixed 404, 474, 510
Flanges 178
Flat Spools 493
Flow Arrows 255
Format 422
FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE 522
G
Gaskets 179, 316
Get online Help information 15
Ghost Gap 256
Graphics 240
H
Hatching 342
Heat Tracing 330
Heat Treatment 133
HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE 540
I
Identifier Table 459
Identifiers 504
IDF-REVISIONS Section 530
Imperial Dimensions and Coordinates 332
Implied Weld Rules 450
Input Files 131
Instruments 171
Insulation and Tracing 252
INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE 541
INSULTATION-WEIGHT-FILE Section
530
ISOGEN Configuration 11
ISOGEN Configuration Menu 21
558
J
Jacketed Pipe 322
Joints and Assemblies 232, 432
L
Layers 244
Local Sketches 274
M
Magnify an area of the preview drawing 29
Material Attributes 158
Material Group Transfers 408
Material List Page 90
Materials 372
Messages 237
Metric Coordinates 331
Metric Dimensions 332
MISC-DEFINITIONS Section 531
Miscellaneous Attributes 161
Move and resize windows 74
Multi-Port 180
N
Navigate the Options panel 38
Navigation Techniques 33
Nominal Sizes 250
North Arrow 247
Nozzles 212
Numbering 433
Numbers 458
O
Open the Drawing Setup Tool 74
Options Panel 25
OPTION-SWITCH-OVERRIDE 542
Output File 126
Output Rules 147
Overall Dimensions 295
Overview 106
P
Pan the view 28
Part Numbers 216, 422
Penetration Plates 321
Pipe 168
Pipeline Attributes 133, 151
PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE 543
Piping Components 168
Piping Components and Features 307
Index
Piping Features 196
POD Attributes 150
Pre and Post Processor 129
Preface 9
Print welds 62
PROJECT-MATERIAL-DATA 544
PROJECT-MATERIAL-MANAGER 545
PROJECT-PIPELINE 546
Properties 135
R
Rarely Used 463
Reference Dimensions 350
Reference Planes 355
REFERENCE-PLANE-DEFINITION 547
REMARKS 548
Report Definition Panel 30
Report Types 138
Reports 137, 448, 485, 498, 517
Return to the Home screen 35
Review the Interface 17
Revision Clouds 277
S
Scale 245
Search by AText number 46
Search by I-Configure property 44
Search by keyword 41
Search by option switch 42
Search Filters 39
Sequences 455
Set drawing control options 52
Set drawing dimension options 51
Set drawing units 50
Set flow arrow options 57
Set on Tees 312
Set up a cut list 58
Set up a material list 57
Settings 129, 267, 277, 280, 350, 355,
373, 429, 450, 466, 487, 493, 503
Sheet Size 122
SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT 533
Skews and Falls 338
SKEYS Defined as Instruments 409
Spec Breaks 253
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY 548
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE Section 532
Specify the backing sheet 76
Specify the report output location 54
Spool Attributes 160
Spool Breaks 487
Spool Identifers 228

Spool Identifiers 488
SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE 535
Spools 486
Standard Dimensions 294
Standouts 298
Static Fonts 282
Status and Error Messaging 22
Style 338
Style Properties 135
Summary 131
Supports 172, 309, 329
Suppress Branch Dimensions 303
Switch to a different style category 36
Switch to a different style group in the
active category 37
Symbol Table 365
T
Table Display 364
Tap Branches 313
Tap Headers 315
Taps 206
Teed Bends and Elbows 315
Template File 125
Text 280, 438
Title Texts 371
Title Texts for Fixed Material List 371
Tolerances 117, 346
Traceability Columns 428
Traceability Table 426
U
Units 110
UNITS-DEFINITION Section 535
Update the style 85
User Defined 383, 467
User Defined Columns 392, 471
User Defined Remarks 393
User Defined Spool Table 394
User-Defined 505
User-Defined Columns 509
Using Alternative Text 12
V
Valves 170
Valves and Instruments 307
Variable 399, 472
Variable Columns 403, 473
Vertical Legs 305
View the Search history 48
559
Index
W
WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARY-FILE Section
536
Weights 115
Weld Allowances 500
Weld Attributes 160
Weld List Page 95
Weld Numbers 225
Welds 319, 449
What's New in ISOGEN Configuration 9
Z
Zoom in on an area or zoom out from a
point 28
560

ISOGENConfigurationUsersGuide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ISOGENConfigurationUsersGuide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ISOGENConfigurationUsersGuide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the document?

What is the purpose of the document?

What topics are covered in the document?

What topics are covered in the document?

ISOGEN Configuration

Version 2014 (1.0)

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

ISOGEN Configuration User's Guide

ISOGEN Configuration User's Guide

ISOGEN Configuration User's Guide

ISOGEN Configuration User's Guide

ISOGEN Configuration User's Guide

ISOGEN Configuration User's Guide

ISOGEN Configuration User's Guide

What's New in ISOGEN Configuration

ISOGEN Configuration User's Guide

ISOGEN Configuration User's Guide

Key features of ISOGEN Configuration are listed below:

Access all of the ISOGEN controls using a streamlined user interface.

Save style changes to an XML file.

ISOGEN Configuration User's Guide

AText Reference Data

Identification Number Format

Using Alternative Text

ISOGEN Configuration User's Guide

Foreign Language Use

The Usable Character Set

Upper- or lower-case letters in the range A to Z.

Numeric characters in the range 0 to 9 inclusive.

A blank space character.

The following special purpose symbols: * + - . , : [ ] ( ) # ' < > = | & %

AText and the Drawing Frame Symbols

Composite Text Messages

By combining two or more related ATexts

By combining AText and an associated design database attribute value

ISOGEN Configuration User's Guide

The material list heading ERECTION MATERIALS.

Example 1: ERECTION MATERIALS

Example 3: BATCH REF

ISOGEN Configuration User's Guide

Get online Help information

ISOGEN Configuration User's Guide

Context-sensitive Help - Provides immediate information about isometric drawing style

ISOGEN Configuration User's Guide

Review the Interface

Review the Interface

ISOGEN Configuration User's Guide

Review the Interface

It is the convention throughout the ISOGEN Configuration Help documentation to refer

ISOGEN Configuration User's Guide

Review the Interface

ISOGEN Configuration User's Guide

Review the Interface

A category appears in its on pane on the Home screen.

ISOGEN Configuration User's Guide

Review the Interface

ISOGEN Configuration Menu

About ISOGEN Configuration - Provides ISOGEN Configuration version information.